ASAP 2020: Accelerated Surface Area and Porosimetry System

ASAP 2020
Accelerated Surface Area and Porosimetry System
Operator’s Manual
V3.04
202-42801-01
January 2009
Ertalyte is a registered trademark of Quadrant Engineering Plastic Products
Kalrez and Viton are registered trademarks of DuPont Dow Elastomers L.L.C.
PharMed and Tygon are registered trademarks of Norton Company
Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours Company
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
© Micromeritics Instrument Corporation 2004-2009. All rights reserved.

The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of the agreement.
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
Organization of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Online Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Using Bookmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Using the Table of Contents, Index, and other Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Using the Find Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Equipment Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Gas Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Analysis Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Report System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Internet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
2. INSTALLATION
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Lifting the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Equipment Damage or Loss During Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Equipment Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Setting up the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Installing the Vacuum Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Oil-Based Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Dry Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Verifying Line Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Installing the Cold Trap Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Installing Saturation Pressure (Psat) Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Selecting the Computer Power Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Connecting the Gas Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Connecting a Regulator to the Gas Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Connecting the Gas Delivery Tubing to the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Connecting Cables and Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Turning On the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Turning Off the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Installing the Analysis Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Initial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using the Setup Program for Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Installing Subsequent Software Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Adding an Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Jan 09 i
Table of Contents ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Moving an Analyzer from one PC to another PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Removing an Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Changing an Analyzer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Reinstalling the Calibration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Uninstalling the Analysis Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Specifying Gas Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
3. USER INTERFACE
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Upper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Using the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Selecting Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
File Name Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Windows Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
4. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
Specifying Sample File Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Basic Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Advanced Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Creating Sample Information Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Advanced Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Basic and Restricted Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Defining Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Sample Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Degas Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Analysis Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Adsorptive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Preparing Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Choosing Sample Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Cleaning and Labeling Sample Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Determining Amount of Sample to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Determining the Mass of the Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Degassing the Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Transferring the Degassed Sample to the Analysis Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Installing Dewars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Cold Trap Dewar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
ii Jan 09
Analysis Dewar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Performing an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Printing File Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Listing File Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Exporting Isotherm Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Generating Graph Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Multiple Samples Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Multiple Graphs Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
5. FILE MENU
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Sample Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Advanced Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Basic Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Restricted Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Sample Tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Degas Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Analysis Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Adsorptive Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Summary Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Isotherm Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
BET/Langmuir Surface Area Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Freundlich Isotherm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Temkin Isotherm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
t-Plot Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Alpha-S Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
f-Ratio Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
BJH Adsorption/Desorption Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Dollimore-Heal Adsorption/Desorption Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Horvath-Kawazoe Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
DFT Pore Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Surface Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Dubinin Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
MP-Method Report Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Sample Log Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Validation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Collected/Entered Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Sample and Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
t-Curve and Alpha-S Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Save All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Close All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Jan 09 iii
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Format of Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
6. UNIT MENU
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Sample Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Start Degas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Enable Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Show Instrument Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Show Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Show Instrument Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Vacuum Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Pressure Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Pressure Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Save to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Load from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Degas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Enable Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Show Instrument Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Show Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Calibrate Pressure Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Calibrate Pressure Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Calibrate Vacuum Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Calibrate Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
7. REPORTS MENU
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Start Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Close Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Open Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
SPC Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Regression Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Control Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Heat of Adsorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Rate of Adsorption (ROA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Printed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Onscreen Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
iv Jan 09
Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Shortcut Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Zoom Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Axis Cross Hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Report Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Isotherm Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
BET Surface Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Langmuir Surface Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Freundlich Isotherm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Alpha-S Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
f-Ratio Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
BJH Adsorption/Desorption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Options Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Heat of Adsorption Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Micropore Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Horvath-Kawazoe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Dubinin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Overlay Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Same Type of Graph from Multiple Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Two Types of Graphs from Same Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
8. OPTIONS MENU
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Option Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Restricted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Sample Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Basic Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Advanced Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Graph Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Live Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Parameter Files Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Service Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
9. TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Lubricating the Elevator Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Checking the Analysis Port Dewar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Replacing the Sample Tube O-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Replacing the Port Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Analysis Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Degas Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Replacing the Vacuum Pump Exhaust Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Jan 09 v
Inspecting and Changing Vacuum Pump Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Inspecting Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Changing Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Replacing the Alumina in the Oil Vapor Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Cleaning the Cold Trap Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Calibrating the Manifold Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Testing the Analyzer for Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Cleaning the Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Calibrating the Pressure Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Calibrating the Pressure Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
10. ORDERING INFORMATION

Analysis System Components and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Sample Tubes and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Cold Trap Tubes and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
A. FORMS
ASAP Series Sample Data Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
B. ERROR MESSAGES
2200 and 2400 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
2500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
6200 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
6500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
C. CALCULATIONS
Saturation Pressure (Po) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Relative Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Free Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Volume Adsorbed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Equilibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Thermal Transpiration Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
BET Surface Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Langmuir Surface Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
t-Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
BJH Pore Volume and Area Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Explanation of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Compendium of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Horvath-Kawazoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Slit Pore Geometry (original HK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Cylinder Pore Geometry (Saito/Foley) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
vi Jan 09
Sphere Pore Geometry (Cheng/Yang) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22

Cheng/Yang Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
Interaction Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
Additional Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
Interaction Parameter Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
Dubinin-Radushkevich. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
Dubinin-Astakhov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
MP-Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
Freundlich Isotherm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
Temkin Isotherm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
DFT (Density Functional Theory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
The Integral Equation of Adsorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
Application to Surface Energy Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
Application to Pore Size Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
Performing the Deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
Regularization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
SPC Report Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
Regressions Chart Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
Control Chart Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-44
D. TESTING FOR LEAKS

Testing Individual Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Analysis Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Valves 3 and P1 through P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Valves PS, 5, and 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Valves 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 11, and PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Degas Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Valves D1 and D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Valve D7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Valves D5 and D6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
What To Do If You Detect a Leaking Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Removing Differential Pressure from a Leaking Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Repairing or Replacing a Leaking Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Repairing Valves on the Analysis Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Replacing Valves on the Degas and Gas Inlet Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Valve Data Test Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
E. CALCULATING FREE-SPACE VALUES FOR MICROPORE ANALYSES
F. DEFAULT FILES AND SYSTEM FILES
Jan 09 vii
G. DFT MODELS
Models Based on Statistical Thermodynamics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Theoretical Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Molecular Simulation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Molecular Dynamics Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Monte Carlo Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Density Functional Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Models Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Non-Local Density Functional Theory with Density Independent Weights . . . . . . . . G-7
Modified Non-Local Density Functional Theory with Density-Dependent Weights. . G-7
Models Based on Classical Theories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
Surface Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
Pore Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
Models Included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
Kelvin Equation with Halsey Thickness Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
Kelvin Equation with Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
Kelvin Equation with Broekhoff-de Boer Thickness Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13
References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15
INDEX
viii Jan 09
WARRANTY
MICROMERITICS INSTRUMENT CORPORATION warrants for one year from the date of shipment each
instrument manufactured by it to be free from defects in material and workmanship impairing its usefulness
under normal use and service conditions except as noted herein.
Our liability under this warranty is limited to repair, servicing and adjustment, free of charge at our plant, of any
instrument or defective parts, when returned prepaid to us, and which our examination discloses to have been
defective. The purchaser is responsible for all transportation charges involving the shipment of materials for
warranty repairs. Failure of any instrument or product due to operator error, improper installation, unauthorized
repair or alteration, failure of utilities, or environmental contamination will not constitute a warranty claim. The
materials of construction used in MICROMERITICS instruments and other products were chosen after extensive
testing and experience for their reliability and durability. However, these materials cannot be totally guaranteed
against wear and/or decomposition by chemical action (corrosion) as a result of normal use.
Repair parts are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 90 days from the date of
shipment.
No instrument or product shall be returned to MICROMERITICS prior to notification of alleged defect and
authorization to return the instrument or product. All repairs or replacements are made subject to factory
inspection of returned parts.
MICROMERITICS shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event repairs or modifications
are made by persons other than its own authorized service personnel unless such work is authorized in writing by
MICROMERITICS.
The obligations of this warranty will be limited under the following conditions:
1. Certain products sold by MICROMERITICS are the products of reputable manufacturers, sold under their
respective brand names or trade names. We, therefore, make no express or implied warranty as to such
products. We shall use our best efforts to obtain from the manufacturer, in accordance with his customary
practice, the repair or replacement of such of his products that may prove defective in workmanship or
materials. Service charges made by such manufacturer are the responsibility of the ultimate purchaser. This
states our entire liability in respect to such products, except as an authorized person of MICROMERITICS
may otherwise agree to in writing.
2. If an instrument or product is found defective during the warranty period, replacement parts may, at the
discretion of MICROMERITICS, be sent to be installed by the purchaser, e.g., printed circuit boards, check
valves, seals, etc.
3. Expendable items, e.g., sample tubes, detector source lamps, indicator lamps, fuses, valve plugs (rotor) and
stems, seals and O-rings, ferrules, etc., are excluded from this warranty except for manufacturing defects.
Such items which perform satisfactorily during the first 45 days after the date of shipment are assumed to be
free of manufacturing defects.
Purchaser agrees to hold MICROMERITICS harmless from any patent infringement action brought against
MICROMERITICS if, at the request of the purchaser, MICROMERITICS modifies a standard product or
manufactures a special product to the purchaser’s specifications.
MICROMERITICS shall not be liable for consequential or other type damages resulting from the use of any of
its products other than the liability stated above. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or
implied, including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for use.
One Micromeritics Drive Norcross, GA 30093-1877 Fax (770) 662-3696

Domestic Sales - (770) 662-3633 Domestic Repair Service - (770) 662-3666
International Sales - (770) 662-3660 Customer Service - (770) 662-3636
Form No. 008-42104-00

Rev. 12/95
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Organization of the Manual
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
This manual describes how to install and operate the ASAP (Accelerated Surface Area and
Porosimetry) 2020 System. It includes instructions for the following ASAP 2020 systems:
• Standard Physisorption System

• Multigas System
• Micropore System
Organization of the Manual
The manual is divided into the following chapters:
Chapter 1 General Information

Provides a general description of the ASAP 2020 system as well as its
specifications.
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION
Describes how to unpack, inspect, and install the ASAP 2020
analyzer.
Chapter 3 USER INTERFACE

Provides basic instrument and software interface.
Chapter 4 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

Provides step-by-step instructions for operating the ASAP 2020.
Chapter 5 FILE MENU

Provides a description of the commands on the File menu.
Chapter 6 UNIT MENU

Provides a description of the commands on the Unit menu.
Chapter 7 REPORTS MENU

Provides a description of the commands on the Reports menu and
samples of reports.
Chapter 8 OPTIONS MENU

Provides a description of the commands on the Options menu.
May 06 1-1
Organization of the Manual ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE

Provides instructions for troubleshooting hardware problems and for
performing routine maintenance procedures
Chapter 10 ORDERING INFORMATION

Provides part numbers and descriptions of the ASAP 2020 System
components and accessories.
Appendix A ASAP Series Sample Data Worksheet

Contains a form to assist you in determining the sample mass.
Appendix B ERROR MESSAGES

Lists the error messages that may be displayed in the analysis
program; includes a cause and action for each.
Appendix C CALCULATIONS
Contains the calculations used by the system to produce reports.
Appendix D TESTING FOR LEAKS

Describes the procedure for testing each valve for leaks.
Appendix E CALCULATING FREE-SPACE VALUES FOR MICROPORE

ANALYSES
Provides instructions for obtaining free-space values to use in
micropore analyses.
Appendix F DEFAULT FILES AND SYSTEM FILES

Provides default files shipped with the software.
Appendix G DFT MODELS

Provides information on DFT models.
Index INDEX
Provides quick access to a subject matter.
1-2 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Conventions
Conventions
This manual uses the symbols shown below to identify notes of importance, cautions, and
warnings.
Notes contain a tip or important information pertinent to the subject matter.
Cautions contain information to help you prevent actions which could damage the
instrument.
Warnings contain information to help you prevent actions which could cause personal
injury.
May 06 1-3
Online Manual ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Online Manual
For your convenience, the Operator’s Manual is available online. You can access the manual
by selecting Help, then Operator’s Manual from the analysis program main menu. The
manual appears in an Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®.
Following are some tips to help you quickly locate the information you need in the manual.
Refer to the Adobe Acrobat Help system (click the Help button on the Acrobat menu) for
more information on the Acrobat features you can use while viewing the manual.
Using Bookmarks
Click the Bookmarks tab to list and access the topics included in the manual.
Bookmarks
Topics
Navigation Pane Topic Pane
You can use the + and − buttons next to topics as they are used in Windows Explorer to
expand or collapse the topic list.
1-4 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Online Manual
To display a topic, click the topic name in the Bookmarks section. The related information
appears in the topic pane of the window as shown in the following example.
Click bookmark
to display topic.
May 06 1-5
Using the Table of Contents, Index, and other Links
Links provide direct access to selected information. All links appear in blue type. Links are
contained in:
• the table of contents

• index entries
• cross-references within the manual
Table of Contents
To display the table of contents, click Table of Contents in the Bookmarks section. When the
table of contents is displayed, you can click an entry to display its associated page. For
example, clicking Using the Software in the table of contents, displays the page containing
information about the software.
Click topic name in

table of contents to
display topic.
1-6 May 06
Index
To use the index in the online manual, click the Bookmarks tab, scroll down to INDEX (the
last topic in Bookmarks), then click the + button to expand the index. The letters A through Z
are displayed. Click a letter to display its corresponding index entries as shown in the
following example.
Click a letter to display

its index entries.
After you display the entries, locate the item of interest and click on the page reference to
access the information.
Cross References
Cross-references work in the same manner. In the example below, clicking on the cross-
reference, FILE MENU (shown on the screen in blue type) will display the first page of the
chapter describing the commands found on the File menu.
FILE MENU
Provides a description of the commands available on the File menu.
May 06 1-7
Using the Find Command
The Adobe Acrobat Find command provides another method of easily accessing specific
information. For example, suppose you want to know how the Save as command works. You
could select Edit > Find from the Adobe Acrobat menu, then enter Save as in the Find dialog.
The following example shows the results.
1-8 May 06
Printing
You can print the entire manual, a selected page, or range of pages. There are several options
for printing. You can:
• Select the printer icon ( ) on the Adobe Acrobat toolbar.
A standard Print dialog is displayed. Select the page(s) to print, then click OK. When using
this option (or the next one), be sure to enter the page number(s) displayed in Adobe
Acrobat; do not use the page number(s) listed in the footer(s) of the manual.
Do not use
number in
Enter
footer of the
this
manual.
number.
• Select File > Print.
A standard Print dialog is displayed. Select the page(s) to print, then click OK.
• Click the Thumbnails tab.
Thumbnails of manual pages are displayed.

a. Click the pages you want to print.
b. Right-click to display a shortcut menu, then select Print Pages.
c. A standard Print dialog is displayed; click OK.
Thumbnails
tab
May 06 1-9
Equipment Description ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Equipment Description
The ASAP 2020 analyzer is equipped with two independent vacuum systems — one for
sample preparation and one for sample analysis. Having two separate systems, as well as
separate preparation ports, allows sample preparation and sample analysis to occur
concurrently without interruption. Inline cold traps are located between the vacuum pump and
the manifold in both the analysis and the degas systems.The sample saturation pressure (Psat)
tube is located next to the sample analysis port. Gas inlet ports and cable connections are
located conveniently on the side panel of the analyzer for easy access.
The ASAP 2020 is equipped with an elevator that raises and lowers the analysis bath fluid
Dewar automatically. A removable shield to enclose the Dewar is also included for safety
purposes.
The ASAP 2020 system includes Micromeritics’ patented Isothermal Jackets for the sample
tube. The Isothermal Jacket maintains a stable thermal profile along the full length of the
sample and Psat tubes.
1-10 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Gas Requirements
Gas Requirements
Compressed gases are required for analyses performed by the ASAP 2020 analyzer. Gas
bottles or an outlet from a central source should be located near the analyzer.
Appropriate two-stage regulators which have been leak-checked and specially cleaned are
required. Pressure relief valves should be set to no more than 30 psig (200 kPag). Gas
regulators are available from Micromeritics; refer to Ordering Information, page 10-1.
Analysis Program
The ASAP 2020 analysis program is designed to operate in a Windows 2000 or Windows XP
Professional environment. The Windows environment provides a user-friendly interface for
performing analyses and generating reports.
The ASAP 2020 System software monitors and controls the analyzer. It enables you to
perform automatic analyses with just a few key strokes, and collects and reports analysis data.
You can choose from a variety of reports, which can be printed automatically after an analysis
or stored and printed later.
Report System
The ASAP 2020 software includes a report system which allows you to manipulate and
customize reports. You can zoom in on portions of the graphs or shift the axes to examine fine
details. Scalable graphs can be copied to the clipboard and pasted into other applications.
Reports can be customized with your choice of fonts and a company logo added to the report
header for an impressive presentation. Refer to REPORTS MENU for the options available
for reports.
May 06 1-11
Internet Access ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Internet Access
Visit www.micromeritics.com to learn more about Micromeritics, our products, and applica-
tions. Our site is user-friendly, easy to navigate, and informative. Its content is summarized
below.
About Micromeritics A brief history of Micromeritics, office locations, awards/cer-

tifications, career opportunities, and a virtual tour of its
headquarters
Products Product information and printable brochures
Applications Application Notes, Product Bulletins, Tech Tips, Technical

Articles/papers, and important application links
Online Catalog Catalog of instruments and accessories, allowing you to place

your order online
News and Press Press releases, Events calendar, microReports, and latest
Micromeritics news updates
Lab Service Provides laboratory tips and access to the Micromeritics Ana-
lytical Services web site
Customer Support Customer support contacts, product registration, instrument

training information, Material Safety Data Sheets, and account
registration
Grant Program Details of the Grant Program established for non-profit orga-
nizations and universities
Contact Us Contact information, office locations, maps and driving direc-

tions to the Micromeritics facility, and registration for the
microReport newsletter
Be sure to browse our site to see the many ways in which we can assist you.
1-12 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Specifications
Specifications
The ASAP 2020 system has been designed and tested to meet the specifications provided
below.
Characteristic Specification
—————— PRESSURE MEASUREMENT ——————
Range: 0 to 950 mmHg
Resolution:
1000-mmHg Transducer 0.001 mmHg (Analysis system)

1 mmHg (Degas system)
10-mmHg Transducer* 0.00001 mmHg
1-mmHg Transducer** 0.000001 mmHg

(optional for high stability)
Accuracy (Analysis system only):
Includes nonlinearity, hysteresis, and nonrepeatability. Transducer manufacturer’s

specifications.
1000-mmHg Range Within 0.15% of reading

10-mmHg Range* Within 0.15% of reading
1-mmHg Range** Within 0.12% of reading
—————— VACUUM SYSTEM ——————
Vacuum Pump: Mechanical, two-stage, for analysis; optional

for degas. Ultimate vacuum 5 x 10-3 mmHg.
Dry pumps available for systems equipped
with optional High Vacuum pump.
High Vacuum Pump Less than 3.8 x 10-9 mmHg

(if installed):
Ultimate vacuum measured by pump manufacturer according to Pneurop Standard

5608.
* High Vacuum systems

**Micropore systems
May 06 1-13
Specifications ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
—————— MANIFOLD TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER ——————

Type: Platinum resistance device (RTD)
Accuracy: + 0.02 oC (by keyboard entry)
—————— DEGAS SYSTEM (Optional) ——————
Temperature Range: Ambient to 450 oC
Selection: 1 oC increments
Accuracy: Deviation less than +10 oC of set point at

thermocouple
Backfill Gas: User-selectable, typically helium or nitrogen
Pressure Range: 0 to 950 mmHg

Accuracy: 1% best fit straight line
—————— SYSTEM CAPACITY ——————
Sample Preparation: 2 degas ports (optional)
Analysis: 1 sample port and 1 saturation pressure tube
Total Operating Capacity: Up to two complete analysis units can be

controlled independently by one computer
—————— CRYOGEN SYSTEM ——————
Special Features: Patented Isothermal Jackets effectively

maintain cryogen level constant on sample
tube and Po tube during analysis while
evaporation of cryogen occurs
Capacity: 3-Liter Dewar, which provides up to 72 hours

of unattended analysis.
Analysis Time: Unlimited. Cryogen Dewars may be refilled

without affecting the accuracy of results.
1-14 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Specifications
—————— SAMPLE SIZE ——————

Sample tubes are available for various size pellets, cores and powders. Sample tube
stems are normally 1.27-cm (1/2-in.) OD with 9-cc bulbs. Also available are 0.635-
(1/4-) or 0.953-cm (3/8-in.) OD with 9-cc bulbs. Special tubes can be designed to
accommodate unusual samples.
—————— ELECTRICAL ——————
Voltage: 100, 115, 230 VAC +10%
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Power: 700 VA, operating
—————— ENVIRONMENT ——————
Temperature: 10 to 30 oC storing or shipping
Humidity 20 to 80% relative, noncondensing
—————— GASES ——————
Normal: Argon, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, krypton

(Multigas system), and other suitable gases
—————— PHYSICAL ——————
Height 99 cm (39 in.)
Width: 85 cm (33.5 in.)
Depth: 61 cm (24 in.)
Weight: 115 kg (250 lbs)
—————— COMPUTER ——————
Minimum requirements: Pentium 333 MHz computer (or equivalent)

CD-ROM drive
128 megabytes of main memory
1-gigabyte hard drive
SVGA monitor (800 x 600 minimum
resolution)
Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional
May 06 1-15
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Unpacking and Inspection
2. INSTALLATION
This chapter contains instructions for the following:
• Unpacking and Inspection

• Setting Up the Analyzer
• Installing the Analysis Program
Initially, your ASAP 2020 analyzer will be installed and verified for operation by an
authorized Micromeritics service representative or a representative of a Micromeritics
distributor. If your analyzer is moved to a different location in your laboratory, use the
instructions provided in this chapter for reinstallation.
Unpacking and Inspection

When you receive the shipping cartons, carefully compare the packing list with the equipment
actually received while checking for equipment damaged during shipment. Be sure to sift
through all packing materials before declaring equipment missing.
Save the shipping cartons if equipment or parts have been damaged or lost. The
inspector or claim investigator must examine the cartons prior to completion of the
inspection report.
Lifting the Analyzer
The ASAP 2020 analyzer weighs 115 kg (250 lbs) and requires the use of two people to lift it
from its shipping carton. One person should not attempt to lift the analyzer. With one person
on each side of the analyzer, lift it upright from its shipping carton. Place the analyzer on a
table top of sufficient space.
Use proper lifting techniques to prevent back injury.
Equipment Damage or Loss During Shipment
When equipment is damaged or lost in transit, you are required to make note of the damage or
loss on the freight bill. The carrier, not the shipper, is responsible for all damage or loss. In the
event of equipment damage or loss during shipment, contact the carrier of the equipment
immediately.
Mar 05 2-1
Unpacking and Inspection ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Equipment Return
Micromeritics strives to ensure that all items arrive safely and in working order. Occasionally,
due to circumstances beyond our control, equipment is received which is not in working
condition. When it is necessary to return equipment (damaged either during shipment or while
in use) to Micromeritics for repair or replacement, use the following procedure:
1. Pack the instrument in its original shipping carton if possible. If the original carton is
unavailable, for a nominal fee, Micromeritics can provide another carton for your use.
Failure to package your instrument properly may result in shipping damage.
2. Tag or identify the defective equipment, noting the defect and circumstances, if any, under
which the defect is observed.
3. Make reference to the sales order or purchase order for the equipment, and provide the
date the equipment was received.
4. Notify the Micromeritics Service Department of the defect and request shipping
instructions. The service department will assign a Returned Materials Authorization
(RMA) number. Write the RMA number on the outside of the shipping carton.
2-2 Mar 05
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Setting up the Analyzer
Setting up the Analyzer

The ASAP 2020 System should be installed correctly and tested to ensure that it is operating
properly before actual analyses are attempted.
Installing the Vacuum Pumps
Two vacuum pumps are required for operating the ASAP 2020 analyzer when equipped with a
degas system: one for degas operations and one for analysis. A recessed cavity is provided on
the rear side of the analyzer for placement of the vacuum pumps The analysis pump (facing
the rear of the analyzer) is on the left side and the degas pump on the right side.
Two types of vacuum pumps are available, the oil-based vacuum pump and the dry vacuum
pump. Typically the dry vacuum pump is used when a mass spectrometer is attached to the
analyzer and for chemisorption analyses.
Oil-Based Systems
1. Remove the vacuum pump from its shipping carton.
2. Prepare the alumina and oil vapor trap (refer to Replacing the Alumina in the Oil Vapor
Trap on page 9-11), then install the trap onto the intake port of the vacuum pump.
Oil vapor traps reduce the amount of oil vapor that collects in the hoses leading to the
instrument.
3. Add fluid to the vacuum pump (refer to Inspecting and Changing Vacuum Pump Fluid
on page 9-9).
4. Install the vacuum pump exhaust filter (refer to Replacing the Vacuum Pump Exhaust
Filter on page 9-7).
5. Place the vacuum pump onto its drip tray and slide the tray into the right side of the
vacuum pump cavity. Be sure the power cord is facing outward; do not connect the power
cord to a power source at this time.
Mar 05 2-3
Setting up the Analyzer ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
6. Connect the flexible tubing from the analyzer to the connector on the topside of the pump.
The following illustration shows orientation of the vacuum pump and its components
attached to the flexible tubing of the analyzer.
Flexible Tubing
Hose Fitting
Centering Ring
Clamp
Oil Vapor Trap
Clamp
Centering Ring
Intake
Dry Systems
1. Remove the vacuum pump from its shipping carton.
2. Slide the vacuum pump into the left side of the vacuum pump cavity. Be sure the power
cord is facing outward; do not connect the cord to a power source at this time.
3. Set the voltage selector switch on the vacuum pump to suit the voltage of your local power
source.
4. Connect the flexible tubing from the analyzer to the connector on the topside of the pump.
2-4 Mar 05
Verifying Line Voltage Selection
Do not connect the ASAP 2020 to the power source until the proper voltage selection
is made. Doing so could result in electrical shock and/or damage to the assembly.
Verify the line voltage as follows:
1. Slide the safety gate to the right.Slide the voltage selection switch to the voltage position
to suit the available power supply. .
Line Voltage
Selection
2. Slide the safety gate to the left.
Installing the Cold Trap Tubes
The glass cold trap tubes are supplied with the accessories. Install them as follows:
1. Loosen the nut and O-ring.
2. Slide the glass tube up around the metal tube and secure it with the O-ring and nut.
Mar 05 2-5
3. Repeat for the second cold trap port.
Port
O-ring
Nut
Glass Tube
Installing Saturation Pressure (Psat) Tube
The saturation pressure tube is packaged separately. This tube must be mounted onto the Po
port located just behind the sample analysis port.
1. Remove the plastic protective cover from the saturation pressure port by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull downward.
Po Port
Plastic Protective Cap
2-6 Mar 05
2. Ensure that the O-ring is in place on the end of the saturation pressure tube. Rotate the
tube so that the isothermal jacket is closest to the analysis port. Secure the tube in place by
turning the connector nut clockwise. Tighten by hand.
Sample Port
Po Port
O-ring
Saturation Pressure Tube
Selecting the Computer Power Input
The power input selection on the computer must be set to match the input power source. The
computer operates with either 100-120 VAC or 200-240 VAC at 50 or 60 Hz. Refer to the
instruction manual supplied with your computer for instructions on selecting power input.
Do not connect the computer power cord to a power source until the proper voltage
selection is made. Doing so could result in electrical shock and/or damage to the
computer.
Mar 05 2-7
Connecting the Gas Supply
Delivery tubes for connecting the gases used with the ASAP 2020 system are supplied with
the instrument. A regulator is required for each gas bottle connected to the analyzer.
Appropriate regulators are available from Micromeritics. Refer to Ordering Information on
page 10-1 for part numbers.
Connecting the gas supply involves three procedures; you must:
• connect a regulator to each gas bottle that is being attached to the analyzer
• connect the gas bottle(s) to the analyzer’s gas inlet(s)
• specify (using the software) which gas is attached to the inlet(s)
The first two procedures are found below; refer to Specifying Gas Ports on page 2-26 to
perform the third procedure, which cannot be performed until after software installation.
Connecting a Regulator to the Gas Bottle
1. Leave the gas bottle shut-off valve closed until instructed otherwise.
Bottle Shut-Off Valve

Two-stage Pressure
Reducing Regulator
Shut-Off
Valve Nut
Brass Reducer
Fitting Pressure
Control knob
Regulator
Tubing Gas Bottle
Shut-Off
2. If the regulator has a 1/8-in. outlet, proceed to the next step. If the regulator has a 1/4-in.
outlet, attach the reducer fitting to the outlet of the regulator shut-off valve.
3. Close the regulator shut-off valve.
Do not overtighten the fittings. Doing so could collapse the tubing and cause a leak.
4. Attach the copper delivery tubing to the regulator or reducer fitting. Do not connect the
other end of the tubing.
2-8 Mar 05
5. Purge the regulator as follows:
a. Close the regulator shut-off valve by turning it fully clockwise.
b. Turn the pressure regulator control knob fully counterclockwise.
c. Open the gas bottle valve by turning it counterclockwise, then close the gas bottle
valve.
d. Observe the high pressure gauge. If the pressure decreases, tighten the nut connecting
the regulator to the gas bottle. If the pressure is stable, proceed to Step e.
e. Turn each pressure regulator control knob clockwise until the outlet pressure gauge
indicates 10 psig (0.7 bar). Open each regulator shut-off valve by turning it
counterclockwise briefly. Then close each valve.
f. Make sure the gas bottle valve is completely closed.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each gas bottle to be attached to the analyzer.
7. Proceed to the next section to attach the other end(s) of the copper delivery tubing to the
analyzer.
Connecting the Gas Delivery Tubing to the Analyzer
The ASAP 2020 analyzer allows for connection of up to six physisorption gases, a gas for
degassing, a helium port for the free-space gas, and a Vapor port for water vapor analyses. The
helium gas bottle is connected to the analyzer for use in free-space measurements. Other gases
can also be used as the analysis gas. Nitrogen or helium (or other suitable gas) can be used as
the degas backfill gas.
Gas inlet connections, located on the right side panel of the analyzer, are labeled 1 through 6
for the physisorption gases, Degas for the backfill gas, and Helium for the free-space
measurement. A vapor gas inlet is also provided for water vapor analyses.
Degas Backfill
Freespace
Helium
These ports are available for chemisorption

analyses. Refer to Chapter 10 for ordering
information on the Chemi upgrade.
Mar 05 2-9
A typical hook-up for gases is as follows:
1 Nitrogen
2 Argon
3 Carbon dioxide
4 Krypton
5 As desired
6 As desired
Degas Backfill Nitrogen
Freespace Helium Helium
Attach the other end of the copper tubing (from the regulator) to the appropriate gas port on
the side of the analyzer.
Be sure to specify which gas is attached to the ports you are using. Refer to
Spedifying Gas Ports on page 2-26.
Connecting Cables and Power Cords
All cables must be connected securely to their respective connectors for proper operation of
the analyzer and its peripheral equipment.
Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the computer, video monitor, and
printer for voltage requirements for these units.
1. Connect the keyboard cable, the monitor cable, and the mouse cable into their respective
connectors on the rear panel of the computer. Refer to the manual provided with your
computer if you are unsure of connector locations.
Some monitors and printers shipped from the United States must be connected to a
100-120 VAC power source. Connecting this equipment to a 200-240 VAC power
source could result in electrical shock and/or damage to the equipment.
2. Plug one end of the printer cable into the connector on the rear panel of the printer. Plug
the other end of the printer cable into the connector labeled LPT1 (may be labeled
PARALLEL) on the rear panel of the computer.
3. Plug one end of the instrument communications cable into the connector labeled RS232
on the right side of the analyzer. Plug the other end into the communications port on the
computer.
4. Insert one end of the analyzer power cord into the input power connector on the right side
of the analyzer and the other end into an appropriate power source.
2-10 Mar 05
5. Plug all other power cords, including the vacuum pumps, into an appropriate power
source.
6. Turn on the power to the vacuum pumps, but do not turn on the instrument power at this
time.
Turning On the System
1. Place the ON/OFF switches for the computer and all peripheral devices in the ON
position.
2. Place the analyzer ON/OFF switch in the ON position; verify that the green power
indicator on the front panel is illuminated.
Turning Off the System
Always exit the ASAP 2020 program and/or Windows before turning off the computer.
Failure to do so could result in loss of data.
1. Select Close from the System Menu or Exit from the File menu.
2. If you exit the ASAP 2020 program with analyses in progress, you will be warned of the
operation. If desired, you can continue with exiting the application and the analyses will
proceed and continue to collect data. Reports that are queued under the Print Manager will
print. If, however, a power failure occurs and an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is not
attached to the computer, the data collected after exiting the ASAP 2020 System program
are lost.
3. Place the computer, monitor, printer, and plotter (if used) ON/OFF switches in the OFF
position.
4. Place the analyzer Main Power switch in the OFF position.
Mar 05 2-11
Installing the Analysis Program ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Installing the Analysis Program

Your system must meet or exceed the following requirements before you can install the
software:
• Pentium 333MHz computer (or equivalent)

• CD-ROM drive
• 128 megabytes of main memory
• 1-gigabyte hard drive
• SVGA monitor (800 x 600 minimum resolution)
• Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional
The ASAP 2020 program is also available as a standalone option so that you can install it on a
computer other than the one controlling the analyzer. This allows you to create or edit sample
and parameter files, as well as generate reports on completed sample files. Review the
Micromeritics PROGRAM License Agreement for restrictions on the use of additional copies.
Power Management features should be disabled so that the Micromeritics

application can communicate properly with the instrument during operation. These
features can be disabled in the computer Setup configuration through Windows NT
or through a utility supplied by the computer manufacturer.
Initial Installation
The ASAP 2020 System program is supplied on a CD. Perform the following steps to install
the program:
1. Turn on the analyzer.
2. Insert the program CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Select Start from the Status bar, then Run from the Start menu.
4. Enter the name of the drive designator, followed by setup. For example:
e:setup
2-12 Mar 05
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Installing the Analysis Program
5. Click OK; the New Installation dialog is displayed.
Displays the amount of current

disk space and the amount
required for installation of the
application. Also displays the
directory into which the
application will be installed.
Select this option to add the

ASAP 2020 icon to your desktop
for quick access to the application.
You may cancel the installation at any time by selecting Exit. If you do so, you must
start the installation program from the beginning to install the analysis program.
The Destination Folder group box displays the amount of current disk space, the amount
of disk space required for the analysis program, and the directory into which the
application will be installed. If you wish to install the application into a different directory,
click Browse to choose the directory.
6. If you want to run the application from the desktop, select the check box just below the
Destination Folder group box to add an icon.
7. The ASAP 2020 icon is added to the Micromeritics folder by default. If you prefer a
different folder, enter or select one from the drop-down list.
8. Click Next; the Analyzer Configuration dialog is displayed.
Mar 05 2-13
In the Step 1 group box, click the radio button for the number of analyzers to be attached to
this computer. If you are attaching two analyzers, make sure your computer has two serial
ports.
Choose 0 (zero) if you are installing this program for data reduction on a computer
other than the one controlling the analyzer.
9. In the Step 2 group box, enter the analyzer serial number(s) and the communications port
to which it will be attached.
10. Click Next; the Calibration File Installation dialog is displayed. Read the information in
the dialog and proceed accordingly.
If you selected zero (0) as the number of instruments to install, the Calibration dialog
is not displayed.
11. After the calibration files are installed, the Installation Complete dialog box containing the
Readme file is displayed.
12. Use the scroll bar if you want to read the contents of the file, then click Finish to close the
dialog.
13. Remove the Setup CD and store in a safe place. The original Setup CD contains the
calibration files specific to your instrument. Upgrade CDs do not contain calibration files.
Therefore, it is important that you maintain your original Setup CD in a secure location in
the event calibration files need to be reinstalled.
2-14 Mar 05
Using the Setup Program for Other Functions
After initial installation of the ASAP 2020 analysis program, the application setup program
can be used to:
• Upgrade software
• Add an analyzer
• Move an analyzer from one computer to another computer
• Remove an analyzer from the computer
• Change the analyzer setup
• Reinstall calibration files
• Uninstall the analysis program
To start the application setup program:
1. Ensure that the analysis program is not operating.
2. Insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Select Start from the Status bar.
4. Select Run from the start menu.
5. Enter the drive designator of the CD-ROM drive, followed by setup. For example:
e:setup.
Alternatively, you can click Browse, navigate to your CD-ROM drive, and select
setup.exe.
6. Click OK; the setup Welcome screen showing the options available is displayed.
Mar 05 2-15
Installing Subsequent Software Versions
When you install a software upgrade, the system installs all of the application files and any
status files that do not already exist on the computer. Existing analyzer status files are not
affected and default and data files are not overwritten. There are three types of subsequent
installation; the software version controlled by the setup program is:
• a later version than the version installed on the computer

• the same version as the version installed on the computer
• an earlier version than the version installed on the computer
The setup program automatically detects which type of installation applies and customizes the
selection in the Setup dialog accordingly.
1. Start the Setup program. Choose the software option; remember, only the applicable
option will display; it will be one of the following:
• Upgrade software to version (number) from version (number)

• Reinstall software version (number)
• Downgrade software to version (number) from version (number)
2. Click Start File Installation; the application installs the software and redisplays the setup
Welcome dialog. If no other operations are desired using this dialog, click Exit to close the
dialog.
Adding an Analyzer
Add an analyzer to the existing application as follows:
1. Start the Setup program. Select Add an analyzer, then click Next; the Setup analyzer
dialog is displayed.
2-16 Mar 05
2. Enter the serial number of the analyzer being added, then the communications port to
which it is to be connected.
3. Click Next; the Calibration Installation dialog is displayed.
4. Select the location of the calibration source files. If the calibration files are located in a
directory other than the one displayed, click Browse to select the directory. Click Finish;
a media change dialog is displayed.
5. Click OK to install the calibration files. A dialog containing the Readme file is displayed
after the calibration files are installed.
6. Click Exit to close the dialog.
Mar 05 2-17
Moving an Analyzer from one PC to another PC
You can move an analyzer, along with its status and calibration files, from one computer
(Source PC) to another computer (Destination PC).
This operation does not move sample or parameter files. To move these files, use a
file management program such as Explorer or a backup/restore utility.
1. Install the application program on the destination computer. Refer to Installing the
Analysis Program on page 2-12.
If the analysis program is already installed on the destination computer, proceed to Step 2.
2. Start the application setup program on the source computer. Refer to Using the Setup
Program for Other Functions on page 2-15.
3. In the Setup dialog, select Move an analyzer from one PC to another PC, then click
Next; the Move analyzer operation dialog is displayed.
2-18 Mar 05
4. Select Source PC, then click Next; the following dialog is displayed.
5. In the Step 1 group box, select the analyzer that is to be moved.
6. In the Step 2 group box, choose a location in which the moved files will be stored. If
possible, choose a diskette drive or a shared network drive. If this is not possible, select a
local folder. After the files are placed there, use a folder transfer utility (for example,
Backup and Restore) to copy this folder from the Source PC to the Destination PC.
7. Click Finish; the files are moved and the setup Welcome screen is displayed.
8. Start the application setup program on the destination computer.
9. In the Setup dialog, select Move an analyzer from one PC to another PC; the Move
analyzer operation dialog is displayed (shown on previous page).
Mar 05 2-19
10. Select Destination PC, then click Next; the following dialog is displayed.
11. In the Step 1 group box, enter the serial number of the analyzer being moved and the
communications port to which it will be attached.
12. In the Step 2 group box, click Browse and choose the location of the moved files.
13.Click Finish; the files are moved and the setup Welcome dialog is displayed.
2-20 Mar 05
Removing an Analyzer
You can remove an analyzer from the computer as follows. When you remove an analyzer, the
status files are removed as well.
1. Start the Setup program. Refer to Using the Setup Program for Other Functions on
page 2-15.
2. From the Setup dialog, select Remove an analyzer, then click Next; the Remove an
analyzer dialog is displayed.
3. From the drop-down list, choose the serial number of the analyzer you want to remove.
4. Click Remove; the analyzer is removed and the Welcome screen is again displayed.
Mar 05 2-21
Changing an Analyzer Setup
Change the analyzer setup as follows:
1. Start the Setup program. Refer to Using the Setup Program for Other Functions on
page 2-15.
2. From the Setup dialog, select Change analyzer setup, then click Next; the Change
analyzer setup dialog is displayed.
3. From the drop-down list, choose the analyzer you want to change.
4. Enter the new port number in the space provided.
5. Click Finish; the change is completed and the Welcome dialog is again displayed.
2-22 Mar 05
Reinstalling the Calibration Files
You can reinstall the files containing an analyzer’s factory calibration data as follows:
1. Start the Setup program. From the Setup dialog, select Re-install calibration files for an
analyzer, then click Next; the Re-install calibration files dialog is displayed.
2. Select the analyzer whose calibration files you wish to reinstall from the drop-down list. If
you have only one analyzer installed, a drop-down list is not included.
3. Insert the CD containing the calibration files; ensure that the CD drive is displayed as the
calibration file source location. If not, click Browse and choose the CD drive.
4. Click Finish; the calibration files are reinstalled and the Welcome dialog is again
displayed.
Mar 05 2-23
Uninstalling the Analysis Program
When you uninstall the ASAP 2020 analysis program, the application removes the analysis
program, status files, analyzer setup files, and resulting empty directories. It does not remove
data files. Perform the following steps to uninstall the program:
1. Start the Setup program. From the Setup dialog, select Uninstall, then click Next; the
Uninstall dialog is displayed.
2. Click Uninstall; the Select Uninstall Method dialog is displayed.
2-24 Mar 05
3. Choose one of the following:
Automatic: click Next; the system uninstalls the analysis program automatically and the
setup Welcome dialog redisplays.
Custom: click Next; a series of dialogs is displayed, allowing you to choose the files you
wish to uninstall. After all files are selected and uninstalled, the setup Welcome dialog
redisplays.
4. Click Exit to close the Welcome dialog.
Mar 05 2-25
Specifying Gas Ports
After all desired gases have been attached to the analyzer, perform the following steps to
specify gas ports:
1. Select Unit > Unit Configuration; the Unit Configuration dialog is displayed.
2. Click Gas; the Gas Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. Click on the down-arrow at each field for the ports to which gases are attached and choose
the appropriate gas.
Gases may be added to the drop-down list using the Adsorptive Properties dialog. Refer to
Adsorptive Properties on page 4-12.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box, and then again to close the Unit Configuration dialog.
2-26 Mar 05
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
3. USER INTERFACE
This chapter contains information to familiarize you with the hardware and software of the
ASAP 2020 system. It is recommended that you read this chapter before attempting to operate
the ASAP 2020 system.
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
This section contains a description of the controls, indicators, and connectors located on the
front, side, and rear panels of the ASAP 2020 system.
Front Panel
Indicator Light
Vacuum Pump
Panel
Elevator
Green indicator light Illuminated when power is applied to the analyzer.
May 06 3-1
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Vacuum pump panel Allows access to the vacuum pumps. Remove this panel
when you need to service the pumps.
It is not necessary to remove the panel to inspect the condi-

tion of the oil or the oil level (oil-sealed forepump). To
accomplish either of these tasks, remove (or fold over to the
right) the protective rubber mat from the work surface and lift
off the metal cover; this exposes the vacuum pump sight win-
dow.
Vacuum pump sight The vacuum pump sight windows enable you to inspect the
window oil levels in the degas and analysis pumps.
Vacuum pump drain Provides a convenient method of draining fluid from the
pump when service is required.
High vacuum pump A high vacuum pump is used on all but the basic nitrogen
instrument. A second high vacuum pump is installed as an
option on the degas system.
Connections, as well as an on/off (breaker) switch, are

located on the front right side of the analyzer beneath the
work surface. Remove (or fold over to the left) the rubber mat
from the work surface and lift off the metal cover.
Indicator lights (located on the underside of the upper exten-

sion of the front panel) illuminate when the high vacuum
pump is operating. Left light = degas; right light = analysis.
Elevator Allows placement of the Dewar around the sample tube.
3-2 May 06
The components listed here are located on the underside of the upper extension of the front
panel.
Sample Port
Cold Traps High Vacuum
Heating Mantle Power Connector Pump indicators
Po Port
Degas Port
Heating Mantle
Heating Mantle Thermocouple Four hangers are provided for place-
Breaker
Connector ment of safety shields.
Degas ports Allow you to degas up to two samples. Each degassing port
has connections for a heating mantle.
Heating mantle Allows connection of a heating mantle thermocouple (one for

thermocouple each degas port).
Heating mantle power connec- Allows connection of the heating mantle power cord (one for
tor each heating mantle).
Heating mantle breaker Protects the circuitry for the heating mantle in the event of a
failure (one for each heating mantle). If the circuit breaker
trips (pops out), call your Micromeritics service representa-
tive.
Cold Traps Two cold traps are provided; one for degassing and one for
analysis.
May 06 3-3
High vacuum pump Illuminate when the high vacuum pumps are operating at nor-
indicators mal speed. The left indicator is for degas operations and the
right one for analysis.
Sample port For installing the sample tube containing the material you
wish to analyze.
Po port For installing a Po (saturation pressure) tube when perform-

ing physisorption analyses.
Side Panel
Upper
Chemisorption Ports
(available if upgraded to
Chemisorption capability)
Gas Inlet Ports
Vapor Gas Port Degas Backfill Port
Freespace Helium
Port
Gas inlet ports Used to connect gas supplies to the analyzer.
Vapor gas port For attaching the water vapor option, or connecting a vapor
gas. Refer to Ordering Information on page 10-1 for the
part number of the water vapor option.
Degas Backfill port Allows connection of a gas to use for degassing the sample.
Freespace Helium port Allows connection of helium to use for measuring the free
space.
3-4 May 06
Lower
RS 232 Port
Valve Circuit Power Connector

Breaker
Voltage Selector
On/Off Switch
On/Off switch For turning the analyzer on and off. This switch also serves as
the main breaker for the analyzer; it switches off automati-
cally in the event of an electrical fault.
Power connector For connecting the analyzer to the electrical supply.
RS232 port For connecting the analyzer to a computer.
Valve circuit breaker Protects the circuitry for the valves in the event of a failure. If
the circuit breaker trips (pops out), call your Micromeritics
service representative.
Voltage selector switch For setting the analyzer to the correct incoming AC line volt-
age.
May 06 3-5
Rear Panel
Vacuum Pump
Location
Vacuum pump recess Provides for placement of the vacuum pumps. Vacuum
pumps can be serviced from the front of the instrument by
removing the vacuum pump panel located on the lower left
side of the front panel (see Front Panel described previ-
ously).
3-6 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Using the Software
Using the Software
The analysis program operates in the Windows environment and requires familiarity with stan-
dard Windows operations such as using the mouse, menus, and dialog boxes. While this
manual provides brief instructions for such standard operations, you may have to refer to your
Windows documentation or to its online help system to clarify functions which are specific to
Windows.
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus (sometimes referred to as context-sensitive menus or pop-up menus) are avail-
able for certain components on the instrument schematic when in manual mode, and for
onscreen graphs and tabular reports. These menus are accessed by selecting the item for which
you wish to display its menu and clicking the right mouse button. For example, right-click in a
column of an onscreen report and the following menu is displayed.
Shortcut Keys
Shortcut keys can be used to activate some menu commands. Shortcut keys or key combina-
tions (if assigned) are listed to the right of the menu item. Instead of opening the menu and
choosing the command, simply press the key combination. For example, to open a sample
information file, press F2; the Open Sample Information dialog is displayed.
You can also use shortcut keys to access a menu or any function that contains an underlined
letter by pressing Alt plus the underlined letter in the command. For example, to access the
File menu, press Alt, then F.
Table 3-1 provides a list of the keys available in the ASAP 2020 analysis program.
May 06 3-7
Using the Software ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Table 3-1. Shortcut Keys
Key(s) Function
F1 Access online operator’s manual
F2 Open a sample information file
Clear the field of existing date (Select Dates dialog)
F3 Open an analysis conditions file
Insert the current date (Select Dates dialog)
F4 Open an adsorptive properties file
Display a calendar from which to choose a date (Select Dates dialog)
F5 Open a report options file
F6 Tile open windows
F7 Cascade open windows
F8 Start report
F9 Close all open reports
F10 Generate a Heat of Adsorption report
Alt + F4 Exit the ASAP 2020 program
Shift + F2 List sample information files
Shift + F3 List analysis conditions files
Shift + F4 List adsorptive properties files
Shift + F5 List report options files
Shift + F9 Access shortcut menu of (1) selected component on instrument

schematic, or (2) onscreen reports
3-8 May 06
Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes are displayed when a menu item followed by an ellipsis (...) is selected. Subdia-
log boxes are displayed when certain push buttons are selected. Both types of boxes may
contain one or more of the items listed below.
Radio Button
Data Entry Field
Check Box
Grayed Item
(indicates unavailable)
Information Bar
Push Button
The following describes elements that are often included in dialog boxes. If an element is
shown in gray instead of black, the element is currently unavailable.
Data Entry Fields A Data Entry field is used to enter text; either numeric (num-
bers only) or alphanumeric (numbers, letters, or printable
characters).
If an invalid entry is made, an error message is displayed; for

example, if you attempt to enter text in a numeric field or a
number outside of the range shown in the information bar..
Information Bar Some dialog boxes contain information pertinent to the

selected field in an information bar across the bottom of the
dialog. For example, a range is shown for fields in which
numeric entries are required.
Radio buttons Radio buttons are provided in groups of two or more and are
used to make a choice; only one radio button can be selected.
Simply click the desired option with your mouse pointer. A
black dot indicates the item is selected.
Check boxes Check boxes allow you to choose multiple options from a
group of options. Click the desired option(s) with your mouse
pointer. An X in the box indicates the item is selected;
remove the X in the same manner.
May 06 3-9
Push Buttons A push button is used to display a subdialog box in which to

enter additional information about the subject matter, or to
invoke an action.
For example, if you click Date Range on the Open Sample

Information dialog box, the Select Dates subdialog box is dis-
played. If you click Cancel on the Open Sample Information
dialog box, you invoke the action of canceling and closing
the dialog box.
Close Closes the active dialog. If the dialog box contains unsaved
changes, you will be prompted to save them before the dialog
box closes.
Any information entered in subdialog boxes (refer to the next

section of this chapter), is discarded also.
Save Saves the information entered in the current session; the dia-
log box remains open.
Replace Allows you to replace the contents of the current file with
those from an existing file. For example, if you are creating
an analysis conditions file, you can save time by clicking and
choosing the file containing the values you wish to use. These
values are copied into the current file automatically. And
since the values are actually just copied into the file, you can
edit them in any way you wish. The file from which they
were copied remains intact and ready for the next use.
Cancel Discards everything you entered in the dialog box and any
subdialog boxes, and closes the dialog box. A warning mes-
sage is displayed before closing.
Drop-down list A drop-down list contains a list of options and is indicated by

a down arrow to the right of the field. If there are more items
than can fit in the box, a scroll bar is provided for navigating
through the list.
3-10 May 06
Selecting Files
Sample information is stored in files and saved under file names. Certain dialog boxes contain
a Files list box which displays a list of files available for that particular operation. For exam-
ple, the Open Sample Information File dialog.
The Status drop-down

list does not appear on
the Open dialog boxes
for parameter files.
Displays the
current
directory.
Displays all files of
the type in the Status
field.
A default string appears in the File name field. To select a file, simply move the mouse pointer
to the desired file in the list and double-click.
You can limit the list of files displayed by choosing one or more of the following options:
• Use wildcard characters in the path name entered in the File name field. Standard and
wildcard characters (such as * and ?) can be used to filter file names. For example, you
could limit the list of files shown in the dialog above to those beginning with 13x by enter-
ing 13x*.SMP in the file name field.
• Enter a range of dates. Click Date Range; the Select Dates dialog is displayed.
Select Show Date Range to enable the From and To fields, then enter a beginning and
ending date. Or you can double-click in each field to display a calendar to select a date.
The range of dates remains the default until you change the dates or select Show All
Dates.
May 06 3-11
For convenience, the following shortcut keys are available when the Select Dates dialog is
displayed:
F2 Clears the date

F3 Inserts the current date
F4 Displays a calendar from which you may select a date
• Select a file status from the Status drop-down list. For example, choose Complete from
the drop-down list and only files that have been used in an analysis are displayed. The
table shown below describes each file status.
The Status drop-down list does not appear on the File, Open dialogs for parameter
files.
Table 3-2. File Status and Description
Status Description
All All sample information files in the specified directory and within the
specified range of dates
Analyzing Sample information files that are currently being used with an analysis
Complete Sample information files that have been used with an analysis
Entered Sample information files that contain manually entered data
No analysis Sample information files that have not been used in a degassing operation or
an analysis
Prepared Sample information files that have been used in an automatic degassing
operation and are ready for analysis
Preparing Sample information files that are currently being used in an automatic
degassing operation
• Navigate to a different directory. The current directory is displayed just above the Directo-
ries list box. You can change directories by double-clicking a directory in the Directories
list box, double-clicking [..] to move up one level, or by entering the desired directory in
the File Name field. For example, enter C:\2020files\sample\*.smp to display sample files
in the 2020files\sample directory on your local drive.
3-12 May 06
File Name Conventions
For sample information and parameter files, a wildcard character (*) and a default extension
display.
The following table shows the file name extensions for the ASAP 2020 program.
Table 3-3. Default File Name Extensions
File Type Extension
Sample Information SMP
Sample Tube STB
Degas Conditions DEG
Analysis Conditions ANC
Report Options RPO
Adsorptive Properties ADP
Export to disk (ASCII) ISO
Sample information files from the ASAP 2000 analyzers; may be DAT
converted to an ASAP 2020-compatible format
Report to disk RPT
List to disk LST
Thickness curve THK
Alpha-s curve ALS
The following types are available for reports saved from the Report window
Report REP
Spreadsheet XLS
ASCII TXT
May 06 3-13
Menu Structure ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Menu Structure
All functions for the ASAP 2020 are located on menus which are accessed from the Menu bar.
Each menu contains commands, and in some cases a submenu. A submenu is indicated when
the command is followed by an arrow.
Menu Name
Menu Bar
Command
Submenu
Brief descriptions of each menu are provided below; refer to the chapter given in parentheses
for a detailed description of the commands contained on that menu.
File Enables you to maintain system files. (Chapter 5, FILE MENU)
Unit [n] Enables you to perform analyses and other instrument operations.
(Chapter 6, UNIT MENU))
Reports Enables you to generate, customize, and close reports. Also pro-
vides examples of reports. (Chapter 7, REPORTS MENU)
Options Enables you select data presentation formats, and enter system
default values. (Chapter 8, OPTIONS MENU)
Windows Enables you to arrange the windows and icons on your screen. It
also displays the names of all open files. (this chapter, page 3-15)
Help Displays Help information. (this chapter, page 3-15)
3-14 May 06
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Menu Structure
Windows Menu
Tile Resizes all open windows and arranges them side by side so
that the contents of all open windows are visible.
Cascade Resizes all open windows and arranges them in a stacked

fashion. The active window is positioned on top of the stack.
Each window’s title remains visible, making it easy to select
other windows.
Arrange Icons Arranges the symbols for all minimized windows in an

orderly manner.
Open Files Displays all open files; the active window is preceded with a
check mark.
Help Menu
Operator’s Manual Displays the operator’s manual in PDF format.
About ASAP 2020 Displays information about the ASAP 2020 analysis pro-
gram
May 06 3-15
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Specifying Sample File Defaults
4. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
This chapter contains brief step-by-step instructions on how to:
• specify sample file defaults, this page

• create sample information files, page 4-5
• define parameter files, page 4-8
• prepare the sample page, 4-15
• perform an analysis page, 4-28
• generate a list of information on a sample or parameter file, page 4-31
• print contents of a sample or parameter file, page 4-30
• export data in a sample information file to an ASCII file, page 4-32
• overlay graphs, page 4-33
This chapter does not contain detailed descriptions of the dialogs used to perform these
procedures. Refer to Chapters 5 through 8 for dialog descriptions. Use the index to assist you
in locating the appropriate dialog.
Specifying Sample File Defaults

You can specify sample defaults in the Basic or Advanced format. The defaults you specify are
the ones you see when you create a new sample file in the respective format. Therefore, it is
best to specify (or enter) parameters that you plan to use most frequently. For example; specify
defaults for your most commonly analyzed sample material. You can always edit parameters in
the sample file when it is created. The ASAP 2020 system automatically generates sample
information file names and uses the values you specify as the defaults.
Basic Format
Perform the following steps to define defaults for a sample information file in the Basic
format.
Select Option Presentation on the Options menu and ensure that Basic is selected as
the format.
1. Select Options > Sample Defaults; the default Basic Sample Information dialog is
displayed.
Mar 08 4-1
Specifying Sample File Defaults ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
2. In the Sequence field, specify a default string. This is the number that is incrementally
sequenced and displays in the File name field when you select File, Open, Sample
information. You can use up to eight characters.
3. In the field on the right of the Sample line, enter a format for the sample identification. Be
sure to include the $ symbol if you want the sample file number included as part of the
identification. You can use up to 42 alphanumeric characters.
You also can edit the word Sample. For example, you may prefer to use Material or
Test. You can enter up to 15 characters in this field.
4. Enter a default value in the Mass field. An approximate weight is sufficient; a more
accurate weight can be entered later.
5. The sample density is used when free space is calculated; enter a default for your sample’s
density if you typically use a calculated free space. Otherwise, this value is ignored.
6. Select the down arrow to the right of the parameter fields to choose default parameter
files:
• Sample tube
• Degas conditions
• Analysis conditions
• Adsorptive properties
• Report options
7. Click Save, then Close.
4-2 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Specifying Sample File Defaults
Advanced Format
The Advanced Sample Defaults dialog resembles a set of index cards. You can move from one
set of parameters to another by clicking the parameter tab or by using Next and Prev. The
values you specify in the parameter portions of the sample file (Analysis Conditions, Degas
Conditions, Adsorptive Properties, and Report Options) are saved as the defaults for newly
created parameter files.
For example, after specifying defaults for a sample file in the Advanced format:
• Select File > Open > Sample Information, Yes to create the file, and the defaults you
specify display for all parameters.
• Select File > Open > Analysis Conditions, enter a name, then Yes to create the file,
and the defaults you specify in the Analysis Conditions portion of the Advanced Sample
Defaults dialog display in the fields.
Select Option Presentation on the Options menu and ensure that Advanced is selected
as the format.
1. Select Options > Sample Defaults, the default Advanced Sample Defaults dialog is
displayed.
2. In the Sequence field, specify a default string for the sample file number; you can use up
to eight characters. This is the number that appears in the File name field when you select
File > Open > Sample information.
Mar 08 4-3
Specifying Sample File Defaults ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
3. In the right-side field of the Sample line, enter a format for the sample’s identification.
You can enter up to 42 characters. Be sure to include the $ symbol if you want the sample
file number (Sequence) included as part of the identification.
4. Edit the Operator and Submitter lines as desired. Or have them omitted entirely by
selecting Omit.
5. Enter a default value in the Mass field. An approximation in this field will suffice; a more
accurate value for the sample mass can be entered at the time of analysis.
6. If you plan to use a calculated free space, enter the sample’s density in the Density field.
7. Choose whether you wish to have data collected automatically or if you plan to enter the
data. This option can be changed (if desired) at the time of analysis.
8. If you plan to report statistical process control (SPC) information, enter appropriate
information. These are user-definable parameters that can be entered and tracked along
with other statistical process control data; refer to Sample Defaults, page 8-4 for
additional information on these parameters.
9. Click the Sample Tube tab. Enter criteria for the sample tube you most commonly use,
then click Save.
You can click Save on each dialog as you specify parameters, or you can click Save
on any dialog after all parameters have been specified. All dialog defaults will be
saved.
10. Click the Analysis Conditions tab. Choose the analysis conditions appropriate for your
most commonly analyzed material, then click Save.
11. Click the Degas Conditions tab. Specify degassing criteria, then click Save.
12. Click the Adsorptive Properties tab. Specify gas characteristics, then click Save.
13. Click the Report Options tab. Choose desired reports, using Edit to specify details; then
click Save.
14. Click Close to close the dialog.
4-4 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Creating Sample Information Files
Creating Sample Information Files

A sample information file must be assigned to every sample that is analyzed. When you create
a sample file, you can accept the default values specified using Sample Defaults, or you can
edit them as desired. You can create a sample information file using the Advanced, Basic, or
Restricted format.
Advanced Format
The Advanced format allows you to customize the parameters of a sample information file.
Chapter 5 provides a description of the fields associated with creating sample information
files.
1. Select File > Open > Sample information; the Open Sample Information File dialog is
displayed.
2. Accept the next sequenced file number or enter a new name in the File name field.
3. Click OK, then Yes to create the file; the Sample Information dialog is displayed.
These fields do not

display if you
selected Omit when
specifying sample
defaults.
The defaults that appear in the fields are the ones specified in Sample Defaults.
4. Accept the default identification in the Sample field or change it to an appropriate one.
The dialog box above shows the sample file number because the dollar ($) symbol was
used when specifying sample defaults.
If a sample information file already exists containing the values you want to use in
this file, you can click Replace all to copy those values into this one. You can still
edit the values after they are loaded.
Mar 08 4-5
Creating Sample Information Files ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
5. Edit the Operator and/or Submitter fields as needed. If these fields are not displayed,
they were selected to be omitted in Sample Defaults.
6. Enter the sample’s mass (if different from the default value) in the Mass field.
7. Choose whether you want data automatically collected by the system or whether you wish
to enter the data.
8. Unless you are gathering statistical process control information, it is unnecessary to enter
parameter values. These are user-definable parameters that can be entered and tracked
along with other statistical process control data; refer to Sample Defaults, page 8-4 for
information on user parameters.
Use the Comments window to record specifics of the analysis or its conditions.
Anything you enter in this window is displayed in the report header.
9. Click Save to save the information you entered.
10. The steps for completing the remaining parameters of the sample information file are
explained in subsequent sections:
• Specifying Sample Tube Criteria

• Defining Degas Conditions
• Defining Analysis Conditions
• Defining Adsorptive Properties
• Defining Report Options
Simply click on the tabs to open the associated dialog.
4-6 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Creating Sample Information Files
Basic and Restricted Formats
Sample information files are created in the Basic and Restricted formats using predefined
parameter files. Chapter 5 provides a description of the fields associated with creating sample
information files.
1. Select File > Open > Sample information; the Open Sample Information File dialog is
displayed.
Not displayed on
the Restricted
dialog.
Use this push button to copy parameters
from an existing file into the current file.
2. Accept the next sequenced file number or enter a new name in the File name field.
3. Click OK, then Yes to create the file; the Sample Information dialog is displayed. The
defaults that appear in the fields are the ones specified in Sample Defaults.
4. Accept the default identification or change it to an appropriate one.
5. Enter the sample’s mass (if different from the default value) in the Mass field.
6. Using the down arrows to the right of each parameter field, select an appropriate file (or
accept the defaults). You can review or edit the contents of these files by switching to the
Advanced format if desired.
If you are using the Restricted format, you cannot switch to the Advanced format.
Mar 08 4-7
Defining Parameter Files ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Defining Parameter Files

The following file types can exist as part of the sample information file or as an individual
parameter file:
• Sample tube
• Report options
Having these files exist independently allows you to use them over and over again.
Several predefined parameter files (located in the params directory) are included with the
ASAP 2020 analysis program. Although these files may come close to the needs of your
laboratory, you may wish to define additional ones. Or you can use a predefined file as a
starting point. This is easily accomplished by creating a new file and then selecting Replace.
A dialog is displayed so that you can select the existing file containing the values you wish to
use. After the values are copied into the current file, you can edit the values as desired; the
original file remains intact and ready for the next use.
If you wish to have parameter files display in the drop-down list on the Basic Sample
Information dialog, be sure to save them to the directory specified as the Parameter Files
Directory. (Refer Parameter Files Directory on page 8-12 for additional information.)
Sample Tube
1. Select File >Open > Sample Tube; the Sample tube dialog is displayed.
2. Enter a name in the File name field, then click OK.
Be sure the directory specified is the Parameter files directory if you wish to have it
display in the drop-down list in the Basic Sample Information dialog. (Refer to
Parameter Files Directory on page 8-12 for additional information.)
3. Click Yes to create the file; the Sample Tube dialog is displayed.
4-8 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Defining Parameter Files
4. Enter a description in the Sample Tube field. Be sure to use an intuitive description so that
you can recognize it easily.
5. Click Load from Sample File; the Open Sample Information File dialog is displayed.
6. Select the file you used in the blank run with this sample tube, then click Open to copy the
warm and cold free space, and the non-ideality factor values into the Sample Tube dialog.
7. If a vacuum seal of some type was used, select the appropriate option or leave the default
of None selected.
Degas Conditions
Degas Conditions files contain degassing information for preparing samples. These files are
appropriate only if your ASAP 2020 analyzer is equipped with the SmartVac degassing
system.
Perform the following steps to define a degas conditions file:
1. Select File > Open > Degas Conditions; the Degas Conditions dialog is displayed.
2. Enter a name in the File name field, then click OK.
3. Click Yes to create the file; the Degas Conditions dialog is displayed
Mar 08 4-9
4. Enter a description in the Description field. Be sure to use an intuitive description so that
you can recognize it easily.
5. Specify values for the evacuation and heating phases for degassing the sample
Analysis Conditions
Analysis conditions specify the data used to guide an analysis. An analysis conditions file may
be assigned a unique name, and you can direct any sample to be analyzed according to the
conditions in any existing analysis conditions file. Chapter 5 provides a detailed description of
the fields on this dialog.
1. Select File > Open > Analysis Conditions; the Open Analysis Conditions File dialog is
displayed.
2. Enter a name (up to eight characters) in the File name field, then click OK.
3. Click Yes to create the file; the Analysis Conditions dialog is displayed.
4. Enter a description (up to 42 characters) in the Description field. Use an intuitive

description, one that will help you identify the type of sample you plan to analyze using
these analysis conditions.
4-10 Mar 08
5. Specify points for your pressure table. Use the push buttons adjacent to the table to assist
you in creating your table.
6. Click Preparation to specify evacuation and leak test values.
7. Click Free Space to specify how the free space is to be measured.
8. Click Po and T to specify how the saturation pressure (Po) is to be measured, and the
analysis bath temperature. If you select Absolute pressure dosing, options 1 through 5
are disabled. The Po will be calculated using the analysis bath temperature; enter the
appropriate temperature in the field provided.
9. Click Dosing to specify dosing options.
10. Click Equilibration to specify the equilibraiton interval and its delay time.
11. Click Backfill to specify backfill options.
12. If you wish to use absolute dosing, click the Absolute pressure dosing option.
Mar 08 4-11
Adsorptive Properties
Adsorptive properties specify the characteristics of the gases used in the ASAP 2020 System.
Chapter 5 provides a detailed description of the fields on this dialog.
1. Select File > Open > Adsorptive properties; the Open Adsorptive Properties File dialog
box is displayed.
Parameter Files Directory on page 8-12 foor additional information.)
3. Click Yes to create the file; the Adsorptive Properties dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the name of the adsorptive gas in the Adsorptive field, then enter its mnemonic.
5. Click Psat vs T to edit the Psat vs Temperature table. Edit any other field(s) on this dialog
as required, then click OK.
6. Select Non-condensing Adsorptive if the gas is non-condensing.
7. Enter the appropriate information (or accept the defaults) in the following fields.
Maximum manifold pressure

Non-ideality factor
Density conversion factor
Therm. tran. hard-sphere diameter
Molecular cross-sectional area
8. Choose your preferred dosing method; choose Normal for gases under pressure.
4-12 Mar 08
Report Options
Report options specify the types of reports to be generated from an analysis or manually
entered data. They also help you customize details of reports such as axis scale, axis range,
column headings, and components of thickness curve equations.
You can tailor report options files to accommodate the requirements of your analyses. For
example, you can generate a simple report that lets you determine the basic characteristics of
the sample. Then use that report to make choices about the variables you want to include in
lengthier, more sophisticated reports. You can specify for reports to be generated automatically
after each analysis, or you can generate reports at any time during or after an analysis.
However, a report generated during an analysis only includes data collected up to the time of
the report. Chapter 5 provides a detailed description of the fields on this dialog.
Define report options as follows:
1. Select File > Open > Report Options; the Open Report Options File dialog is displayed.
display in the drop-down list in the Basic Sample Information dialog. (Refer t
3. Click Yes to create the file; the Report Options dialog is displayed.
4. Enter a description (up to 42 characters) in the Description field. Enter an identifier that
gives a more intuitive description of the file’s contents. For example, BJH Adsorption
Report Options.
Mar 08 4-13
5. Select Show report title and enter the title you wish to appear at the top of the report. Or
deselect this option if you prefer not to have a report title.
If your company logo exists as a bitmap (bmp) or enhanced metafile (emf), you can
have it display in the report header by selecting Show graphic. Click Browse to
select the file; use the Height and Width fields to specify the size.
6. If you wish to compare the same type of graph from multiple files, click Overlays and
choose the files. Then be sure you edit the graph from the Selected Reports window and
choose Samples from the Overlay drop-down list.
7. Select Thermal transpiration correction if you want correction made for thermal
transpiration in the sample tube, then enter the inside diameter of the sample tube.
8. The reports that may be generated are listed in the Selected Reports list. Select reports by
double-clicking on the desired report. Reports are deselected in the same manner. A report
is selected when it is preceded by a check mark.
The Horvath-Kawazoe, Dubinin, and MP-Method report types appear in the Selected
Reports list only if the Micropore option is installed.
9. You can edit some reports by highlighting the desired report and clicking Edit.
10. Click Save, then Close to save the information and close the dialog.
4-14 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Preparing Samples
Preparing Samples
Care should be taken in choosing, conditioning, and filling sample tubes. The following
guidelines help ensure accurate, reproducible results.
Choosing Sample Tubes
A sample tube set consists of the following parts:
• Sample tube
• Stopper or seal frit
• Filler rod
Standard sample tubes for the ASAP 2020 degas and analysis stations have a 1.27-cm (1/2-in.)
outside diameter (OD). Two other sizes are available: 0.64 cm and 0.95 cm (1/4 in. and 3/8 in.)
OD. Stepped ferrules, smaller O-rings, isothermal jackets, and filler rods are available for
adapting the smaller stems to the degas or analysis ports (refer to Ordering Information on
page 10-1 for part numbers). The stem diameter selected for use is a matter of accuracy and
precision requirements, as well as personal preference and convenience in loading the sample.
A rubber stopper may be used with all size sample tubes; however, seal frits are recommended
for 1.27-cm (1/2-in.) OD sample tubes (refer to Ordering Information on page 10-1 for part
numbers).
Filler rods help to ensure accuracy in samples with lower total surface areas by reducing the
free-space volume. It is generally a good practice to use filler rods for samples having less than
100 square meters of total surface area. Filler rods are unnecessary for samples with total
surface areas greater than 100 square meters.
Filler rods can interfere with thermal transpiration correction and, therefore, should
not be used when performing micropore analyses.
The weight of the empty sample tube should be determined after it has been cleaned (refer to
Cleaning and Labeling Sample Tubes, page 4-16), degassed, and filled with backfill gas.
The sample tube should be allowed to cool to room temperature before backfilling. After the
sample tube has cooled, remove it from the degas port and weigh it.
If a seal frit is not used, insert a stopper immediately after removing the sample from
the degas port.
The weight of the isothermal jacket may vary slightly and cannot be considered as constant;
therefore, do not weigh it with the sample tube set.
Mar 08 4-15
Preparing Samples ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Cleaning and Labeling Sample Tubes
Sample tubes and filler rods must be clean and dry before samples are added and weighed. The
following procedures are recommended. Refer to the following table for a list of materials
needed to clean and weigh samples properly.
Table 4-1: Materials Required to Clean and Weigh Sample Tubes
Supplied by Micromeritics Supplied by User

Sample tube Drying oven
Quartz wool Ultrasonic cleaning unit
Sample tube brush Alconox Rubber gloves or lint-free cloth
Stoppers for sample tube Acetone or isopropyl alcohol
Sample tube rack Cryogen for the cold trap Dewar
Sample weighing support Safety glasses
Cloth gloves Forceps
Reference material Insulating gloves
Funnel Waste container
Sample data worksheet Balance
(copied from Appendix A of this manual) Pipe cleaners
1. Turn on the drying oven used for heating the sample tubes and filler rods and set the
temperature to 110 ºC.
2. Check the reservoir of the ultrasonic cleaning unit to make sure it is clean.
3. Using 5 grams of Alconox (or other suitable detergent) per 500 mL of warm water, fill the
reservoir of the ultrasonic unit with enough water to cover the sample tubes and filler rods.
Make sure the detergent is dissolved before placing the sample tubes and filler rods into
the water. If too much detergent is used, it may be difficult to rinse from the sample tubes.
4. Fill the sample tubes with warm water and place them in the reservoir of the ultrasonic
cleaning unit. Place the filler rods in the bowl also. Turn on the ultrasonic cleaning unit for
approximately fifteen minutes.
4-16 Mar 08
5. Using rubber gloves, remove the sample tubes and filler rods from the reservoir.
6. Clean the interior of the sample tubes with the brush supplied with the ASAP 2020
System.
7. Rinse the sample tubes and filler rods thoroughly with hot water. Then rinse them with
isopropyl alcohol or acetone using a waste container to collect used solvent.
If isopropyl alcohol or acetone is not available, deionized water may be used to rinse
the sample tubes.
8. Using nitrogen, dry the interior of the sample tubes and filler rods under a vent hood. Use
a tubing extension long enough and small enough in diameter to fit inside the tubes.
Mar 08 4-17
9. Stand the sample tubes on the sample tube rack and place the filler rods in a basket or in
the rack. Bake for two hours.
10. Remove the sample tubes from the oven and allow them to cool.
11. Using either rubber gloves or a lint-free cloth (but not bare hands), place a filler rod (if
used) in each sample tube by holding the sample tube horizontally and sliding the filler rod
into the sample tube slowly.
12. Wipe a rubber stopper (or seal frit, if used with 1.27-cm (1/2-in.) tubes) with a lint-free
cloth.
If helium is used as the degas backfill gas, seal frits are recommended. Refer to
Ordering Information on page 10-1 or seal frit part numbers.
13. Label the sample tube and stopper or seal frit for identification.
14. Fill the tube with the selected backfill gas; then insert the stopper or seal frit quickly to
avoid releasing the gas.
To obtain the accurate mass of a degassed sample, the gas in both the empty sample
tube and in the tube with the sample must be the same.
4-18 Mar 08
Determining Amount of Sample to Use
Clean, dry sample tubes are essential for accurate results. How much sample to use can be
determined best by experiment. In general, a sample providing 40 to 120 square meters of total
surface area is recommended for nitrogen analysis. Less than this may cause variability of
results; considerably more than this extends unnecessarily the time required for analysis.
Smaller quantities are required for samples having high surface areas. These samples require
careful weighing after degassing because a small error may represent a considerable percent of
total weight. Proper weighing techniques are most important in this case. Use no less than 100
mg to reduce the effect of weighing errors.
Care should be taken when loading powders; the accessory funnel is useful for this purpose.
Large granules or chunks may be loaded with forceps.
Avoid touching the sample with your fingers because oils may be transferred to the
sample and can alter results or create degassing problems.
Determining the Mass of the Sample
Analysis results are expressed in units of surface area per gram of sample; therefore, the true
mass of the sample must be known. Carefully weigh each sample tube set and sample as
described below.
1. Write the Sample Tube number on the Sample Data Worksheet. (A Sample Data
Worksheet, which you may copy, is included in Appendix A.)
2. Place the sample weighing support on the balance. Tare the balance and allow it to
stabilize at zero (0).
3. Place the sample tube set (sample tube, stopper or seal frit, and filler rod, if used) on the
sample support. Record the stabilized weight on the Sample Data Worksheet as Mass of
empty sample tube. Remove the sample support and sample tube set from the balance.
4. Place a sample container onto the balance. Tare the balance and allow it to stabilize at zero
(0).
Do not touch the sample or filler rod with bare hands while performing the next six
steps. Doing so could affect the accuracy of results.
5. Slowly add the sample to the sample container.
6. Remove the rubber stopper or seal frit and filler rod from the sample tube.
Mar 08 4-19
7. Using a funnel, pour sample from the container into the sample tube.
If some sample clings to the inside of the sample tube above the last 3 in. (7.5 cm) of the
tube, use a pipe cleaner or lint-free wipe to remove it.
8. Replace the filler rod and insert the rubber stopper or seal frit.
9. Weigh the sample tube set containing the sample and record the weight on the Sample
Data Worksheet as Mass of sample tube plus sample (Before Degas).
10. Subtract the Mass of empty sample tube from the Mass of sample tube plus sample; record
this value as the Mass of sample.
4-20 Mar 08
Degassing the Sample
Most solid materials absorb moisture and other contaminants when exposed to the atmosphere.
The sample must be clean when an analysis is performed. The sample is heated and placed
under vacuum to remove moisture and other contaminants. This process is referred to as
degassing the sample. Degassing the sample is easy and virtually automatic if your ASAP
2020 analyzer is equipped with the SmartVac degassing system. The procedure is as follows:
1. While holding the degas port plug, remove the connector nut and plug from the degas port
by turning the connector nut counterclockwise.
Connector Nut
2. Place the degas port connector nut, ferrule, and O-ring onto the sample tube set as shown
in the following figure.
3-way Sample Connector;
accepts 1/2-, 3/8-and 1/4-in.
Manifold
Connector
Seal Frit Opener (pre-installed in

connector)*
Sample Tube O-ring
Ferrule Seal Frit (1/2-in. sample
tubes only)
Connector Nut
Sample Tube
Power and
Thermocouple
Heating Mantle
*When using 1/4- or 3/8-in. sample
tubes, the seal frit opener must be
removed from the sample connector.
Mar 08 4-21
3. Remove the rubber stopper from the sample tube and attach the sample tube set to the
degas port. Be sure to push the sample tube in to a full stop. Secure the sample tube in
place by sliding the connector nut, ferrule, and O-ring up to the degas port and turning the
connector nut clockwise. Tighten the nut securely by hand.
4. Place a heating mantle over the bulb of the sample tube and secure the mantle in place
with a mantle clip.
5. Insert the heating mantle thermocouple plug into the appropriate connector on the
analyzer. Then insert the heating mantle power plug into the appropriate connector on the
analyzer. Make sure both plugs are inserted completely.
6. Select Start Degas from the Unit menu; the Start Degas dialog is displayed.
7. Click Browse to the right of the Sample field to choose your degas file.
Repeat this step if you are degassing two samples.
8. Click Start to begin the degassing operation.
Observe the status bar of the degassing operation to determine when degassing is
complete.
9. After degassing has completed, transfer the sample tube to the analysis port to start the
analysis (next section).
4-22 Mar 08
Transferring the Degassed Sample to the Analysis Port
The sample tube must be removed from the degas port, weighed and then installed onto the
analysis port for analysis.
If the sample tube is not mounted to the analysis port immediately, either leave it on
the degas port or remove it and insert the rubber stopper (unless you are using a
seal frit) into the sample tube opening.
1. Allow the sample tube to cool.
Do not touch the sample tube or the heating mantle until they have reached room
temperature. Touching the sample tube, heating mantle, or heating mantle clip
could result in burns.
2. Carefully remove the heating mantle clip and the heating mantle from the sample tube and
allow the sample tube to cool to room temperature (approximately fifteen minutes).
3. While holding the sample tube, loosen the port connector nut and remove the sample tube
from the degas port. If you are not using a seal frit, insert a stopper immediately. Remove
the connector nut, ferrule, and O-ring from sample tube stem.
4. Weigh the sample tube set. Enter the weight on the Sample Data Worksheet as Mass of
sample tube plus sample (After Degas).
5. Subtract the Mass of empty sample tube (Before Degas) from the Mass of sample tube plus
sample (After Degas) to determine the mass of the sample. Record this value as the Mass
of sample (After Degas).
6. Slide an isothermal jacket down over the sample tube stem until it touches the sample tube
bulb.
7. Place the connector nut, ferrule, and O-ring onto the sample tube stem.
8. Remove the stopper and immediately attach the sample tube to the analysis port, pushing
it fully up into the port. Secure it in place by screwing the connector nut onto the analysis
port connector; hand-tighten the connector nut.
You do not have to remove the seal frit (if used).
9. Place the sample tube Dewar cover over the sample tube stem just above the isothermal
jacket as shown in the following illustration.
Mar 08 4-23
Port Fitting
Seal Frit
(optional)
Po Tube
O-ring
Ferrule
Connector Nut
Insulated
DewarCover
Po Tube
Isothermal
Jacket Isothermal
Jacket Assembled View
Sample Tube
4-24 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Installing Dewars
Installing Dewars
Precautions
Always handle Dewars with care. Any product incorporating a vacuum is a potential safety
hazard and should be treated with caution.
We recommend the following be observed when handling Dewars containing liquefied gases:
• Protect yourself by wearing 1) goggles (or a face shield), 2) an insulated or rubber

apron, and 3) insulated gloves.
• When pouring liquefied gases from one container to another: 1) cool the receiving
container gradually to minimize thermal shock, 2) pour the liquefied gas slowly to
prevent splashing, and 3) vent the receiving container to the atmosphere.
• Use a plastic stirring rod when stirring substances in a Dewar containing liquefied gases
(or other materials of extremely low temperature). Do not use a glass or metal stirring
rod unless it is coated with some form of protective coating.
• Do not handle heavy objects above the Dewar. If unavoidable, place a protective cover
over the Dewar’s opening. If an object of sufficient weight is accidentally dropped into
the Dewar, shattering may occur.
• Always install the Dewar cover before performing an analysis. The cover reduces the
accumulation of ice. Accumulated ice could cause the Dewar to bond to the sample
tube.
Cold Trap Dewar
Cryogens can cause frostbite injury. Wear safety glasses and insulating gloves
when handling cryogens.
1. Fill the cold trap Dewar with a cryogen such as liquid nitrogen to about 5 cm (2 in.) from
the top.
Mar 08 4-25
Installing Dewars ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
2. Hang the cold trap Dewar around the cold trap port as shown below.
Cold Trap
Cold Trap
Dewar
3. Place the insulator/stopper over the Dewar opening as shown below.
4-26 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Installing Dewars
Analysis Dewar
1. Fill the analysis Dewar with the analysis bath fluid to about 5 cm (2 inches) from the top.
Incorrect fluid levels can lead to measurement errors. Do not overfill the Dewar.
2. Check the analysis bath fluid level with the dipstick as shown below.
Maximum Level
Indicator Mark
Analysis Dewar
Wetness or frozen
condensation indicates
bath liquid level.
3. Insert the analysis Dewar onto the elevator as shown in the following illustration.
Dewar Insulator
Analysis Dewar
Elevator
4. Place a Dewar insulator over the open Dewar until you are ready to start your analysis; this
helps to minimize ice accumulation.
5. When you are ready to start the analysis, remove the insulator and install a Dewar cover.
Mar 08 4-27
Performing an Analysis ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Performing an Analysis
After the sample has been degassed and transferred to an analysis port, you may begin an
analysis.
You cannot perform an analysis while calibration is in progress.
Before beginning an analysis, make sure the tank pressure for the gas regulator is at
least 200 psig. Pressures less than 200 psig may cause the sample to be
inadequately saturated, resulting in inaccurate data or termination of analysis.
Ensure that the analysis gas and the Psat gas specified in the sample file match the system
configuration gases; if they do not, correct the sample information file or correct the unit
configuration gas.
Perform the following steps to begin an analysis:
1. Select Unit > Start Analysis; the Analysis dialog is displayed with the Start Analysis
dialog positioned on top.
2. Choose a file for your analysis and click OK; the Analysis dialog containing the
parameters of the selected file is displayed.
3. Verify parameters and make any changes you feel necessary.
4. To generate a report automatically after the analysis, click Report after Analysis and
choose report output options. You can generate reports to the screen or directly to a printer.
4-28 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Performing an Analysis
5. Click Export after Analysis to have isotherm data generated automatically after the
analysis if finished.
Before clicking Start, make sure the elevator is all the way down. If it is not all the
way down, hazardous conditions can result.
6. Click Start to begin the analysis; as data are collected, the graph will be drawn in the
window.
7. Click Next to perform another analysis; the first view of the Analysis dialog is displayed.
After the elevator rises, do not place any times under the elevator platform. Objects
under the platform will prevent the elevator from fully lowering, and could cause
damage to the elevator mechanism.
Mar 08 4-29
Printing File Contents ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Printing File Contents

You can print the contents of one or more sample or parameter files.
1. Select File > Print; a drop-down list containing file types is displayed.
2. Choose the file type; a dialog similar to this one is displayed.
3. From the Files list box, select the desired file. If you plan to print multiple files, hold down
Ctrl while clicking on the desired files.
You can use the Status drop-down list and/or the Date Range push button to limit the
files displayed in the Files list.
4. Choose whether you wish to print the contents to the screen (Preview) or to a printer
(Print). If you choose Print, the Copies field is enabled allowing you to print up to four
copies.
5. Click OK; the file is printed to the specified destination.
4-30 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Listing File Statistics
Listing File Statistics

You can generate a list of the following information on a sample file or parameter file.
• File name
• Date the file was created (or last edited)
• Time the file was created (or last edited)
• File identification
• File status
Perform the following steps to list file statistics:
1. Select File > List.
2. From the List drop-down menu, select the type of file on which you wish information. A
dialog similar to the one shown below is displayed:
Displays the type of file

on which you requested
information; in this
example,a sample
information file
3. From the Files list box, choose the desired file(s). If you wish to include all files, leave all
files deselected.
4. Choose whether you wish to print statistics to the screen (Preview) or to a printer (Print).
If you choose Print, the Copies field is enabled allowing you to print up to four copies.
5. Click OK, a list for the requested file(s) is sent to the specified destination.
Mar 08 4-31
Exporting Isotherm Data ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Exporting Isotherm Data

The Export option on the File menu allows you to copy the isotherm data in the sample
information file and reformat it in ASCII text. If saved to a File, the data can be imported into
applications, such as spreadsheets. The output file consists of four columns containing the
elapsed time, absolute pressure, relative pressure,and specific volume adsorbed (refer to
Format of Data Output, page 5-97 for an example of exported data).
Perform the following steps to export a sample information file or ASCII data:
1. Select File > Export; the Export Sample Information dialog is displayed.
2. From the Files list box, choose the file(s) you wish to export. You can select multiple files
by holding down Ctrl while clicking on the desired files.
Use the Status drop-down list and/or the Date Range push button to limit the files
displayed in the Files list.
3. In the Settings group box, choose a Destination for your exported file.
a. If you choose File as the destination, select the file type. Then enter a name in the File
name field or accept the default. If you have selected multiple files, individual files are
exported as their file name. You can also change the destination path if desired.
b. If you choose Printer, the Copies field is enabled; you can print up to four copies.
4. Click OK; the file(s) is exported to the specified destination.
4-32 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Generating Graph Overlays
Generating Graph Overlays

Use graph overlays when you wish to compare graphically results for multiple samples or
multiple graphs for one sample. Graphical lines are differentiated by the use of varying
symbols and reported in a legend on the report. If color output capability is available, different
colors are used instead of symbols.
Graph overlays can be implemented in two ways:
• Multiple Sample Overlays

Overlay results for up to eight samples on top of a previously selected sample.
• Multiple Graph Overlays

Overlay two different types of graphs from one sample. The multiple graph overlay
capability exists for:
BJH Adsorption/Desorption
DFT Pore Size/Surface Energy
Dollimore-Heal Adsorption/Desorption
Horvath-Kawazoe*
MP-Method*
*Available only if the micropore option is installed.
You cannot overlay graphs if your sample file presentation is in the Basic format. You must
switch to the Advanced format before proceeding.
Multiple Samples Overlay
1. Select File > Open > Sample Information to display the Open Sample Information File
dialog box.
2. Select a sample on which to overlay graphs of other samples, then click OK; the Sample
Information dialog is displayed.
3. Click the Report Options tab to display the Report Options dialog.
Mar 08 4-33
Generating Graph Overlays ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
4. Make your report selections (or deselect any you do not wish to generate).
5. Choose the type of report for which you wish to generate overlays, click Edit, and perform
the steps listed for that report:
If you are overlaying this

type of report.... Then ....
Isotherm Select the desired plot(s) from the Select Reports group
box.
Click Options (becomes enabled when the plot is
selected) adjacent to the selected plot
Select the Overlay samples check box, then click OK.
Click OK again to return to the Report Options dialog..
BET Surface Area Select the Overlay Samples check box.
Langmuir Surface Area
Click OK.
Freundlich
Temkin
t-Plot
Alpha-S
f-Ratio
4-34 Mar 08
If you are overlaying this

type of report.... Then ....
BJH Adsorption Choose the report variable from the Selected Reports
BJH Desorption window, then click Edit.
Dollimore-Heal Adsorption
Click on the down arrow at the Overlay field and choose
Dollimore-Heal Desorption
Samples; then click OK.
DFT Pore Size
DFT Surface Energy Click OK again to close the report variable’s dialog and
MP-Method return to the Report Options dialog.
6. Click Overlays; the Graph Overlay Samples dialog is displayed.
7. Click Browse to the right of the Sample 1 field; the Plot Overlay Sample Selection dialog
is displayed.
8. Choose a sample file, then click OK. You may choose up to eight files in this manner.
9. After selecting the desired number of sample files, click OK to return to the Report
Options dialog.
10. Click Save if you wish to save your Selected Reports list. Even if you don’t save, all of the
options regarding overlays and anything else are available as your reports are generated.
11. Select Reports > Start Report; the Start Report screen is displayed with the name of your
primary file highlighted.
12. Click OK; the Select Reports dialog is displayed.
13. Ensure that the desired graph is selected (preceded with a check mark), then click OK.
Mar 08 4-35
Multiple Graphs Overlay
Remember that multiple graph overlays can be done only for:
• BJH Adsorption
• BJH Desorption
• DFT Pore Size
• DFT Surface Energy
• Dollimore-Heal Adsorption
• Dollimore-Heal Desorption
• Horvath-Kawazoe*
• MP-Method
*Available only if the micropore option is installed.
1. Select File > Open > Sample Information to display the Open Sample Information File
dialog.
2. Select a sample for which you want to overlay two graphs; then select Edit; the Sample
Information dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the Report Options tab to display the Report Options dialog.
4. Make your report selections (or deselect any you do not wish to generate).
4-36 Mar 08
5. From the Selected Reports list, select the report for which you want multiple graph
overlays, then select Edit; a Report Options dialog for that report (or graph) is displayed
(this example shows BJH Adsorption).
6. Select a report type, then click Edit; an options dialog for that specific item is displayed
(this example shows Cumulative Pore Volume).
These two graphs

will be overlaid
7. Click the down arrow at the Overlay field and select a graph type from the list. This
selection will be overlaid on the graph selected in the Variable field.
8. Select OK to return to the BJH Adsorption Report Options dialog; do any editing you
wish.
9. Click OK to return to the main Report Options dialog.
10. Click Save to save your Selected Reports list. Even if you don’t save, all of the options
regarding overlays and anything else are available as your reports are run.
11. Select Reports > Start Report; the Start Report screen is displayed with the name of your
primary file highlighted.
Mar 08 4-37
12. Click OK; the Select Reports dialog is displayed.
13. Ensure that the desired graph is selected (preceded with a check mark), then click OK.
4-38 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Description
5. FILE MENU
The File menu contains commands which allow you to manage sample and parameter files.
Description
Listed below are brief descriptions of the File menu commands. Detailed descriptions follow
this section.
Open Opens an existing sample information or parameter file. Page

5-3.
Save Saves the file in the active window. Page 5-90.
Save As Saves the file in the active window as a different name. You
also can use this option to save a subset of the sample file as a
parameter file. Page 5-90.
Save All Saves all open files. Page 5-92.
Close Closes the file in the active window. Page 5-92.
Close All Closes all open files. Page 5-92.
Print Prints the contents of a sample or parameter file. Page 5-93.
Mar 08 5-1
Description ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
List Generates a list of certain information for sample or

parameter files. Page 5-95.
Export Copies the isotherm data in a sample information file and
exports it in ASCII format. Page 5-96.
Convert Allows you to convert a sample file in the MICMOS 2000 or

2000 micropore format to a format compatible with the
ASAP 2020 program. Page 5-98.
Exit Exits the analysis program. Page 5-100.
5-2 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Open
Open
Open allows you to create a new file or edit an existing one. The following file types are
available:
• Sample information
• Sample tube criteria
• Report options
Regardless of which file type you select, a dialog similar to the one shown here is displayed:
File name For sample information files, this field contains the next
sequenced file name (as specified in sample defaults)
generated by the system. If this is a new file, you can use the
name displayed or enter a different one.
For parameter files, the file name displayed includes the wild
card (*) and a default extension as follows:
*.DEG for degas conditions

*.STB for sample tube
*.ANC for analysis conditions
*.ADP for adsorptive properties
*.RPO for report options
Mar 08 5-3
Open ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
File name If you are creating a new file, enter a name in the File name
(continued) field. You can use up to 8 characters.
If you are opening an existing file, select the name from the
Files window, then click OK
Date Range Click this push button to display files created within a
specified range of dates; the Select Dates dialog box is
displayed.
Refer to Selecting Files, page 3-11 for an explanation of the

functions on this dialog.
Status Displays for sample information files only. This drop-down

list allows you to choose the types of sample files to display
in the Files window. All files of the type you choose, within
the range of dates, and in the current directory are displayed.
Refer to Table 3-2. File Status and Description, page 3-12
for a description of the status types.
Directories Displays the current directory. You can navigate to a different

directory by clicking in the Directories list box or by
entering the desired directory in the File name field.
5-4 Mar 08
Sample Information
Sample information files contain information used to control the analysis. Therefore, an
analysis cannot proceed until it has been assigned a sample information file. A sample
information file consists of the following:
• sample identification
• sample tube criteria
• analysis conditions
• adsorptive properties
• report options
• collected (after an analysis has been completed) or entered data
Portions of the sample information file can also exist as standalone parameter files. Having
these files exist independently allows you to use them as many times as you wish. For
example, if you typically use the same analysis conditions for many of your analyses, you can
create an analysis conditions file containing the desired conditions. Then when you create your
sample file, select that file for your analysis conditions; the values will be copied into the
current sample file. After it becomes part of the new sample file, you can edit it as desired. The
file from which the values were copied remains intact and ready for the next use.
Sample information files reside in a folder, more commonly referred to as a directory. The
more files in a directory, the longer it may take to access a file. Therefore, it is a good practice
to limit the number of files in a directory to approximately 200. You may create additional
directories as needed.
Sample information files can be created and presented in the Advanced, Basic, or Restricted
format.
• Advanced
Presents all parts of the sample information file in a tabbed dialog. Each tab opens its
associated dialog, allowing you to edit conditions. You can also switch to the Basic
format if desired.
• Basic
Presents all parts of the sample information file as a single dialog. This format allows
you to quickly create a sample information file using predefined parameter files. You
can also switch to the Advanced format if desired.
• Restricted
Identical to the Basic format except that you cannot switch to the Advanced format for
editing; certain functions are also disabled.
Mar 08 5-5
Advanced Format
The Advanced format displays all parts of the sample file in a tabbed dialog. This format
allows you to customize your sample file, moving easily among the parameters simply by
clicking on the tabs; alternatively, you can use Prev and Next. Refer to Advanced Format,
page 4-5 for step-by-step instructions for creating a sample information file using the
Advanced format.
These fields can

be edited to
display a different
label if desired.
Sample Contains the description of the current sample file.

If this is a new file, this field contains the file description
specified in Sample Defaults (refer to Advanced Format on
page 8-7). The above dialog shows the sample file number
because the dollar ($) symbol was included when sample
defaults were specified.
You can enter a new description or edit the existing one if

desired.
Maximum number of characters: 50
5-6 Mar 08
Operator Displays the operator and submitter names of the current

Submitter sample file.
If this is a new file, these fields contain the names specified in

Sample Defaults.
You can enter a different name or edit the current one if

desired. You can use up to 40 characters.
Either (or both) of these fields can be prevented from

displaying on this dialog by selecting Omit in Sample
Defaults (Chapter 8). The labels also can be edited in Sample
Defaults.
Mass Enter the value recorded for Mass of Sample, After Degas
from the Sample Data Worksheet.
The value in this field is used in report calculations;

therefore, it should be exact. To ensure accuracy, reweigh the
sample after analysis. Enter the post-analysis value if
different from the After Degas value before generating
reports.
You should always use the same gas (typically nitrogen) for degassing and analysis.
If different gases are used, the sample mass after degas and after analysis will not be
equal. For example; if you use helium to backfill after degassing and nitrogen after
analysis, you can get as much as a 0.02-gram difference.
Density If you plan to use a calculated free space, enter the sample’s
density in this field. A value in this field is ignored for
measured or entered free spaces.
Type of Data Displays the type of data for the current sample file.
If this is a new file, choose whether you wish to have data
collected automatically or if you plan to enter data collected
from another source.
Mar 08 5-7
User Parameters These fields are used primarily for SPC (Statistical Process
Control) reporting. However, they can be used for other data
as well. You may wish to enter specific analysis conditions
or sample criteria. These parameters print on the Options
report. Select Options > Sample Defaults to specify the
parameters you wish to report. The parameter(s) you specify
replace the User Parameter label(s).
If desired, you can have these fields omitted from the sample
information file (refer to Sample Defaults, page 8-4).
Comments Allows you to enter pertinent information about the sample

or analysis. The information you enter in this window is
displayed in the report header. You may enter up to 500
characters in this window
Replace All Use this push button to replace all parameters of the current
file with those from an existing one. You can edit the
parameters after they have been copied into the current file;
editing the current file does not affect the file from which
they were copied.
Save Saves all parameters of the current file; the dialog remains
open.
Close Closes the dialog. If the file contains unsaved changes, you
are prompted to save before the dialog closes.
Basic Switches the sample editor to the Basic format.
5-8 Mar 08
Basic Format
The Basic format displays all parts (parameters) of the file on a single dialog. With this format,
you can quickly create a sample information file using predefined parameter files. You can
also switch to the Advanced format if a specific parameter requires editing. Refer to Basic and
Restricted Formats on page 4-7 for step-by-step instructions for creating a sample
information file using the Basic format.
If you are creating a new file, this dialog displays the defaults you specified in
Sample Defaults. Chapter 8 explains how to establish sample defaults.
Sample Contains the description of the current sample file.
If this is a new file, this field contains the next sequenced file
description based on the format specified in Sample Defaults
(see Chapter 8). The above dialog box shows the sample file
number because the dollar ($) symbol was included when
sample defaults were specified.
You can enter a new description or edit the existing one if

desired.
Mass Allows you to enter the sample mass. If you are using the
Sample Data worksheet, this is the value recorded for Mass of
Sample after Degas.
Mar 08 5-9
Sample Tube Each parameter field contains the description of the current
Degas Conditions parameter file.
Analysis Conditions
Adsorptive Properties If this is a new sample file, these fields contain the
Report Options descriptions of the files chosen as the defaults.
Click on the down arrow to the right of each field to choose a

different file. File parameters can be viewed or edited by
switching to the Advanced format.
Replace All Use this push button to replace all parameters of the current
file with those copied from an existing one. A dialog box is
displayed allowing you to choose the desired file.
Save Saves all parameters of the current file; the dialog remains
open.
Close Closes the dialog.
Advanced Switches the sample editor to the Advanced format, allowing

you to view or edit parameters of the current file.
5-10 Mar 08
Restricted Format
The Restricted format is used when analysis parameters must remain constant. For example, in
the pharmaceutical industry where consistency and accuracy are crucial. A password is
required to enter and exit this format. Refer to Restricted, page 8-3 for additional information
on the Restricted format.
When you open an existing sample information file or create a new one using the Restricted
format, all parts of the sample file are displayed in the same manner as the Basic format. Some
menu functions, however, are disabled and you cannot switch to the Advanced format to edit
file parameters.
Mar 08 5-11
Sample Tube
The fields on this dialog are used for storing sample tube information. Before creating a
sample tube file, you should perform a blank analysis (no sample) using the sample tube.
Sample Tube Contains the description of the current file.
If this is a new file, this field contains the name (description)

you specified as the default. You can enter a new description
or add to the existing one if desired.
Replace Use this push button to replace the values of the current file
with those from an existing Sample Tube file. The Open
Sample Tube dialog is displayed, allowing you to choose a
file. After the values are copied into the current file, you can
edit them as desired.
Warm free space Displays the warm free space for the current file.
Cold free space Displays the cold free space for the current file.
Non-ideality factor Displays the non-ideality factor determined during the blank
analysis.
Use isothermal jacket Select this option if an isothermal jacket is to be used in the
analysis.
Use filler rod Select this option if a filler rod is to be used in the sample
tube.
5-12 Mar 08
Vacuum seal type If the sample is to be transferred under vacuum to the analy-
sis port, select the seal type to be used. If not, leave None
selected.
Load From Sample File Click this push button to choose the sample file that was used
in the blank analysis. The values for the Warm and Cold free
spaces, and the non-ideality factor will be copied into the
sample tube file.
Save Saves all parameters of the current dialog.
Close Closes the dialog box. If the file contains unsaved changes,
you are prompted to save before the dialog box closes.
Mar 08 5-13
Degas Conditions
The fields on this dialog are used for specifying degas conditions when your ASAP 2020 is
equipped with the SmartVac degas option. If you do not have the SmartVac, the values you
enter are meaningless.
Description Contains the description of the current Degas Conditions file.
If this is a new file, this field contains the name (description)

you specified as the default. You can enter a new description
or add to the existing one if desired.
Replace Use this push button to replace the parameters of the current
file with those from an existing Degas Conditions file. The
Open Degas Conditions File dialog is displayed, allowing
you to choose a file. After the values are copied into the
current file, you can edit them as desired.
Evacuation Phase The options in this group box allow you to specify conditions
group box for the evacuation phase of the degassing operation.
Temperature Allows you to specify the rate at which the temperature is to

ramp rate change while advancing to the target temperature during
evacuation.
5-14 Mar 08
Target temperature Allows you to specify a temperature at which the sample will
be held for the remainder of the evacuation.
Evacuation rate Enables you to specify an evacuation rate for initial

evacuation.
Unrestricted evac. Enables you to specify a pressure at which unrestricted

from sample evacuation will begin.
Vacuum setpoint Enables you to specify the vacuum level to be achieved

before evacuation begins.
Evacuation time Enables yo to specify how long the sample is to be evacuated

prior to the second stage of heating.
Heating Phase The options in this group box allow you to specify conditions
group box for the heating phase of the degassing operation.
Ramp rate Enables you to specify the rate at which the temperature will
change after evacuation while advancing to the hold
temperature.
Hold temp Enables you to specify a temperature at which the sample is

to be held during degassing.
Hold time Enables you to specify how long the sample is to be held at
the specified temperature before beginning to cool down.
Hold Pressure If during the temperature ramp the pressure exceeds the value
you enter in this field, the ramp will be suspended until the
pressure returns to a safe level.
Backfill Sample Tube Select this option to have the sample tube backfilled. You
should deselect this option if you are using the TranSeal; this
allows the sample to remain under vacuum while transferring
to the analysis port.
Save Saves all parameters of the current dialog.
Close Closes the dialog box. If the file contains unsaved changes,
you are prompted to save before the dialog box closes.
Mar 08 5-15
Analysis Conditions
The Analysis Conditions dialog allows you to specify the data used to guide the analysis. You
can create an Analysis Conditions file as an independent parameter file or include it as part of
the sample information file.
Refer to Analysis Conditions, page 4-10 for step-by-step instructions on creating an analysis
conditions file.
The ROA group box

and column display
only if the ROA option
is installed
Description Contains the description of the current Analysis Conditions

file.
If this is a new file, this field contains the name you specified
as the default. You can enter a new description or add to the
existing one if desired.
Replace Use this push button to replace the parameters in the current
file with those from an existing Analysis Conditions file.
After you choose the file and the values are copied into the
current file, you can edit them in any way desired. Editing in
the current file will not change anything in the file from
which they were copied.
5-16 Mar 08
Collect ROA Data Allows you to collect Rate of Adsorption (ROA) data. When
this option is selected, its related fields become enabled. An
ROA column is also added to the Pressure table, allowing
you to select pressures at which to collect ROA data. See the
ROA operator’s manual for additional information.
This group box is displayed only if the ROA option is

installed.
Interval Enter a value which represents the length of time from one
reading to the next.
Dose amount Enter the amount of gas to be applied.
Max. readings Enter a value which represents the maximum number of

readings to record.
Pressures selected Displays the number of pressure points selected for ROA
data.
Pressure Table A pressure table is a list of pressure points (with calculation

assignments) at which data are to be collected. The pressures
may span the entire range from the lowest relative value of
0.00000001 to the maximum value of 0.995 P/Po. (The
maximum recommended value for krypton is 0.5 P/Po.) In
addition, one saturation point may be entered with relative
pressure of 1.0.
Several analysis conditions files containing complete

pressure tables are included with the ASAP 2020 software
and can be found in the PARAMS subdirectory.
Mar 08 5-17
Pressure Table The pressure table for automatically collected data includes
(continued) the pressure points for data collection and identifies
calculations through which the data are processed.
Edit existing values by highlighting the field and entering the

desired values. Use Insert to add rows for additional values.
To append to the beginning or to the end of the table, use Ctrl
+ Up Arrow and Ctrl + Down Arrow.
The pressure table must contain one sequence of strictly

ascending relative pressures, optionally followed by one
sequence of strictly descending relative pressures. You can
enter a maximum of one thousand pressure points.
To specify the calculations performed at a given relative

pressure, click in the field of the desired calculation type; an
X in the field indicates the calculation is selected.
Click OK to accept all entries in the pressure table and return

to the Analysis Conditions dialog.
Insert Range Displays the Insert Pressure Range dialog box.
This dialog allows you to specify the starting pressure, the

ending pressure, the number of points to insert within the
specified range, and whether you wish to have linear or
geometric progression.
Linear Inserts evenly spaced points into your table.
5-18 Mar 08
Geometric from low Inserts geometrically spaced points from the low pressure
pressure range. For example, to insert 5 points with a 0.01 starting
pressure and a 0.16 ending pressure, the following points are
inserted into the table:
0.01
0.02
0.04
0.08
0.16
Geometric towards Inserts geometrically spaced points from the saturation

saturation pressure. For example, to insert 5 points with a 0.99 starting
pressure and a 0.84 ending pressure, the following points are
inserted into the table:
0.99
0.98
0.96
0.92
0.84
Insert predefined Displays the Insert Predefined Pressures dialog.
Choose predefined pressure points for surface area, t-Plot

micropore, and/or BJH adsorption/desorption.
Click on the down arrow for each field to choose the desired
set of points. You can also specify Adsorption/ Desorption
total pore volume and Saturation.
Insert Inserts a row into the table above the selected line.
Mar 08 5-19
Delete Deletes the selected row.
Clear Removes all but one required entry from the table. The rows
do not have to be selected. A warning message appears
requesting confirmation before the table is cleared.
Absolute pressure Select this option to specify pressure targets in mmHg, mbar,
dosing or kPa instead of relative pressure. This option is typically
selected when using adsorptives at analysis conditions above
the critical point of the gas; for example, H2 adsorption on
carbon at liquid nitrogen temperature.
Use calculation Select this option to assign the points to be collected for each
assignments type of report.
If this option is not selected, each report (with the exception

of Langmuir and BET) uses a range of pressures as selected
in the report options. The Langmuir and BET reports
interpolate to entered relative pressures on the report options.
The outlier points can be selected so that they will not be

reported.
Preparation Displays the Analysis Preparation dialog box.
Fast evacuation Select this option for samples (such as pellets) that do not
fluidize or shed particles during evacuation.
Unrestricted evac. Enabled when Fast evacuation is not desired. This field
from allows you to enter the pressure at which unrestricted sample
evacuation is to begin.
5-20 Mar 08
Vacuum setpoint Allows you to specify the vacuum level to be achieved before
evacuation begins.
Evacuation time Enables you to enter the length of time for preliminary
evacuation, which takes place prior to the free-space
measurement.
Leak test Enables the system to check for leaks or sample outgassing
before the analysis. The leak test allows sample pressure to
rise during the test. If the pressure rises more than 0.15
mmHg, the analysis does not proceed and you are notified.
While leak testing slightly increases analysis time, it prevents
the continuation of analysis and collection of erroneous data
if a leak exists.
Leak test duration Enables you to specify how long the pressure is to be
monitored.
Use TranSeal Select this option if you are using the TranSeal to transfer the
sample from the preparation port to the analysis port under
vacuum.
Free Space Allows you to specify free-space measurement conditions;

the Free Space dialog is displayed.
Mar 08 5-21
Measure Select this option to have free space measured automatically

by the system.
Typically, it is best to measure the free space when analyzing

macro- and mesoporous samples, and for routine surface area
measurements.
Select Lower dewar for evacuation to lower the dewar

following free-space measurements.
Evacuation time enables you to specify how long evacuation

is to take place following the measured free space.
Select Outgas test to check for system leaks or sample

outgassing. After free space is measured, the Dewar is
lowered and the sample evacuated for 30 minutes. The leak
test is performed after evacuation. If a leak is found, the leak
test repeats nine times, with 30 minutes evacuation between
tests. If the 10th leak check fails, the analysis stops and you
are notified. While leak testing slightly increases analysis
time, it prevents the continuation of analysis and collection of
erroneous data if a leak occurs.
Outgas test duration indicates the number of seconds the

leak test is performed.
Enter Select this option to enter values for the warm and free
spaces. You may need to use this option if the sample retains
helium and measurement of very low micron range pressures
are required.
If you change the entered free-space value after the preliminary analysis stage is 50%
complete, the change does not affect the analysis.
Warm free space is the sample tube gas capacity measured at

room temperature.
Cold free space is the sample tube gas capacity measured

with the Dewar raised.
5-22 Mar 08
Calculate Select this option to have the free-space calculated using the
mass, density, and sample tube parameters entered in the
Sample Information and Sample Tube files. Calculated free
space measurement takes less time than measured free space,
so if you know the mass and density of the sample and the
sample tube parameters, you may wish to use this choice of
free space methods. If you do not know the parameters, you
may wish to use measured free space.
Po and T Displays the Po and Temperature Options dialog box,

allowing you to choose saturation pressure and analysis bath
temperature.
Displays as Analysis
Bath Temperature only
when Absolute dosing
is selected (Analysis
conditions dialog)
This dialog provides six options for obtaining the saturation

pressure (Po) and analysis bath temperature. Clicking on each
option prompts you for the entry of related parameters in the
lower portion of the dialog box.
Option Prompts for...

1 a measurement interval (how often during
analysis the Po is to be measured)
2 a measurement interval and the analysis
bath temperature
3 a Po; the analysis bath temperature is
calculated at the time of analysis
Mar 08 5-23
Option Prompts for...

4 a Po and analysis bath temperature
an analysis bath temperature only (when

Absolute pressure dosing is selected on
the Analysis conditions dialog)
5 a psat gas other than the adsorptive; the
temperature and pressure ranges for the
chosen gas are displayed. Click Psat vs.T to
edit the values if desired. Editing the values
in the current table do not affect the ones of
the original table
6 an analysis bath temperature
Dosing Displays the Dosing Options dialog.
5-24 Mar 08
First Pressure Fixed The most frequent use of this option is when you are
Dose performing a standard nitrogen analysis of mesoporous
materials such as catalysts. If the first pressure table point is
low and you expect the gas uptake of the sample to be high,
this option can shorten the time required to reach the first
point on the pressure table.
The sample is dosed repeatedly at low pressures with a

specified amount of gas until the first pressure point is
reached. This initial dosing quickly meets the adsorptive
demand of the sample.
The first point on the pressure table is the threshold value,

triggering the transition from the Fixed Dose Mode to
Pressure Table Mode. When the first pressure table value is
reached, Fixed Dose Mode is disabled, and points are
equilibrated and recorded in accordance with the specified
pressure table.
In the field adjacent to this option, enter the amount of gas

that is to be added to the sample for each dose cycle.
This option is disabled if Low pressure incremental dose

mode is selected.
Maximum volume Select this option to determine when additional data points
increment are collected between target pressures in regions of
adsorption. When the maximum increment has been adsorbed
since the last collected data point, another point is
equilibrated and collected.
During desorption, this field is treated as a maximum volume

“decrement” value.
Mar 08 5-25
Absolute and Relative The values entered in these fields are used to determine how
pressure tolerance close the actual pressure must be to each target pressure from
the pressure table. At lower pressures the relative tolerance
value is smaller, and at higher pressures the absolute
tolerance value is smaller. The lesser (or more stringent) of
these two criteria are used to determine the tolerance.
For example, with relative tolerance = 5% and absolute

tolerance = 5 mmHg, the relative tolerance at 40 mmHg
target pressure is 5% of 40 mmHg, or 2 mmHg; 2 mmHg is
smaller than the absolute tolerance of 5 mmHg, so 2 mmHg is
used. At 200 mmHg target pressure, the relative tolerance is
5% of 200 mmHg, or 10 mmHg; in this case, the absolute
tolerance of 5 mmHg is smaller and is used.
In the above example, a minimum pressure of 40 - 2 = 38

mmHg must be attained to collect data for a target pressure of
40 mmHg. For a target of 200 mmHg, 200 - 5 = 195 mmHg
must be attained.
Normally, surface area measurement points are widely

spaced, and the resulting measurement is not very sensitive to
the precise location of points so wider tolerances may be
used. Unnecessarily tight tolerances lengthen the analysis.
Low pressure Enabled only if the MicroPore option is installed. Choose this
incremental option when you are performing an analysis of microporous
dose mode materials. At low pressures on Type 1 isotherms, the pressure
points are very closely spaced, making a useful pressure table
difficult to define. Choosing this mode enables you to
measure equilibrium points at approximately equal intervals
on the quantity adsorbed axis. Each dose is fully equilibrated
and recorded as a data point.
5-26 Mar 08
Low pressure In this mode, the sample is successively dosed with a speci-
incremental fied amount of gas until the first pressure point is reached.
dose mode The first point is the threshold value, triggering the transition
(continued) from Incremental Dose Mode to Pressure Table Mode. When
the first pressure table value is reached, Incremental Dose
Mode is disabled, and points are recorded in accordance with
the specified pressure table. Because the data points recorded
during Incremental Dose Mode may define most of the analy-
sis, one point on the pressure table can be sufficient and serve
as the end point for the analysis.
This field is disabled if First Pressure Fixed Dose Mode is

selected.
Dose amount Enter the amount of gas to be added to the sample for each
data point until the first point on the pressure table is reached.
Enabled when Low pressure incremental dose mode is

selected.
Equilibration delay Enabled when Low pressure incremental dose mode is

selected.
Minimum: Prevents premature equilibration caused by

reduced percentage sensitivity to pressure changes at the
lowest pressures.
Maximum: Prevents the effects of long term temperature or

pressure drift, which may cause the instrument to wait an
excessive length of time for equilibration.
Equilibration Displays the Equilibration dialog.
Does not
display when
Absolute
dosing is
selected.
Mar 08 5-27
Equilibration The number of seconds between successive pressure readings

interval during equilibration. Long equilibration intervals tend to
lengthen analyses, however, they do improve data integrity.
Short equilibration intervals produce a faster analysis but
may reduce the accuracy of data.
Minimum The value entered in this field determines the minimum

equilibration delay number of seconds required before equilibration can occur
at P/Po> = 0.995 for a relative pressure greater than or equal to 0.995.
This field does not display if you select Absolute pressure

dosing on the analysis conditions dialog.
Backfill Displays the Sample Backfill Options dialog, allowing you to

select options for backfilling the sample tube at the start and
end of an analysis.
The options on this dialog are not available if the file status
displayed in the Open Sample Information File dialog is
Entered, Complete, or Analyzing.
Backfill sample at Backfills the sample tube at the beginning of the analysis
start of analysis with the specified backfill gas.
For micropore analyses, it may be best not to select this

option. Generally, it is best to manually evacuate the sample
and start the analysis under vacuum. This minimizes any
stray gas contamination.
Backfill sample at Backfills the sample tube at the end of the analysis with the
end of analysis specified backfill gas. If the sample mass is determined after
the analysis, it is best to use nitrogen as the backfill gas.
It is recommended that you backfill the sample tube at the start and at the end of
the analysis unless you are using the TranSeal to transfer the sample tube under
vacuum. If you deselect either backfill option, proceed with caution as damage to
the analyzer or sample tube may occur.
5-28 Mar 08
Backfill Gas Lists the available backfill gases. The gases in this list are
the ones for which Adsorptive Properties files have been
created; helium is also included.
This dialog allows you to specify the characteristics of the gases used in the ASAP 2020
system. An Adsorptive Properties file can be created as an independent parameter file or
included as part of the sample information file.
Refer to Adsorptive Properties, page 4-12 for step-by-step instructions on creating

adsorptive properties files.
Adsorptive If this is a new file, this field contains either the name of the
default adsorptive gas or is blank. Enter the name of the
desired adsorptive gas.
Maximum number of characters: 40 alphanumeric
Replace Click this push button to choose an Adsorptive Properties file

containing parameters you wish to copy and use in the
current file. After the values have been copied into the file,
you can edit them as desired. It does not affect the values of
the file from which they were copied.
Mnemonic The mnemonic for the adsorptive gas.
Maximum number of characters: 3 alphanumeric
Mar 08 5-29
Non-condensity Select this option if this file is for a non-condensing gas

Adsorptive (adsorptive). When you select this option, the Density
conversion factor field and the Psat vs. T push button
become disabled.
Maximum manifold The maximum gas pressure allowed in the manifold.

pressure
Non-ideality factor The factor compensating for the forces of attraction between
molecules in a real gas.
Density conversion This value is used to convert the gas volume at STP to liquid
factor volume for the adsorptive. It is the ratio of gas density at STP
to liquid density.
Therm. tran. hard-sphere The thermal transpiration hard-sphere diameter.

diameter
Molecular cross-sectional The molecular cross-sectional area.

area
Dosing Method Select the manner in which the sample tube is dosed. Select
Normal for gases under pressure.
Select From Psat tube for krypton analyses.
Select Vapor source for vapors. Vapor source is disabled if

the maximum manifold pressure is greater than 800.00
mmHg.
5-30 Mar 08
Psat vs. T Click to view or edit the Psat vs. Temperature table for the
adsorptive gas; this example shows Nitrogen.
This table contains saturation pressures and their correspond-

ing temperatures. As many as 10 entries may be included; at
least two entries are required.
You can edit the table by clicking on the desired saturation

pressure or temperature and entering a different value.
Use Insert to insert a new row above the selected line; the
cursor moves to the new line. Use Delete to delete the
selected row.
Mar 08 5-31
Report Options
This dialog allows you to specify report options. A report options file can be created as an
independent parameter file or included as part of the sample information file.
Refer to Report Options on page 4-13 for instructions on creating report options files.
Description Displays a description of the current Report Options file.
If this is a new file, this field contains the description you

specified as the default. You can enter a new description or
add to the existing one if desired.
Replace Click this push button to choose an existing Report Options

file containing parameters you wish to copy and use in the
current file. After the values have been copied into the file,
you can edit them as desired. It does not affect the values of
the file from which they were copied.
Show report title This option allows you to enter a title for your report.
If this is a new file, the title you specified as the default is

displayed. Accept the default title or enter a different one.
Deselect this option to omit the report title.
Range: 40 characters
5-32 Mar 08
Show graphic Select this option to have a graphic display above the report
title.
The graphic can be in a bitmap (bmp) or an enhanced

metafile (emf) format. For example, you may wish to display
your company logo.
Click Browse to choose the graphic, then use the height and
width fields to specify the size. The image can also be edited
from the report window.
Overlays Displays the Graph Overlay Samples dialog so that you can
choose the sample files containing the data you wish to
overlay onto a selected plot.
Click Browse to the right of the sample number field to

choose the desired file. Use Clear to clear a field of its entry.
You can select up to eight files.
After choosing the desired files, select the Overlay samples

option for each report type you plan to overlay.
Edit Allows you to edit parameters of the selected report. This

push button is disabled for the Options report.
Mar 08 5-33
Thermal transpiration Select this option to correct for the temperature-induced

correction pressure difference between the manifold and the chilled
sample tube. This option is most significant for pressures less
than approximately 1.0 mmHg. Never use filler rods in the
sample tube when applying correction for thermal
transpiration.
You should always use thermal transpiration when

performing micropore analyses.
Inside diameter of Enabled when you select Thermal transpiration

sample tube correction, so that you may enter the inside diameter of the
sample tube.
Selected Reports Contains a list of available reports. Choose reports by double-

clicking on the desired report(s). Alternatively, you can
highlight the desired report and press the Spacebar. A report
is selected when it is preceded with a check mark. You may
deselect reports in the same manner.
The following reports are available:
• Summary
• Isotherm
• BET Surface Area
• Langmuir Surface Area
• Freundlich
• Temkin
• t-Plot
• Alpha-S Method
• f-Ratio Method
• BJH Adsorption
• BJH Desorption
• Dollimore-Heal Adsorption
• Dollimore-Heal Desorptioin
• Horvath-Kawazoe (if micropore option is installed)
• DFT Pore Size
• DFT Surface Energy
• Dubinin
• MP-Method
• Options
• Sample Log
• Validation
You can find printed examples of some reports in Chapter 7,

beginning on page 7-28.
5-34 Mar 08
Summary Report
The Summary report provides a condensed listing of analysis statistics and data results. The
Summary Report Options dialog allows you to choose the type of information to include in the
report.
The choices on this dialog allow you to choose the types of data to include in the Summary
report.
If you choose Adsorption or Desorption total for Pore Volume data, the P/Po field is enabled
so that you can enter the relative pressure at which to calculate the total pore volume. If Use
calculation assignments (Collected Data screen) is not selected, the isotherm is interpolated
to this value and that point used for the Total pore volume calculation. Otherwise, the point
selected with calculation assignment is used.
This dialog also enables you to specify Pass/Fail criteria for up to four parameters.
Select All Selects all choices on the dialog.
Deselect All Deselects all choices on the dialog.
Pass/Fail Selection Displays the parameter you selected on the Pass/Fail Options
dialog.
Mar 08 5-35
Pass/Fail Displays the Pass/Fail Optioins dialog so that you can choose
a parameter on which to specify pass/fail criteria.
Upper/Lower Select these options to specify upper and lower limits for the
selected parameter; a valid range for the selected field is
displayed in the information bar.
You can leave the range open by deselecting one of the limits.
For example; if you wish to leave the upper limit open,
deselect the Upper check box and specify a value only for
the Lower limit.
Each of these fields has a message line in which you can

enter advice to the operator if a failure occurs. You may enter
up to 120 characters in each field.
5-36 Mar 08
Isotherm Report Options
The isotherm report indicates adsorption (up to saturation pressure) and desorption (down
from saturation pressure) of a gas by a solid held at constant temperature.
Select Reports Lists the types of reports offered.
Choices: Tabular Report, Linear plot, Logarithmic plot,

Linear Absolute plot, Logarithmic Absolute plot
Pressure Composition plot
When you select Pressure Composition plot, the Adsorbate

Molecular Weight field is enabled so that you can enter a
value for the adsorbate. This plot is useful for plotting
pressure as a function of Weight % adsorbed; for example, H2
adsorbed on carbon.
Options Displays the related Plot Options dialog; this example shows
the dialog for the Linear plot.
All plot dialogs contain the same options.
Mar 08 5-37
Options You can plot the graphs as a curve, points, or both.

(continued)
Select Overlay samples to overlay data from the current plot
with data from other samples. The other sample files are
selected by clicking Overlays on the Report Options dialog.
Autoscale options enable you to have the X- and/or Y-axes

automatically scaled.
Linear X-axes begin at zero, and logarithmic X-axes begin at

an appropriate value. Y-axes begin at zero. The system uses
the highest values collected during analysis as the ending
points for axes ranges.
If you choose not to autoscale data, the From and To fields

are enabled, allowing you to specify a range. Data collected
outside these ranges are not included in the plot..
The value entered in the To field must be greater than the

value entered in the From field.
The X-axis fields show the relative pressure.The Y-axis fields
show the quantity of gas adsorbed
Tabular Options Enables you to have Run Time and/or Time Between Points
reported. Run time reports the time elapsed from the
beginning of the analysis to the finish. Time between points
reports the time relapsed between each point.
Also enables you to report Weight % when plotting pressure

composition.
Plot Options Enables you to choose the type of isotherm you wish to plot.
You can plot the adsorption and/or the desorption isotherm.
Volume Adsorbed Enables you to choose the manner in which the volume
adsorbed is reported. These data are reported by default as
Per Gram (cm3/g). However, you can choose to report data
Per BET Surface Area (cm3/m2) or Per Other Surface
Area (m2/g). If the latter field is selected, a field is enabled
allowing you to enter a value.
Weight The Adsorbate Molecular Weight field is enabled when you

choose Pressure Composition plot, allowing you to enter the
molecular weight of the adsorbate.
5-38 Mar 08
BET/Langmuir Surface Area Report Options
• The BET calculation obtains the sample surface area value by determining the monolayer
volume of adsorbed gas from the isotherm data.
• The Langmuir calculation determines the surface area of a sample by relating the surface
area to the volume of gas adsorbed as a monolayer.
Displays as Langmuir
Surface Area Report Options
if the Langmuir report is being
edited.
The Langmuir and BET Surface Area dialogs include the same fields; the operating
instructions for both are the same.
Tabular report Select this option to have a tabular report of the plotted data.
BET transform plot Generates a traditional BET (Langmuir) surface area plot that
is used to determine monolayer volume and BET C constant.
BET Isotherm plot Uses the BET (Langmuir) monolayer volume and constant to
produce an isotherm.
Overlay samples Allows you to overlay data of the selected type from the
current plot with data from other samples. The other samples
are selected by clicking Overlays on the main Report Options
screen.
Mar 08 5-39
Autoscale x-axis Select these options to have the X- and/or Y-axes scaled
Autoscale y-axis automatically.
Both X- and Y-axes begin at zero; the system uses the highest
values collected during analysis as the ending points. If you
choose not to autoscale data, the From and To fields are
enabled, allowing you to enter the ranges.
From/To fields Enabled when you choose not to autoscale data (deselect the
Autoscale option), allowing you to specify the beginning and
ending ranges of the X- and/or Y-axis. Data collected outside
these ranges are not included in the plot. The values entered
in the To field must be greater than the value entered in the
From field.
The X-Axis Range fields show the relative pressure.
The Y-Axis Range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed.
Pressures Displays the Report Pressure Table dialog so that you may
edit or enter relative pressure points.
If Use calculation assignments is not selected on the

Collected/Entered dialog, the isotherm is interpolated to these
pressure points, and those interpolated values are used in the
BET calculations.
If Use calculation assignments is selected, the collected data

are used.
5-40 Mar 08
Insert predefined Displays the Surface Area Report Pressure Selection dialog,
allowing you to select predefined points.
Choices: 1 Point, 3 Point, 5 Point, 5 Point Low Pressure
Insert Inserts a row into the table above the selected line.
Clear Removes all but one entry from the table; one entry is
required. The rows do not have to be selected.
A warning message requesting confirmation is displayed

before the table is cleared.
Mar 08 5-41
Freundlich Isotherm
The Freundlich isotherm is an empirical isotherm that is used to model low-pressure

adsorption data. It can also be applied to model some micropore isotherms.
Specify monolayer In this field, enter the monolayer capacity of the sample.
capacity
Absolute pressure range Allows you to enter a pressure range when calculation
assignments are not requested.
Tabular report Select this option to have a tabular report of the pressure
points generated.
Transform plot Plots the log(p) vs log(Q) in a straight line.
Isotherm plot Plots the absolute pressure vs quantity adsorbed. Shows best
fit line.
Overlay samples Choose this option to overlay Freundlich isotherm data from
the current file with the same type of data from other samples
(files). The desired files are chosen by clicking Overlays on
the Report Options dialog.
5-42 Mar 08
Autoscale x-axis Select these options to have the X- and/or Y-axis scaled
values collected during analysis as the ending points.
are enabled, allowing you to enter the ranges.
The X-axis shows the log of absolute pressure and the Y-axis
shows the quantity of gas adsorbed.
these ranges are not included in the plot.
Mar 08 5-43
Temkin Isotherm
The Temkin isotherm is used to model adsorption data where the heat of adsorption drops
linearly with increasing coverage.
Specify monolayer In this field, enter the monolayer capacity of the sample.
capacity
Specify differential Enter the differential heat of adsorption at zero surface

heat of adsorption at coverage. This allows inclusion of all of Temkin constants.
zero surface coverage
Absolute pressure Allows you to enter a pressure range when calculation

range assignments are not requested.
Tabular report Select this option to have a tabular report of the pressure
points generated
Transform plot Plots a linear form of the Temkin isotherm.
5-44 Mar 08
Temkin Isotherm plot Overlays the Temkin isotherm with the analysis data.
Overlay samples Choose this option to overlay Temkin isotherm data from the
current file with the same type of data from other samples
(files). The desired files are chosen by selecting Overlays on
the Report Options dialog.
Autoscale x-axis Select these options to have the X- and/or Y-axis scaled
The X-axis shows the natural log of absolute pressure and the
Y-axis shows the quantity of gas adsorbed.

Mar 08 5-45
t-Plot Report Options
The t-Plot calculation allows quantitative analysis of the area and total volume ascribed to
micropores. Matrix area, the area external to micropores, is directly determined and often
proves to be a valuable way of characterizing complex mixed materials.
Thickness Curve Presents the type of thickness curves available.
• Reference
• Kruk-Jaroniec-Sayari
• Halsey
• Harkins and Jura
• Broekhoff-de Boer
• Carbon Black STSA
You can also apply the Frenkel-Halsey-Hill thickness curve

using the Halsey option, and entering the appropriate values
in the equation. Use Edit to edit the values in the equation.
Edit Displays the equation for the type of thickness curve selected
so that you may view or edit the values.
5-46 Mar 08
Reference Displays the Entered t-Curve dialog allowing you to define a

t-curve by entering the relative pressure and thickness values.
This table can also be created in another application if desired

and imported into this dialog using Open. When creating the
table in another application, the file must be saved as ASCII
text with a. THK extension. Use a two-column format with
the relative pressures in the first column and the thickness
values in the second column. Columns must be separated by a
space (or a tab).
Insert
Inserts a row above the selected row. A row cannot be
inserted if the value in the selected row is at its lowest value;
values must be strictly increasing. For example, in the table
shown above the default value is 0.000000001. Therefore,
you must use Ctrl + Down Arrow to insert rows.
Delete
Deletes the selected row.
Clear
Clears the table of all but one entry; one entry is required.
Open
Enables you to import the values from an existing t-curve.
Save As
Enables you to save the current table of values under a
different name.
Mar 08 5-47
Kruk-Jaroniec-Sayari Displays the Kruk-Jaroniec-Sayari Thickness Equation

dialog.
You can edit the values for the numerator, the first element of
the denominator, and the exponent.The range for a selected
field is shown in the information bar at the bottom of the
dialog.
Refer to Appendix C, Calculations, for more information.
Halsey Displays the Halsey Thickness Equation dialog.
You can edit the values for the multiplier, numerator, and
exponent.The range for a selected field is shown in the
information bar at the bottom of the dialog.
Refer to Appendix C for more information.
Harkins and Jura Displays the Harkins and Jura Thickness Equation dialog.
You can edit the values for the numerator, first element of the
denominator, and exponent. The range for a selected field is
shown in the information bar at the bottom of the dialog.
5-48 Mar 08
Broekhoff-de Boer Displays the Broekhoff-de Boer Thickness Equation dialog.
exponent. The range for a selected field is shown in the
Carbon Black STSA Displays the STSA Thickness Equation dialog.
All coefficients can be edited. The range for a selected field is

shown in the information bar at the bottom of the dialog.
Surface Area group box Allows you to choose the surface area value used for
thickness calculations. You can use BET (most commonly
used), Langmuir, or enter one of preference.
Mar 08 5-49
Pressure Range Displays the Report Relative Pressure Range dialog so that
you may specify minimum and maximum relative pressures
to use with this report.
• If Use calculation assignments is not selected on the

Collected/Entered dialog, all of the nonoutlier points of
the collected data within the specified range are used for
calculating the data for this report.
• If Use calculation assignments is selected, collected

data points which are assigned to this report type are
used.
Surface area correction This value corrects for surface areas that are not smooth and
factor brings the values for BET surface area and micropore surface
area into accordance. For most samples, the default value of
1.000 is adequate
Fitted Thickness Range Provides two fields, allowing you to enter the minimum and
maximum thicknesses you wish to include in the thickness
curve.
Tabular report Select this option to generate a table of collected data.
t-Plot Select this option to generate a graphical representation of the

collected data.
Overlay samples Allows you to overlay data from the current sample file with
data from other sample file(s). The other sample file(s) are
chosen by clicking Overlays on the main Report Options
screen.
5-50 Mar 08

ending ranges of the X- and/or Y-axis.
Data collected outside these ranges are not included in the

plot.
The Y-Axis Range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed
Mar 08 5-51
Alpha-S Plot
The Alpha-S plot converts the standard adsorption isotherm into a dimensionless isotherm
using the quantity adsorbed at a relative pressure of 0.4.
Table Provides two columns for entering the relative pressure (first
column) and the alpha-s values (second column).
This table can also be created in another application if desired

and imported into this dialog using Open. When creating the
table in another application, the file must be saved as ASCII
text with an ALS extension. Use a two-column format with
the relative pressures in the first column and the alpha-s
values in the second column. Columns must be separated by a
space (or a tab).
Insert Inserts a row above the selected row. A row cannot be

inserted if the value in the selected row is at its lowest value;
values must be strictly increasing. For example, in the table
shown above, the default value is 0.000000001. Therefore
you must use Ctrl + Down Arrow to insert rows.
5-52 Mar 08
Clear Clears the table of all but one entry; one entry is required.
Open Allows you to import the values from an existing alpha-s

curve (ALS) into the table. One predefined curve is shipped
with the analysis program. After the values are copied into
the table, you may edit them if desired. Editing these values
will not affect the file from which they were copied.
Save As Enables you to save the current table of values under a file
name.
Fitted Alpha-S range Provides two fields for entering the minimum and maximum
relative pressures from which the fit will be determined.
Relative pressure range Provides two fields for entering a pressure range when
calculation assignments are not used.
Tabular report Select this option to generate collected data in a tabular

manner.
Alpha-S plot Select this option to generate collected data graphically.
screen.

Mar 08 5-53
ending ranges of the X- and/or Y-axis.

plot.
The Y-Axis Range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed
5-54 Mar 08
f-Ratio Plot
The f-Ratio report allows you to take the measured isotherm and normalize it using a reference
isotherm.
Reference Isotherm Displays the sample file you choose as a reference. You
should always choose a file containing an isotherm measured
from a non-porous sample of the same material as the current
sample.
Browse Click to choose the sample file you wish to use as a reference
for the isotherm.
Relative pressure range Allows you to enter a pressure range when calculations
assignments are not used.
Tabular report Choose this option to have a tabular report generated The
tabular report contains four columns: relative pressure,
quantity adsorbed for the isotherm of interest, quantity
adsorbed for the reference isotherm, and the ratio of the
quantities adsorbed.
f-Plot Choose this option to have the data plotted as a graph.
Mar 08 5-55
screen.

5-56 Mar 08
BJH Adsorption/Desorption Report Options
This field does not display on the

BJH Desorption dialog
The BJH Adsorption and Desorption dialogs include the same fields; the operating
instructions for both are the same.
The BJH calculation determines the mesopore volume/area distribution which accounts for
both the change in adsorbate layer thickness and the liquid condensed in pore cores. You can
generate BJH reports from adsorption and desorption data.
Thickness Curve Type Presents the type of thickness curves available.
• Reference
• Kruk-Jaroniec-Sayari
• Halsey
• Harkins-Jura
• Broekhoff-de Boer
• Carbon Black STSA (ASTM D-6556-0lA)
You can also apply the Frenkel-Halsey-Hill thickness curve

using the Halsey option, and entering the appropriate values
in the equation. Use Edit to edit the values in the equation.
Halsey is the default thickness curve and typically is used for
BJH calculations.
If you select a thickness curve which is not a good match for the sample being
analyzed, an incomplete pore distribution may be generated.
Mar 08 5-57
Edit Displays the equation for the type of thickness curve

selected.
Refer to t-Plot Report Options, page 5-46 for information
on the equations for thickness curves.
Minimum/Maximum BJH Provides fields for entering the minimum and maximum
size pore to be included in BJH reports.
The size can be reported in width (default), radius, or
diameter. Select Options > Units to specify the desired unit.
Fraction of pores open During calculations, the software assumes that all pores are
at both ends closed at one end. Sometimes a percentage of pores may be
open at both ends, causing disagreement in the adsorption
(not displayed on desorption and desorption data or in the values for total volume and
dialog) total BJH pore volume. Enter a value in this field to
compensate for this error.
This field does not display on the BJH Desorption Report
Options dialog.
Due to normal hysteresis, data may disagree even after applying this corrective factor.
Adsorptive Displays the BJH Adsorptive Options dialog, allowing you

to specify up to ten adsorptive/adsorbate property factor
combinations.
5-58 Mar 08
Adsorptive The recommended adsorptives and their values are shown.

(continued) You may specify up to six additional adsorptive/adsorbate
property factor combinations.
The adsorbate property factor is the combination of con-

stants in the numerator of the BJH equation which is
specific to the type of gas used. Adsorbate property factors
may be specified in angstroms or nanometers. Select
Options > Data Presentation > Units to specify desired
units.
Smooth differentials Smooths all of the differential calculations, eliminating

variations in the differential computation caused by noise in
the input data.


used.
BJH Correction Enables you to choose the type of correction to apply to

calculations. The type you choose will be displayed in the
report header.
Standard Uses original BJH models.
Kruk-Jaroniec-Sayari Good for reference thickness curves.
Faas Good for statistical thickness curves.
Mar 08 5-59
Selected Reports Lists the available BJH reports.
• Tabular Report
• Cumulative Pore Volume
• dV/d* Pore Volume
• dV/dlog(*) Pore Volume
• Cumulative Pore Area
• dA/d* Pore Area
• dA/dlog(*) Pore Area
* = width, radius, or diameter
Choose a report by double-clicking on the report name or

click the report name and press Spacebar. A report is
selected when it is preceded with a check mark.
Edit Displays an associated dialog for the selected report.

Editing options for available reports are shown in
subsequent sections.
You can measure port width (W), pore radius (R), or pore diameter (D) for BJH reports.
Select Options > Units to specify desired measurement.
Tabular Report
The BJH Adsorption/Desorption tabular report allows you to specify the method of data
reduction.
You can measure pore width, diameter, or radius; pore size can be expressed in
angstroms or nanometers. Select Options > Units to specify desired units.
5-60 Mar 08
Fixed pore size table Select this option to specify exact pore sizes for which
volume or area data are reported. Only the pore sizes within
the specified range appear on the report. Click Table to enter
(or edit) a fixed pore size table.
Collected points Select this option to include in the report calculations the
values collected by the system.
Columns Displays the BJH Adsorption (or Desorption) Tabular Report

column Options dialog, allowing you to select up to six
columns of data for the tabular report.
The default column title appears next to the column number.

Each column includes a pull-down list of the data types to
include in the report; the pore width, radius, or diameter can
be measured (select Options > Units to choose the desired
unit).
Mar 08 5-61
Table Enabled when Fixed pore size table is selected for tabular
data. Displays the BJH Adsorption (or Desorption) Fixed
Pore Size Table dialog, allowing you to enter or edit a fixed
pore size table.
The table must contain a minimum of two points and may

include as many as one thousand. Points must be strictly
decreasing.
Insert
Inserts a row into the pressure table. The row is inserted
above the selected row and the cursor moves to the new row.
Delete
Deletes the selected row from the pressure table.
Clear
Removes all entries (except the two required ones) from the
table. A warning message requests confirmation before the
table is cleared.
5-62 Mar 08
Plot Options
Selecting a BJH plot option from the BJH Adsorption or Desorption Report Options dialog
enables you to specify the plotting method used for your report and to customize the plot.
You can measure pore width, diameter, or radius; pore size can be expressed in
angstroms or nanometers. Select Options > Units to specify desired units.
When you edit a BJH Adsorption or Desorption plot, a dialog similar to the following is
displayed.
Plot Options Allows you to have data plotted as a curve, points, or both.
X-Axis Lists the scale options for the x-axis
Linear/Logarithmic Choose whether you wish to have the X-axis on a logarithmic

or linear scale. Unless you are performing micropore analy-
ses, use the logarithmic option.
Mar 08 5-63
Autoscale Choose this option to have the x-axis scaled automatically.

Linear X-axes begin at zero, and logarithmic X-axes begin at
an appropriate value. The system uses the highest values col-
lected during analysis as the ending points.
If you deselect this option, the corresponding fields are

enabled so that you may enter a beginning and ending value.
Data collected outside the specified ranges are not included in
the plot.
X-axis range fields show pore radius or diameter in ang-

stroms or nanometers.
Data ranges are displayed in the information bar across the

bottom of the dialog when the cursor is in a numerical data
entry field.
Y-axis Lists the options for the Y-axis.
Variable Click on the down-arrow to choose a variable for the Y-axis.
Overlay Displays a list of overlay choices. You can choose a different

type of plot to overlay with the current plot. Or, you can
choose Samples to overlay the current type of plot with the
same type from other sample files. If you choose Samples,
you select the other files using Overlays on the Report
Options dialog box.
Autoscale Choose this option to have the y-axis scaled automatically. Y-

axes begin at zero. The system uses the highest values
collected during analysis as the ending points.
If you deselect this option, the corresponding fields are

Data collected outside the specified ranges are not included in
the plot.
Y-axis range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed.

entry field.
5-64 Mar 08
Dollimore-Heal Adsorption/Desorption Report Options
You can generate DH reports from both adsorption and desorption data.
Or Dollimore-Heal
Desorption Report
Options
The options for Dollimore-Heal reports are the same as those for the BJH reports with the
exception of BJH Correction and Adsorptive properties; this item is not applicable to DH
reports. Refer to BJH Adsorption/Desorption Report Options, page 5-57 for a description
of the fields on this dialog.
Mar 08 5-65
Horvath-Kawazoe Report Options
Pore Geometry Select the option in this group box which best represents the
physical geometry of the micropores in the sample material.
Refer to Appendix C for additional information on
calculations used for these parameters.
Apply Cheng/Yang Allows you to apply the Cheng/Yang correction to the pore
correction size analysis. This correction substitutes the Langmuir
equation of state for Henry’s Law in the Horvath-Kawazoe
derivation (see Appendix C).
Smooth differentials Smooths the differential calculations, eliminating variations

in the differential computation caused by noise in the input
data.


used.
5-66 Mar 08
Interaction Parameter Select one of the options in this group box to determine
which interaction parameter is used during report generation.
Computed The interaction parameter is calculated using the parameters

on the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical Properties dialog. You can
click Properties to view or edit these parameters. Each time
you change one of the parameters, the interaction parameter
is recalculated. The formula for computing the interaction
parameter is given in
Appendix C.
Entered The value you enter in the adjacent field will be used.
Properties Use this push button to view or edit the constants (used
during report generation) describing the physical properties
of the adsorbent and adsorptive; the Horvath-Kawazoe
Physical Properties dialog box is displayed.
Mar 08 5-67
Adsorbent Group Box Contains the parameters for the sample. If you select
Computed for the interaction parameter, all fields are
enabled and can be edited if desired. If you select Entered,
only the values in the Diameter and Diameter at zero
energy fields may be edited.
Description
The name of the adsorbent used in the analysis.
Click on the down arrow to make a new selection. Each time

you change the selection, the values for that adsorbent are
displayed in the appropriate fields.
Diameter
The diameter of the sample atom.
Diameter at zero energy

The diameter of an atom at zero interaction energy,
(2/5)1/6 x diameter.
Polarizability
The polarizability of the adsorbent.
Magnetic susceptibility
The magnetic susceptibility of the adsorbent.
Density
The density per unit area of the adsorbent.
Adsorptive Group Box Contains the parameters for the adsorptives (provided with
the software and/or user-defined). If you select Computed
for the interaction parameter, all fields are enabled and can be
edited if desired. If you select Entered, only the values in the
Diameter and Diameter at zero energy fields may be
edited.
Mnemonic
The mnemonic name of the adsorptive gas in use.
Click on the down arrow to make a new selection. Each time

you change the selection, the values for that adsorptive
display in the appropriate fields. If no parameters have been
defined, the default values are displayed.
Diameter
The diameter of the adsorptive atom.
5-68 Mar 08
Adsorptive Group Box Diameter at zero energy

(continued) The diameter of an atom at zero interaction energy,
(2/5)1/6 x diameter.
Polarizability
The polarizability of the adsorptive.
Magnetic susceptibility
The magnetic susceptibility of the adsorptive.
Density
The density per unit area of the adsorptive.
Selected Reports Lists the available Horvath-Kawazoe reports. Choose a report

by double-clicking on the report name or highlight the report
name and press the Spacebar. A report is selected when it is
preceded with a check mark.
• Tabular Report
• dV/dw Pore Volume
Edit Allows you to edit the selected report.
Tabular Report Options
Displays the Horvath-Kawazoe Tabular Report Column Options dialog so that you can select
the type of data to display in each column.
The default column title displays next to the column number. Each column includes a drop-
down list of the types of data to include in the report.
Mar 08 5-69
Plot Options
Selecting a Horvath-Kawazoe plot option from the Horvath-Kawazoe Report Options dialog
enables you to specify the plotting method used for your report and to customize the plot. Plots
for Cumulative Pore Volume and dV/dw Pore Volume are available.
When you select either of these plots from the Horvath-Kawazoe Report Options dialog, a
dialog like the following is displayed.
Plot Options Lists the data presentation styles available; you must choose
to plot a curve, points, or both.
X-axis options Choose Autoscale to have the x-axis scaled automatically.

The X-axis begins at zero and the system uses the highest
value collected during analysis as the ending point.
If you deselect Autoscale, the adjacent fields are enabled so

that you may enter a beginning and ending value. Data
collected outside these ranges are not included in the plot.
X-axis range fields show pore radius or diameter in

angstroms or nanometers.

entry field.
5-70 Mar 08
Y-axis options Click on the down-arrow at the Variable field to choose a

variable for the Y-axis.
Click on the down-arrow at the Overlay field to overlay the

plot with data from other samples.
Choose Autoscale to have the y-axis scaled automatically. Y-

axes begin at zero. The system uses the highest value
collected during analysis as the ending point.
If you deselect Autoscale, the corresponding fields are

plot.
Y-axis range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed

entry field.
Mar 08 5-71
DFT Pore Size
Type Drop-down list containing the types of models available;

DFT or Classical.
DFT models are based on the density functional theory.

Classical models are based on the Kelvin equation and
thickness for determining the pore size distribution. Refer to
Appendix F for a discussion on models.
Geometry Drop-down list containing pore shapes available; Slit or

Cylinder.
Models Lists the models that meet the criteria specified and which
match the adsorbate and temperature of the sample data.
The models display in alphabetical order with the first one

automatically selected; you may select any one desired.
If the list is empty, there were no models that meet the

selected criteria.
5-72 Mar 08
• If Use calculation assignments is not selected on the Col-

lected/Entered dialog, all of the nonoutlier points of the
collected data within the specified range are used for calcu-
lating the data for this report.
• If Use calculation assignments is selected, collected data

points which are assigned to this report type are used.
Regularization These choices enable you to choose the extent of smoothing

you wish to have applied to your data, or your can choose
None.
If you choose Entered, its field is enabled allowing you to

enter a number giving a relative weight for the smoothing
during deconvolution. Larger values produce more
smoothing.
Reports to Generate Displays the types of reports available.
• Pore Size table

• Isotherm table
• Cumulative area graph
• Incremental area graph
• Differential area graph
• Log goodness of fit graph
• Goodness of fit graph
Graph details can be edited by selecting the Edit push button.
Mar 08 5-73
Edit Use this push button to edit details of a selected graph; a

dialog like the following is displayed.
Displays the type of
graph you are
editing.
Displays the range

for the selected field
This push button is disabled for tables and Goodness of Fit

graphs.
Plot Type Enables you to choose the manner in which you wish to
display plotted data.
Autoscale Options Select these options to have the axes scaled automatically.
If you deselect one or both of these options, you must enter a

range in the related Axis Range fields which become enabled
automatically.
Overlay This drop-down list contains the type of overlays available

for the current graph.
Choose Samples to overlay the same type of graph as the

current one from other data reductions. Then select Overlays
on the Report Options dialog to choose your files (explained
on page 5-32).
Axis Range The fields in this group box become enabled when you dese-
lect Autoscale, allowing you to specify beginning and ending
values for the X- and/or Y-axis. Data collected outside these
ranges are not included in the plot.
Valid ranges for a selected field are displayed in the informa-

tion bar across the lower portion of the dialog.
The X-axis displays the energy and the Y-axis displays the
area.
5-74 Mar 08
Surface Energy
The fields on the Surface Energy dialog are identical to those on the DFT Pore Size dialog
with the following exceptions:
Geometry drop-down list Is not applicable to the Surface Energy report and, therefore,
does not display on its dialog.
Reports to Generate Displays the types of reports available.
• Surface energy table

• Isotherm table
• Cumulative area graph
• Incremental area graph
• Differential area graph
• Log goodness of fit graph
• Goodness of fit graph
Graph details can be edited by selecting the Edit push button.
Refer to the previous section for the DFT Pore Size report beginning on page 5-72 for
information on the fields contained on this dialog.
Mar 08 5-75
Dubinin Report Options
Report Type Allows you to specify the type of report you want. At least
one type of report must be selected.
Select Radushkevich to generate the Radushkevich report.
Select Astakhov to generate the Astakhov report. With this

choice, you may select Optimize Astakhov exponent. If you
do not select this option, the Exponent value field is enabled
so that you can enter a value.
Fitted relative Allows you to specify minimum and maximum limits on

pressure range relative pressures included in the line fit. Data collected
outside these limits are not included.
5-76 Mar 08
Adsorptive Displays the Dubinin Adsorptive Options dialog allowing

you to specify up to 8 Adsorptive/Affinity Coefficient (beta)
combinations.


used.
Selected Reports Lists the available Dubinin reports. Choose a report by

double-clicking on the report name or highlight the report
name and press the Spacebar. A report is selected when it is
preceded with a check mark.
• Tabular Report
• Transformed Isotherm
• dV/dw Pore Volume (Astakhov only)
Mar 08 5-77
Tabular Report
The Tabular report enables you to customize your report with one to six columns of data for
Astakhov reports and one to five columns of data for Radushkevich reports. The Dubinin
Tabular Report Column Options dialog is displayed.
The default column title appears next to the column number. Each column includes a drop-
down list of the data types to include in the report.
Transformed Isotherm
The Transformed Isotherm report allows you to restrict the line fit to a portion of the isotherm.
The Dubinin Transformed Isotherm Plot Options dialog box is displayed.
Overlay Samples Select this option to overlay the current plot with data from
other samples. Then click Overlays on the Report Options
dialog to choose the sample files.
Autoscale x-axis Select these options to have the X- and/or Y-axes

Autoscale y-axis automatically scaled. Both X- and Y-axes begin at zero, and
the system uses the highest values collected during analysis
as the ending points for axes ranges.
5-78 Mar 08
Autoscale x-axis If you choose not to autoscale data for either (or both) axis,
Autoscale y-axis the adjacent fields are enabled so that you may enter a
(continued) beginning and ending value. Data collected outside these
The X-Axis Range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed

at standard temperature and pressure.
The Y-Axis Range fields show the log of relative pressure.

entry field.
Pore Volume
When you select the dV/dw Pore Volume plot from the Dubinin Report Options dialog, the
Dubinin dV/dw Pore Volume Options dialog is displayed.
The Pore Volume report is unavailable if you choose Radushkevich as the type of
report.
Plot options You can plot data with a curve, points, or both.
Overlay Samples Select this option to overlay data from other samples. Then
click Overlays on the Report Options dialog to choose the
files.
Autoscale x-axis Select these options to have the X- and/or Y-axes

Autoscale y-axis automatically scaled. Both X- and Y-axes begin at zero, and
the system uses the highest values collected during analysis
as the ending points for axes ranges.
Mar 08 5-79
Autoscale x-axis If you choose not to autoscale data for either (or both) axis,
Autoscale y-axis the adjacent fields are enabled so that you may enter a
(continued) beginning and ending value. Data collected outside these
The X-axis Range fields show pore width, radius, or

diameter in angstroms or nanometers.
The Y-axis Range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed.

entry field.
5-80 Mar 08
MP-Method Report Options
Thickness Curve group box Select the type of thickness curve from this group box.
You must choose either the Halsey equation or the
Harkins and Jura equation. Use Equation to edit the
values in the equation.
Equation Displays the equation for the type of thickness curve

selected
Harkins and Jura Displays the Harkins and Jura Thickness Equation
dialog.
You can edit the values for the numerator, first element of
the denominator, and exponent. The range for a selected
field is shown in the information bar at the bottom of the
dialog.
Mar 08 5-81
Halsey Displays the Halsey Thickness Equation dialog.
exponent.The range for a selected field is shown in the
Pressure Range Displays the Report Relative Pressure Range dialog so

that you may specify minimum and maximum relative
pressures to use with this report.
• If Use calculation assignments is not selected on

the Collected/Entered dialog, all of the nonoutlier
points of the collected data within the specified range
are used for calculating the data for this report.
• If Use calculation assignments is selected, col-

lected data points which are assigned to this report
type are used.
Selected Reports Lists the available MP-Method reports. Choose a report

by double-clicking on the report name or highlight the
report name and press the Spacebar. A report is selected
when it is preceded with a check mark.
• Tabular Report
• dV/dw Pore Volume
• Cumulative Pore Area
• dA/dw Pore Area
5-82 Mar 08
Tabular Report
The Tabular report enables you to customize your report with one to six columns of data. (The
data types in the first and second columns cannot be changed.) The MP-Method Tabular
Report Column Options dialog is displayed.
The default column title appears next to the column number for columns three through six.
Each of these columns includes a drop-down list of the data types to include in the report.
Columns 1 and 2 are fixed and cannot be edited.
The MP-Method reports hydraulic radius only. If you select Pore size in diameter from
the Units dialog, the MP-Method still reports pore size in radius.
Pore Volume/Pore Area Plot
MP-Method plot options enable you to specify the plotting method used for your report and to
customize the plot. A dialog box like the following is displayed. The fields on all dialogs are
the same.
Mar 08 5-83
Plot options You can plot data with a curve, points, or both.
X-axis options Choose Autoscale to have the x-axis scaled automatically.

The X-axis begins at zero and the system uses the highest
value collected during analysis as the ending point.

X-axis range fields show pore radius or diameter in

angstroms or nanometers.

entry field.
Y-axis options Allows you to choose Y-axis options.
Variable Click on the down-arrow to choose a variable for the Y-axis.
Overlay You can use the choices in this drop-down list to overlay
plots. You can choose a different type of plot for the current
sample to overlay with the listed Variable, or you can choose
Samples to overlay the Variable plot with the same type of
plot from other samples.
Autoscale Choose this option to have the y-axis scaled automatically. Y-

axes begin at zero. The system uses the highest value
collected during analysis as the ending point.

Y-axis range fields show the quantity of gas adsorbed

entry field.
5-84 Mar 08
Options Report
The Options report is a subset of the contents report; it provides pertinent information for the
following:
• Sample tube criteria
• Free space
• Po and temperature
• Equilibration
• Isotherm collection
The Options report cannot be edited.
Sample Log Report
The Sample Log report displays the following:
• Manual control operations performed during analysis

• Information entered using Add Log Entry on the sample file editor
• Warnings and/or errors which occurred during analysis
The Sample Log report is a new feature with the ASAP 2020 program. Therefore, if you
request a Sample Log report on a file that was used with the ASAP 2010 program, no
information will be available.
The Sample Log report cannot be edited.
Mar 08 5-85
Validation Report
Use this report to have your data examined by the software to determine if the results are
within typical ranges.
If the data for any report(s) you selected for validation are determined to be out of range, a
warning is displayed and suggestions are given for corrective action. This information is also
detailed in the report and plotted on the graph as a unique plot symbol.
5-86 Mar 08
Collected/Entered Data
If you choose Manually entered as the type of data in the Sample Information dialog, an
Entered tab is added allowing you to enter the data.
If you choose Automatically collected as the type of data in the Sample Information dialog, a
Collected Data tab is added when analysis is complete. The Collected Data dialog will
contain the data points collected during analysis and the specified calculation assignments.
This example shows the Collected Data dialog from a completed sample information file; the
Entered dialog is identical except the data is entered and the tab displays as Entered Data.
Pressure table For collected data, columns for the following are displayed:
• absolute pressure
• relative pressure
• quantity adsorbed
• outliers (if Use calculation assignments is not selected)
• calculation assignments for each requested report option

(if Use calculation assignments is selected
Mar 08 5-87
Pressure table For entered data, columns for the following are displayed:
(continued)
• absolute or relative pressure (depending on the selection
in the Pressures group box)
• quantity adsorbed
Insert Enabled for entered data; inserts a row into the pressure table.
Delete Enabled for entered data; deletes the selected row.
Clear Enabled for entered data; clears the entire table of all entries
except one (one is required).
Use calculation If selected, allows you to assign the points to be collected for
assignments each report type.
If deselected, each report (with the exception of Langmuir

and BET) uses a range of pressures as selected in Report
Options. The Langmuir and BET reports interpolate to
entered relative pressures on Report Options.
The outlier points can be selected so that they will not be

reported.
Po and T Displays the Po and T dialog, allowing you to edit the

saturation pressure and temperature. Only the applicable
options are enabled.
Free Space Displays the Free Space dialog, allowing you to edit the cold
and warm free spaces. This dialog also includes the plotted
isotherm. The isotherm is redrawn each time you edit the
values in either field.
Also available for the isotherm is a shortcut menu containing

options allowing you to edit the curve and axes. You also can
zoom in for finer detail. Refer to Onscreen Reports, page 7-
18 for the options available.
5-88 Mar 08
Mar 08 5-89
Save ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Save
Save enables you to save any changes you have made to the file in the active window. The file
is saved under its current name.
Save As
Save As enables you to:
• save a sample or parameter file in the active window under a different name. This option is
useful for making a duplicate copy of a file that you can modify as desired without chang-
ing the original one. The original file remains open when you use this function, so be sure
to open the new file before making any changes.
• save a subset (parameter) of the sample file in the active window as a standalone parame-
ter file. For example, select Analysis Conditions from the Save As menu to create a stan-
dalone parameter file of the analysis conditions portion of the active sample file.
• save as an ASCII file the relative pressures and corresponding thicknesses (t-Curve) from
the collected data. These data are derived by dividing the condensed volume of adsorptive
by the selected surface area. The density conversion factor in the adsorptive properties file
is used to convert quantity adsorbed to volume of condensed adsoptive.
• save as an ASCII file the relative pressures and resulting quantities adsorbed (Alpha-S)
from the collected data. These data are derived by taking the isotherm and dividing it by
the quantity adsorbed at 0.4 relative pressure.
5-90 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Save As
Sample and Parameter Files
A dialog similar to the one shown below is displayed when you select Sample Information,
Sample Tube, Degas Conditions, Analysis Conditions, Adsorptive Properties, or Report
Options.
Indicates the type of

file being saved
Enter a file name (up to eight characters) in the File name field; the appropriate extension is
appended automatically when you click OK. The new file is saved as specified, but does not
remain in the active window. Be sure to open the new file before making any changes to the
file.
t-Curve and Alpha-S Files
The same type of dialog box shown above is also displayed when you select t-Curve or Alpha-
S. However, before you receive this dialog for t-Curve, the Save As t-Curve dialog is
displayed. This dialog allows you to choose the surface area for the sample.
Mar 08 5-91
Save All ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Save All
Save All enables you to save all open files under their current names. This option provides a
faster way to save all open files at one time and avoids having to perform a Save operation on
each individual file.
A dialog prompting for a reason for the current change version of each file is displayed.
Close
Close enables you to close the file in the active window. If the file contains changes that have
not been saved, the following message is displayed:
(file name) has been changed. Save changes before closing?
Yes No Cancel
Click Yes; a dialog prompting for a reason for the change is displayed before the file closes.
Click No to close the file without saving the changes.
Click Cancel to return to the active file.
Close All
Close All enables you to close all open files under their current names. The following message
displays for every file containing changes that have not been saved:
(file name) has been changed. Save changes before closing?
Yes No Cancel
Click Yes; a dialog prompting for a reason for the change is displayed before the file closes.
Click No to close the file without saving the changes.
Click Cancel to return to the active file.
5-92 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Print
Print
Print enables you to print the contents of one or more files to the screen, a printer, or a file. For
example, if you choose Analysis Conditions, you will receive the parameters used for all
analysis conditions associated with the file(s). The print dialog is common to all file types.
Select the desired file type from the drop-down menu; a dialog similar to the following is
displayed:
Indicates the type

of report you are
printing
File name The name of the file you choose to print is copied to this
field. If you choose multiple files, the name of the last one
selected is displayed.
Copies Enabled when Printer is selected as the print destination.

You may print up to four copies
Destination Select the destination. You may print to a printer, the screen,
or to a file.
Mar 08 5-93
Print ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
File name Enabled when you select File as the destination. A default
file name (the same name as the sample file) appears if you
choose only one file; you can use the default name or enter
another one.
If you select multiple files, the default displays as *.RPT;

each file will be exported as its original file name with the
RPT extension.
Refer to Selecting Files on page 3-11 for a description of the other fields on this dialog and
the Date Range push button.
5-94 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual List
List
List enables you to generate a listing of the following information on a selected sample or
parameter file.
• File name
• Date the file was created or last edited
• Time the file was created or last edited
• File identification
• File status
Regardless of the type of file you choose, the dialogs are similar; the options presented in the
header vary slightly. The types of dialogs displayed are identical to the ones displayed for the
Print function; you simply obtain different types of information. This example shows a dialog
for sample files.
Indicates the type

of file on which you
have requested a
list of statistics
Refer to Print, page 5-93 for an explanation of the fields on this dialog.
You may request a list of multiple files by holding down Ctrl while selecting files. If no files
are selected, a list is generated for all files.
Mar 08 5-95
Export ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Export
Export copies the isotherm data in the sample information file and reformats it in a text format
acceptable to other programs, such as spreadsheets. The output file consists of four columns
containing the elapsed time, absolute pressure, relative pressure, and specific quantity
absorbed (see example on next page).
File Name The name of the file you choose to export is copied to this
field. If you choose multiple files, the name of the last one
selected is displayed.
Destination You can export data to a printer, to the screen, or to a File.
• If you select Printer, the Copies field is enabled allow-

ing you to print up to four copies.
• If you select File, the File Type and File name fields are
enabled.
File Type You can export data in a spreadsheet format (XLS) or as a

text file (TXT).
5-96 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Export
File Name Allows you to specify a name for your exported file, or you
may accept the default. The default name is the name of the
sample file appended with the appropriate extension.
Format of Data Output
This example shows the format of the output file for exported data.
Description
Operator
Submitter
Sample mass
Type of Data*
Elapsed time Relative pressure

Absolute pressure Specific quantity
adsorbed
*0 = automatically collected
1 = entered (relative pressures)
2 = entered (absolute pressures)
Mar 08 5-97
Convert
Convert allows you to convert sample information files used with the ASAP 2000 to files
compatible with the ASAP 2020 analysis program. You do not have to use the Convert
function for ASAP 2010 files. You can open ASAP 2010 files using the Open command on the
File menu. After an ASAP 2010 file is saved in the ASAP 2020 program, it is no longer
compatible with the ASAP 2010 program. You will be warned of this and given the
opportunity to save under a different name if desired.
The only files displayed are standard MICMOS 2000 files (SI*.DAT) and 2000 Micropore
files (SM*.DAT). .
Destination File name This field enables you to specify different names for the
converted files. You may choose one of the following
options:
• Accept the default for the converted file name. If you

accept this option, the converted file(s) will retain their
original name; only the extension will change. For exam-
ple, if you choose si0140.dat from the Files list box, it is
converted as si0140.smp.
• Type the name for the converted file. For example, if you
wish to convert the following file on the C drive:
From: C:\DATA1\SI0010.DAT
To: C:\DATA2\SAMP90.SMP
Then type: C:\DATA2\SAMP90.SMP
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Convert
Destination File name

(continued) If you wish to convert the following file on the D drive:
From: D:\SI0010.DAT
To: C:\DATA2\SAMP90.SMP
Then enter C:\DATA2\SAMP90.SMP
If you wish to convert more than one file, enter wildcard

characters. For example, the following chart shows the
selected files and converted file names resulting when
you enter the following:
C:\NEWDIR\*.SMP.
Selected Files Export Names

C:\DATA1\S1001.DAT C:\NEWDIR\S1001.SMP
Refer to Selecting Files on page 3-11 for a description of the other fields on this dialog and the
Date Range push button.
The following message is displayed when the first file containing a fixed pore size table is
encountered:
Fixed pore size tables will not be converted. If a sample file to be

converted uses a fixed pore size table, the fixed pore size table can be
entered after conversion is complete.
This message informs you that fixed pore size tables are not converted to the new format. You
must enter a fixed pore size table after conversion if you desire to use one with the sample
information file. Click OK to clear the message.
Mar 08 5-99
Exit ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Exit
Exit enables you to exit (close) the ASAP 2020 program.
• If an analysis is in progress, the following message is displayed:
CAUTION: Sample analysis is in progress. If you exit

the program analysis will continue to completion, but
the data are not saved to disk until the program is
restarted. Do you want to exit the program?
Yes No
Click Yes to close the ASAP 2020 program. The analysis continues and data are collected.
Click No to allow the program to remain active.
Although data are stored in the analyzer when you exit the program during analysis,
they are not saved in the file until the program is restarted. At that time the data are
saved automatically. If a power failure occurs in the interim and you do not have an
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) attached, loss of data will result.
• If a report is in progress, you are cautioned that reports are being generated, and given the
opportunity to either cancel the print job or allow the reports to print before exiting.
Observe the Status area of the instrument schematic; it indicates when an analysis is
complete.
5-100 Mar 08
6. UNIT MENU
The Unit menu contains the options for the operations that can be performed with the ASAP
2020 analyzer. The main menu will contain a Unit menu for each attached analyzer. For
example, if you have two attached analyzers, the main menu contains two Unit menus. The
appropriate unit number and serial number display in the title bar of the operational windows.
The status windows also display in different colors. This feature is especially useful when you
have more than one analyzer attached to the same computer.
The Unit menu does not display on the menu bar if the analysis program is being
used for offline data manipulation on a computer other than the one controlling the
analyzer.
Description
Listed below are brief descriptions of the Unit menu options. Detailed descriptions are found
in subsequent sections.
Sample Analysis Starts an analysis. This option is disabled if analyses are in

progress. Page 6-3.
Start Degas Allows you to start the degassing operation on one or two
samples. Page 6-8.
Enable Manual Control Allows you to control the system manually. Page 6-9.
Mar 08 6-1
Show Instrument Displays a schematic of the analyzer components. Page 6-12.

Schematic
Show Status Shows the status window of the operation in progress.

Page 6-13.
Show Instrument Log Displays a log of recent analyses, calibrations, and error mes-
sages. Page 6-14.
Unit Configuration Displays the configuration of the analyzer. Page 6-16.
Diagnostics Enables you to perform certain diagnostic tests. Page 6-18
Calibration Enables you to calibrate certain components of the analyzer.

Page 6-19.
Degas Allows you to perform sample degassing operations. Enabled

only if the SmartVac is installed. Page 6-24.
Service Test Enables you to perform certain troubleshooting procedures.

This option is enabled only with the direction of a Micromer-
itics service representative. Page 6-29.
6-2 Mar 08
Sample Analysis ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Sample Analysis
When you select this option from the Unit menu, the Sample Analysis dialog is displayed
with all fields disabled (grayed) and the Start Analysis dialog positioned on top. This allows
you to select a sample file for your analysis or to create a new one.
After a sample file has been designated, the Analysis dialog is displayed. The fields now con-
tain the values for the selected file or, if creating a new file, the specified defaults.
View Allows you to view one of the following in the current win-
dow:
• the current operation

• the instrument schematic
• the instrument log
Refer to Show Instrument Schematic on page 6-12 and

Show Instrument Log on page 6-14.
Browse Displays the Start Analysis dialog allowing you to choose a

different sample file for the current analysis.
Sample Displays an identification of the sample file.
Mar 08 6-3
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Sample Analysis
Mass Enables you to enter the sample’s mass.
Sample Tube Displays the name of the Sample Tube file for the current
sample file.
If this is a new file, this field contains the file you specified as
the default.
The drop-down list contains a list of predefined parameter

files that were saved to the Parameter Files Directory (refer to
Parameter Files Directory on page 8-12), as well as those
included with the analysis program. You may choose a dif-
ferent file from this list if desired.
Analysis Conditions Displays the name of the Analysis Conditions file for the cur-
rent sample file.
the default.

included with the analysis program. You may choose a dif-
ferent file from this list if desired.
Adsorptive Properties Displays the name of the Adsorptive Properties file for the
current sample file.
the default.

shipped with the analysis program. You may choose a differ-
ent file from this list if desired.
6-4 Mar 08
Report Options Displays the name of the Report Options file for the current
sample file.
the default.

shipped with the analysis program. You may choose a differ-
ent file from this list if desired.
Po Enabled if you have chosen to enter the Po measurement.

Enter (or confirm) the saturation pressure of the adsorptive,
or edit the current one if desired.
Bath temperature Enabled if you have chosen to enter the bath temperature (Po
and T option on the Analysis Conditions dialog). Enter (or
confirm) the temperature for the analysis bath.
Warm and Cold Free Enabled if you have chosen to enter the free space values
space (Free Space option on the Analysis Conditions dialog). Enter
(or confirm) the appropriate value(s).
Report After Analysis Displays the Report Settings dialog so that you may specify
report output options. If you choose Screen, reports have
many options for being customized and manipulated. (Refer
to Onscreen Reports on page 7-18 for details about
onscreen reports.)
Mar 08 6-5
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Sample Analysis
Export After Analysis Allows you to have isotherm generated automatically after
the analysis; displays the Export Settings dialog so that you
may specify output options.
Start Begins the analysis; after data start to collect, an analyzing

view of the Analysis dialog is displayed.
Suspend Suspends the analysis.
Skip Skips the current step of the analysis.
Use the Skip function with caution; the ASAP performs multiple steps for a given task.
Skipping certain steps may cause corruption of data, instrument damage, or personal
injury.
6-6 Mar 08
Resume Resumes a suspended analysis.
Cancel Cancels the analysis.
Start On this view of the analysis dialog, this push button changes
to Next when the analysis is finished.
Next Enabled at the completion of the analysis. Returns you to the

first view of the Analysis dialog so that you may schedule
another analysis.
Close Enabled at the completion of analysis. Closes the dialog.
Mar 08 6-7
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Start Degas
Start Degas
This option allows you to choose the file and start degas operations on one or two samples;
the Automatic Degas dialog is displayed.
Sample Click Browse to the right of this field to select a sample file
that will be used with the current sample.
Degas Conditions Displays the Degas Conditions file designated as the default.
After you choose a sample file, this field displays the file
associated with the sample file.
You can choose a different Degas Conditions file from the

drop-down list if desired. If you choose a different file, the
values in the current file will be overwritten with the values
of the new one.
Clear Clears the sample file from the port assignment. Click
Browse to choose a different file.
Start Starts the degassing operation
Cancel Closes the dialog, cancelling the degassing operation.
6-8 Mar 08
Enable Manual Control ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Enable Manual Control
Select this option to control certain components of your system manually. If the instrument
schematic is not displayed, select Instrument Schematic from the View drop-down list.
When manual control is enabled, the valve symbols change color on the monitor screen to
indicate their status.
Green = open
Yellow = closed
Use the mouse pointer to select a component. A component is selected when it is surrounded
by a thin line. Each component has a shortcut menu displaying the operations available for
that particular component. These menus may be accessed by right-clicking on the desired
component, or by using the shortcut keys Shift + F9.
You can open and close valves, and raise or lower the elevator by using one of the following
methods:
• right-click on the valve or elevator symbol to access the shortcut menu and select the
appropriate action
• double-click on the valve or elevator symbol
• select the valve or elevator symbol and press the Spacebar
Mar 08 6-9
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Enable Manual Control
Valves System valves and their functions are listed in Table 6-1.
Actions: Open, Close, Pulse

Open Closed
Pulse briefly opens and closes (or vice versa) the valve.
Table 6-1. System Valves
Valve Description
1 Unrestricted vacuum
2 Restricted vacuum
3 Free-space measurement gas (helium)
4 Restricted analysis gas
5 Unrestricted analysis gas
7 Lower manifold isolation
8 Vapor
9 Sample port
10 Restricted Psat tube port
11 Unrestricted Psat tube port
P1 through P6 Gas inlet port valves
PS Supply valve for physisorption gases
PV Vacuum valve for physisorption gases
Dewar positions The Dewar can be raised, lowered, or stopped.
Indicates the Dewar is being raised; note the position of the

arrow in the center of the Dewar symbol.
Indicates the Dewar is being lowered; note the position of the

arrow in the center of the Dewar symbol.
Indicates the Dewar is stopped in the raised position.
6-10 Mar 08
Enable Manual Control ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Indicates the Dewar is stopped in the lowered position.
The remainder of the components are displayed for informational purposes only; they cannot
be controlled manually.
Represents the sample tube.
Represents the Psat tube.
Temperature This group of rectangles on the left side of the schematic dis-
plays the temperature, the vacuum gauge pressure, and the
Transducers
transducer(s) currently installed. This representation shows
all three transducers installed.
Vacuum Gauge
Mar 08 6-11
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Show Instrument Schematic
Show Instrument Schematic

Select this option to display a schematic of the ASAP 2020 analyzer. The schematic is a
graphical representation of the plumbing system including system valves, the analysis station,
and the Dewar position. The valves and Dewar can be controlled from the schematic when
Manual control is enabled. Refer to Enable Manual control on page 6-9 for an explanation
of the components displayed on the instrument schematic.
The state of the valves can be determined quickly by color representation even when manual
control is not enabled:
• Green = open
• White = closed
If you wish to change the state of a valve, you must enable manual control.
6-12 Mar 08
Show Status ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Show Status
A status window is shown across the bottom of all operational dialogs as well as the instru-
ment schematic. The Show Status option enables you to show only the status window. This
frees up your computer screen allowing you to perform other tasks (such as creating or edit-
ing sample files), while still monitoring the progress of your analysis.
If you have multiple instruments attached to your computer, the status bar for each instrument
is displayed in a different color.
Analysis status bar Shows the progression of the analysis. This bar contains three
stages:
• Preliminary: warm and cold free spaces are determined;

displays green during progression
• Analysis: data are collected; displays blue during progres-

sion
• Termination: the dewar lowers, and the sample tube is

warmed and backfilled; displays gray during progression
All stages are displayed in red if the analysis has been

suspended.
Analysis details The following analysis details are displayed:
Sample: Sample file number

Stage: Stage of the analysis (as in status bar)
Last Point: Last point and number of points requested
P: Absolute pressure of last point
P/Po: Relative pressure of last point
V(cm3/g): Volume adsorbed
Po: Absolute pressure of last measured or
calculated saturation pressure (Po)
Run Time: Elapsed time since the start of analysis
Step details Provides details of the current step of the analysis.
Mar 08 6-13
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Show Instrument Log
Show Instrument Log

Displays a log of recent analyses, calibrations, and errors or messages.
By default, this information is logged for a 60-day period for analyses and messages, and a
90-day period for calibrations.You may change the time for which this information is retained
in the Unit section of the WIN2020.INI file. Simply replace the default value with the desired
number.
Analysis These options allow you to choose which entries are dis-
Calibration played in the window. For example, select the Calibration
Messages check box to display only calibration information.
Add Log Entry Enables you to make an entry in the instrument log that can-
not be recorded automatically through the application
software. For example, you may change the port filter. The
field adjacent to the push button allows you to enter the
operation; the push button is enabled when you make an
entry in the field, allowing you to add the entry.
6-14 Mar 08
Show Instrument Log ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Report Displays the Log Report Settings dialog allowing you to

generate the log contents to a specified destination.
Use the Start Date field to specify the date at which to start
the printout. This date does not limit the entries that display
in the window, it is only pertinent to the entries that will be
printed on the report.
You can specify a date using one of the following methods:
• Highlight the field (or press F2 to clear the field) and type
in the desired date.
• Double-click in the field (or press F4) to display a calendar

to choose a date.
• Press F2 to clear the field, then F3 to insert the current

date.
Enter the number of copies desired in the Copies field; you

may print up to 4. This field is disabled if you are printing to
a File or to the Screen.
Choose the report destination from the drop-down list in the

Destination field. If you choose File, the File name field is
enabled, allowing you to enter a name for the printed file (or
you may accept the default).
Mar 08 6-15
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Unit Configuration
Unit Configuration
Select this option to view the current calibration settings, the date on which calibration was
performed, and the software and hardware configuration of your system.
Volume Calibration Displays the system, lower, and reference volumes from the
most recent calibration. It also displays the date and time the
calibration was completed.
A/D Calibration Displays the following:
• The date and time the manifold temperature was last cali-
brated.
• The date and time the transducer offsets were last cali-
brated.
• The percent of nominal transducer scale in use, and the

date and time the transducer scale was last calibrated.
• The date and time the vacuum gauge was calibrated.
6-16 Mar 08
Unit Configuration ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Configuration Displays the following:
• The hardware code specifying the hardware components

(for example transducers) present in your analyzer. This
code is provided so the Service Department may quickly
identify your hardware configuration and provide prompt
assistance. Hardware codes translate as follows:
E = 1000-mmHg transducer
G = 10- and 1000-mmHg transducers
H = 1-, 10-, and 1000-mmHg transducers
• The identification number of the port being used to control

the analyzer.
• The serial number of the attached analyzer (active unit).
Software Versions The software versions of the MIC BIOS, Controller, and
ASAP 2020 System software.
SmartVacSoftware The software versions of the MIC BIOS and SmartVac

Versions software. This group box is not displayed if the SmartVac is
not installed.
Features The options currently enabled on your system (for example,

MicroPore or MultiGas).
Gas Displays the Gas Configuration dialog.
This dialog allows you to choose the gases attached to each

port of the analyzer.
Mar 08 6-17
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Diagnostics
Board ID Displays the Board ID dialog so that you can view the sta-
tistics of the board contained in the requested slot of the card
cage in the instrument.
Diagnostics
This option enables you to perform certain diagnostic tests which may be requested by your
service represntative. These tests will be provided by your service representative and when
placed in the proper directory (this information will be provided) will enable this option.
6-18 Mar 08
Calibration ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Calibration
This option allows you to calibrate the vacuum gauge, pressure gauge, pressure scale, mani-
fold temperature, and system volume. You can also save the current calibrations to a file or
load a different calibration file.
Vacuum Gauge
Displays the Calibration Vacuum Gauge dialog containing the current vacuum level.
This dialog also allows you to enter a new value (if necessary) after calibration using an
external reference gauge.
Pressure Zero
Displays the Calibrate Pressure Offset dialog.
This dialog allows you to evacuate the manifold and zero all pressure transducers in the
system.
Mar 08 6-19
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Calibration
Pressure Scale
Use this option to adjust the scale of the transducer to match a reference standard; the Cali-
brate Pressure Scale dialog is displayed.
A Pressure Scale option is available for each type of transducer you have installed. For exam-
ple, if you have the 1000-mmHg and the 10-mmHg transducers installed, a Pressure Scale
option is displayed for the adjustment of each one.
Reset to nominal Restores factory calibration settings for all transducers.
Match to entered pressure Select this option to enter a value obtained using a reference
pressure gauge to determine the actual manifold pressure.
Temperature
Use this option to adjust the offset of the manifold temperature sensor to agree with a value
obtained using a calibration device. The Calibrate Manifold Temperature dialog is displayed
so that you may enter the measured value.
6-20 Mar 08
Volume
Use this option to enter a predetermined system volume in the event of data loss.
Displays as Next if you

choose Measured.
The system volume typically is calibrated after servicing valves, transducers, or any part of
the analysis plumbing. The ASAP 2020 must be idle to calibrate system volume. Before sys-
tem volume is calibrated, the manifold temperature sensor and the master pressure gauge
must be calibrated.
Previous Retains the values currently in use.
Entered Allows you to enter values to use.
Measured This field is used by authorized service personnel when mea-

suring the system and lower manifold volumes. A special
Service Kit is required to perform these procedures.
Done Closes the dialog (displays for the Previous and Entered
selections).
Next Appears only when Measured was selected; displays a dia-

log that enables service personnel to enter measured volumes.
Mar 08 6-21
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Calibration
Reference Volume Enter the number of cubic centimeters for the reference vol-
ume you are using in this calibration.
Reference Volume Temp. Enter the temperature of the reference volume. Since the ref-
erence volume should be submerged in an ice bath, this value
should remain at 0.0oC for best accuracy.
Perform measurement Choose the number of measurements you wish to perform;

you may choose up to 9.
Start Begins the calibration; a status view is displayed. After the

calibration has finished, a confirmation view of the Calibrate
System Volume dialog is displayed.
This dialog allows you to choose the volume you wish to use.
Previous
The system volume and lower manifold volume in use before
this measurement.
Entered
An entered measurement.
Measured
The last measured system and lower manifold volumes; for
example if you choose 3 measurements, this value is that of
the last (third) measurement.
Average
The average of the series of measurements; for example if
you choose 3 measurements, this value is the average of the
three measurements.
Click Done to close the dialog.
6-22 Mar 08
Save to File
Use this option to save the current calibration settings to a file; the Select Calibration File dia-
log is displayed.
File name Defaults to the next sequence number for calibration files.
The sequence number consists of: xxx-yyy.CAL, where xxx
= serial number of unit and yyy = sequence number. For
example, the number listed in the above dialog represents
the first calibration file for unit serial number 202.
Load from File
Displays the Select Calibration File dialog (shown above) so that you can load a previously
saved calibration file.
Mar 08 6-23
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Degas
Degas
This option on the Unit menu is enabled if your ASAP 2020 is equipped with the SmartVac
degassing option. The choices on this cascading menu allow you to select operations for the
SmartVac degasser.
Enable Manual Control
Select this option to control manually certain components of the degas operation. If the
instrument schematic for the SmartVac is not displayed, select Show Instrument Schematic
from the Degas menu.
Servo Valve
Valves D1, D2, D5, D6, D7 Degasser valves and their functions are listed in Table 6-2.
Actions: Open, Close
6-24 Mar 08
Degas ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Table 6-2. Degasser Valves
Valve Description
D1 and D2 Sample port valves
D5 Vacuum valve
D6 Servo isolation valve
D7 Gas inlet port valve
Servo Valve Actions: Set, Close
Set displays the Servo Value Settings dialog so that you can
enter a target pressure for sample evacuation. This feature
enables you to use the software to bring down the sample
pressure slowly and incrementally.
Close closes the servo valve.
Heaters Actions: Set, Disable
Set displays the Port [n] Heater Settings dialog so that you
can specify a ramp rate and target temperature. After you
click and close the dialog, the settings are displayed directly
below the heater symbol.
Disable cancels the settings.
Status window Displays the status of the current degassing operation(s).
Show Instrument Schematic
Displays the schematic (shown in the previous section) for the SmartVac.
Mar 08 6-25
Show Status
This option allows you to monitor the degassing operation.
Sample Displays the sample file being used with the degassing oper-
ation for each port.
Status Displays the current stage of the degassing operation for

each port.
Check Allows you to check the outgassing rate of the sample on the
related port; the following actions occur:
• current degassing step is suspended (on both ports).

Degassing can be checked after the vacuum setpoint has
been attained, or during a temperature ramp and hold. If
you choose this option during any other step, a message
indicating the SmartVac is not in a valid state is displayed.
• vacuum valves are closed and the vacuum level moni-

tored.
• the Status window is displayed (if not already displayed).

The Status window will indicate that the degassing opera-
tion is being checked and will display the outgassing rate
as it becomes available.
During the degas check, this push button changes to Con-

tinue. When Continue is clicked, the valves open, the tem-
perature ramp or hold continues, and the degassing operation
resumes. If your outgassing rate indicated that the sample
has been rid of contaminants (minimal pressure increases),
you can click Skip to advance to the next state of the degas-
sing operation. For example, if you check degassing after the
setpoint is attained, Skip advances you to the ramping stage.
Skip Skips the current stage of the degassing operation for the
port associated with this push button.
Cancel Cancels the degassing operation for the port associated with
this push button.
6-26 Mar 08
Degas ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Calibrate Pressure Zero
Use this option to evacuate the manifold and zero the transducer.
Start Begins the calibration.
Status messages are displayed during this procedure, then

the dialog closes automatically.
Mar 08 6-27
Calibrate Pressure Scale
Use this option to adjust the scale of the pressure transducer.
Current Pressure Enter the current pressure of the degasser manifold.
Calibrate Vacuum Gauge
Displays the Calibration Vacuum Gauge dialog containing the current vacuum level.
This dialog also allows you to enter a new calibration value (if necessary) obtained using an
external reference gauge.
6-28 Mar 08
Service Test ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Calibrate Servo
Use this option to calibrate the servo valve to the manifold pressure transducer. The servo
valve should always be recalibrated after a pressure calibration has been performed. The Cal-
ibrate Servo Valve dialog is displayed.
Start Begins the calibration. The servo valve is used to evacuate

and equilibrate the manifold. The pressure transducer read-
ings are used to calibrate the servo set point. Status messages
are displayed during this procedure, then the dialog closes
automatically.
Service Test
Various service tests are included in the ASAP 2020 operating program. These tests can be
enabled and performed only with the assistance of a trained Micromeritics service represen-
tative. These tests are designed to provide your service representative with instrument
readouts, as well as to assist him in troubleshooting potential problems and, perhaps, elimi-
nating unnecessary repair services. This service strategy allows you to conduct expert tests in
less time than it would take to be trained in servicing the instrument properly.
Mar 08 6-29
7. REPORTS MENU
This chapter describes the commands on the Reports menu; it also contains examples of
reports.
Reports can be generated for data:
• collected on a sample that has completed analysis
• collected on a sample that is currently being analyzed (includes only the information col-
lected up to the time of the report)
• that is manually entered
Description
Listed below are brief descriptions of the commands contained on the Reports menu. Detailed
descriptions follow this section.
Start Report Allows you to generate a report on a completed sample

analysis or on the data collected thus far for an analysis in
progress. Page 7-3.
Close Reports Closes all open report windows. Page 7-5.
Open Report Enables you to open a report that was saved from the report
window. Page 7-5.
SPC Report Options Allows you to specify the sample data to be included in SPC
reports. Page 7-6.
Mar 08 7-1
Regression Report Allows you to generate a regression report. Page 7-7.
Control Chart Allows you to generate a control chart report. Page 7-11.
Heat of Adsorption Allows you to generate a Heat of Adsorption report.

Page 7-14.
Rate of Adsorption Invokes the Rate of Adsorption program, allowing you to

generate ROA reports. Page 7-17.
7-2 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Start Report
Start Report
Select this option to generate a report on a sample analysis. Select Start report from the
Reports menu to display the Start Report dialog.
File name The name you select from the Files list box is copied to this
field. If you select multiple files, only the last one selected is
displayed. If you have a sample file open when you select this
option, its name is displayed.
Status This drop-down list determines what type of sample files are
displayed in the Files list window in the specified directory
for all dates, or within the specified range of dates (using
push button).
Choices: All, Analyzing, Complete, Entered
Refer to Table 3-2. File Status and Description, page 3-12

for a description of the status types.
Date Range Displays the Select Dates dialog so that you may specify a
range of dates. Refer to Selecting Files on page 3-11 for a
description of this push button.
Copies Enabled when the Printer or Printer/Plotter destination is

chosen. This option allows you to print up to four copies of
the selected report(s).
Mar 08 7-3
Start Report ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Destination Displays a drop-down list of output destinations.
Choices: File, Printer, Screen
If you select Printer, requested reports are printed to the

selected printer.
If you select Screen, many options are available for

manipulating and customizing reports. Refer to Printed
reports on page 7-18.
If you select File, the tabular reports of the requested file are
converted to a text file which can be viewed with a text editor
or other text file manipulation tool. Graphical data cannot be
generated to a File.
File name Enabled when you select File as the destination. Allows you
to enter a name, or you may accept the default.
Files list box Displays a list of the available sample files for the choice
shown in the Status field and within the range of dates
specified in the Dates dialog.
Directories Displays a list of available drives and directories. The drive

and directory last accessed is displayed immediately above
the Directories list box.
If you choose a single sample file, the Reports to Generate
dialog is displayed. The reports selected are the ones you
specified in the sample file. This dialog allows you to
deselect reports or select additional ones.
7-4 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Close Reports
Double-click on the report(s) you wish to select (or deselect);

alternatively, you can highlight the report and press Space-
bar. A check mark is placed before each selected report.
After you make your report selection and click OK, the
requested reports are sent to the specified destination.
If you choose more than one file, this dialog is not displayed.
The reports specified in each sample file will be generated.
Close Reports
This option enables you to close all open report windows at one time. This avoids having to
select close on each report window.
Open Report
Enables you to open a report that you saved from the report window.
Mar 08 7-5
SPC Report Options ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
SPC Report Options
When you select SPC Report Options, the SPC Report Options dialog is displayed.
The SPC Report Options dialog lists the variables that are most frequently used for SPC
reporting. You can check as many as desired. All variables selected are computed for each
sample file used in an SPC report.
Click More for additional SPC calculations for the detailed reports.
7-6 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Regression Report
Regression Report
Select this option to generate a regression report. The regression report is used to determine
the interdependency between two variables. Up to three dependent variables (Y-axis) may be
plotted against a single independent variable (X-axis). The degree of correlation between the
variables also is reported. The graphs for the regression report are scaled so that all three fit
on a single page. If you choose less than three, the graphs are scaled to fill most of the page.
Show report title Select this option to have a title display on your report.
Accept the default or enter a new title. You can enter up to 40
alphanumeric characters.
Show graphic Select this option to have a graphic display above your report
title. For example, you may wish to display your company
logo. The graphic must be a bitmap (bmp) or enhanced
metafile (emf).
Click Browse to choose the file, then use the Height and
Width fields to specify a size. This image can be edited in the
report window (when printed to the screen), or removed if
desired.
Mar 08 7-7
Regression Report ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
X- and Y-Axes Allows you to designate the X- and Y-axes variables. Click
Variable fields on the down arrow to display a list of variables. The variables
in this list are the ones you specified in the SPC report
options.
With this option, you can plot the regression of up to three Y-

axis variables against the X-axis variable. The X-axis
specifies the independent variable for the regression, while
the Y-axes provide the dependent variables.
Axis Range Enables you to specify the beginning and ending values for
the X- and Y-axis ranges. Data collected outside these ranges
are not included in the plot. These fields are disabled if you
choose Autoscale.
Autoscale Allows you to have the X- and/or Y-axes scaled

automatically. When scaled automatically, both axes begin at
zero. The analysis program uses the highest values collected
during analysis as the ending points.
Recalculate archived Select this option to have archived SPC values recalculated.
SPC results This ensures that any changes made to the SPC Report
Options are included in the new report; however, it does
lengthen the time required to generate the report.
Tabular report Enables you to generate tabular, as well as graphical, data of

the included samples. A tabular report contains the numeric
values contributed by each sample.
Label data Allows you to label the points on the plot to correspond with
the values in the sample files.
Samples Displays the Regression Report Sample Selection dialog,

allowing you to choose the sample files you wish to have
reported.
7-8 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Regression Report
File name Use this field to limit the files displayed in the Available Files
pane. For example; enter g*.smp to display only the files
beginning with an g.
Status This drop-down list determines the type of sample files that
display in the Available Files pane in the selected directory
for all dates, or within the specified range of dates (using
Date Range push button). Refer to Table 3-2. File Status
and Description, page 3-12 for an explanation of the Status
types.
Date Range Displays the Select Dates dialog so that you can specify a
range of dates. Refer to Selecting Files, page 3-11 for an
explanation of this dialog.
Use all files in Select this option to include all files from the selected
this directory directory in the report.
Directories Lists the current directory. Use the directory window to

navigate to a different directory.
Add Moves the selected file in the Available Files pane to the
Selected Files pane. Alternatively, you can simply double-
click on the desired file(s). You can select multiple files by
holding down Ctrl while making your selections. You can
include up to 200 sample files.
Mar 08 7-9
Regression Report ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Remove Removes the selected file from the Selected Files pane and
places it back into the Available Files pane.
Save As Default Saves the current definition of the report as the default.
Report Settings The options in this group box enable you to choose output
criteria.
The Copies field is enabled when you choose Printer as the

destination, enabling you to print up to four copies of the
report.
Report Generates the report.
7-10 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Control Chart
Control Chart
This option enables you to generate a control chart report which plots the changes in a
statistic.
Show report title Select this option to have a title display on your report.
Accept the default or enter a new title. You can enter up to 40
alphanumeric characters.
Show graphic Select this option to have a graphic display above your report
title. For example, you may wish to display your company
logo. The graphic must be a bitmap (bmp) or enhanced
metafile (emf).
Click Browse to choose the file, then use the Height and
Width fields to specify a size. This image can be edited in the
report window (when printed to the screen), or removed if
desired.
X-axis Order By Enables you to choose the order in which X-axis statistics are
placed. You can have them placed by Time, File name, Date,
Minutes, or Days.
Mar 08 7-11
Control Chart ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Graph [n] Displays the Control Chart Graph [n] Options dialog,
allowing you to define the Y-axis of each graph.
Statistic This drop-down list displays the SPC variables selected on

the SPC Report Options dialog. The variable you choose will
be plotted against time.
Autoscale Allows you to have the Y-axis scaled automatically. If you

wish to specify a range, deselect this option and enter a range
in the From and To fields.
Center Line Displays placement options for the variable’s optional value.
Choose Entered to specify placement of the line.
Limit Lines Displays the options available for limiting lines. You can
have the lines placed at some multiple of the standard
deviation or at specified positions (Entered).
When you select Entered, the High limit and Low limit
fields are enabled, allowing you to enter appropriate values.
Tabular report Allows you to generate tabular, as well as graphical, data of

the included samples. A tabular report contains the numeric
values contributed by each sample.
Recalculate archived Select this option to have archived SPC values recalculated.
SPC results This ensures that any changes made to the SPC Report
Options are included in the new report. It also lengthens the
time required to generate the report.
7-12 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Control Chart
Samples Displays the Control Chart Sample Selection dialog, allowing

you to choose the sample files on which you wish to report.
This dialog functions in the same manner as the Regression

Report Sample Selection Dialog explained on page 7-8.
Save as Default Saves the current definition of the report as the default.
Report Settings The options in this group box enable you to choose output
criteria.
The Copies field is enabled when you choose Printer as the

destination, enabling you to print up to four copies of the
report.
Mar 08 7-13
Heat of Adsorption ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Heat of Adsorption
The isosteric heat of adsorption is an important parameter for characterizing the surface
heterogeneity, providing information about the adsorbent and the adsorption capacity. Multiple
adsorption isotherms are obtained on the same sample using the same adsorptive but at
different temperatures to obtain the heat of adsorption.
This option allows you to choose the sample files, define the quantities, and generate a Heat of
Adsorption report; the Heat of Adsorption dialog is displayed.
Table Contains the files you choose; also lists the quantity
adsorbed.
Add Samples Displays the Select Samples dialog so that you can choose
desired files.
Remove Samples Removes the selected sample from the list. If no samples are
selected, the last one is removed.
Clear Samples Removes all samples from the list.
7-14 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Heat of Adsorption
Edit Quantities Displays the Edit Quantities Adsorbed dialog so that you can
specify the range of surface coverage to include in the heat of
adsorption report.
Quantity Adsorbed Allows you to enter the points.

table
Insert Range Displays the Insert Quantity Range dialog.

This dialog allows you to specify the starting and ending
quantities adsorbed, as well as the number of points to insert
within the specified range.
Insert Inserts a row above the selected row.
Mar 08 7-15
Heat of Adsorption ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Clear Clears the entire table of all entries except one; one is
required.
Load Table Allows you to import a previously saved table.
Save Table Allows you to save the current table as a file (QNT
extension).
Apply Applies the quantities in the table to the curent Heat of

Adsorption report.
Report Settings The options in this group box allow you to choose report
criteria.
Show report title Choose this option to have a title display in the header of
your report, then use the adjacent field to enter the title.
Show graphic This option allows you to have a graphic appear in your title;
for example, you may wish to show your company logo. You
can use a bitmap or an enhanced metafile.
Use the Height and Width fields to define a size.
Tabular report Select this option to have data generated in a tabular format.
Isostere plot Select this option to generate a graph showing quantities of

gas adsorbed vs. the temperature.
Heat of adsorption Select this option to generate the Heat of Adsorption data in a
plot graphical format.
Copies Enabled when you choose Printer as the destination,

allowing you to print up to four copies of your report(s).
Destination Enables you to choose a destination for your report.
File name Enabled when you choose File as the destination, allowing
you to enter a name (or you can accept the default).
Open Enables you to open a previously saved report.
7-16 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Rate of Adsorption (ROA)
Save Saves the current report.
Rate of Adsorption (ROA)

Rate of Adsorption is enabled only if this option is installed.
Select Rate of Adsorption to start the ROA program. Refer to your Rate of Adsorption
operator’s manual for operating instructions.
Mar 08 7-17
Printed Reports ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Printed Reports
Header
All printed reports (either to the screen or to a printer) contain a header displaying file
statistics.
• Tabular and graphical reports contain sample and instrument statistics such as when the
file was created and by whom, date and time of analysis, analysis conditions, and so forth.
The headers for these reports also contain notes of any changes to the sample file that
occur after analysis.
• Summary report headers contain the same type of information displayed in tabular and
graphical reports with the exception of notes.
Onscreen Reports
The report window containing onscreen reports provides many options for customizing and
manipulating reports:
• a tool bar
• shortcut menus
• zoom feature
• axis cross-hairs
When reports are printed to the screen, they are printed in a window like the one shown below.
Each requested report is listed in the Reports window on the tool bar; they are also indicated
by selectable tabs across the top of the report header. To view a specific report, select its tab or
select the report in the Reports window and click Show.
7-18 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Printed Reports
Tabs display for each type of report you choose to generate.
Header
List of reports
requested
Options on
Tool Bar
Displays graphical
(or tabular) data
Tool Bar
Reports Contains a list of all requested reports.
Show Shows the selected report in the report window. If the report
has been hidden, it and its associated tab will become visible.
Mar 08 7-19
Delete Deletes the selected report. A deletion confirmation dialog is

displayed since this function cannot be undone. The deleted
report(s) will have to be regenerated if deleted in error.
Hide Hides (removes) the selected report from the report window.
The report’s associated tab is also removed.
Open Allows you to open a previously saved report file.
Print Displays a print dialog so that you can choose an appropriate

printer for report output. A list of available reports is
displayed in the window on the right side of the dialog.
For convenience in selecting which reports to print, push

buttons are provided beneath the report window. Or, you can
make your selection by clicking on the desired reports.
Current selects the report displayed in the report window.
Shown selects only the shown reports; any non-highlighted

reports indicate they are hidden. You can still select hidden
reports from this window to print.
All selects all reports, including those that may have been
hidden.
Clear clears all selections.
7-20 Mar 08
Save Saves all reports of the currently open file in a report format
using the same name as the sample file, only with an rep
extension. If you wish to specify a name and/or specific
reports to save, use the Save As push button.
Save As Saves all or specified reports from the currently open file.
The push buttons displayed on this dialog perform in the
same manner as the print dialog (explained above).
Reports can be saved in three different formats:
Report system (*.rep): Saved in a format which allows you to

reopen the file using the push button on the Report window
tool bar.
Spreadsheet (*.xls): Saved in a format which can be imported

into most spreadsheet programs.
Ascii Text (*.txt): Saved in ASCII text which can be imported

into programs accepting this type of file.
Default Style Displays the Default Style dialog so that you can specify
default parameters for report fonts and curve properties.
Fonts Contains a list of report elements for which the font can be
edited. Simply highlight the desired element and click Edit; a
font dialog is displayed so that you can specify the desired
font and attributes.
Curve The items in this group box enable you to specify a thickness
for report curves and, when using histograms, the type of fill
to apply.
Mar 08 7-21
Graph border line Enables you to specify a thickness for the border of the graph.
thickness
Load Loads the last saved defaults.
Save Saves the changes as the defaults. If you do not click Save,
the changes will apply to the current report set only. The next
reports will revert to the defaults.
Close Closes the dialog and applies the changes. If you clicked
Save, the changes become the defaults. If you did not click
Save, the changes apply to the current report only.
Close Closes the report window.
7-22 Mar 08
Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are accessed when you right-click on the tabular or graphical portion of a
report.
Tabular Reports
Resize column Displays a dialog so that you can specify the width of the
selected column (in inches).
Rename column Displays a dialog so that you can edit the name of the
selected column. Use Ctrl + Enter to insert line feeds.
Move column Allows you to move the location of the selected column to
the left or to the right.
Align column Enables you to right-align, left-align, or center the data in the
selected column.
Hide column Displays a list of the columns that have not been hidden,
enabling you to select the one you wish to hide.
Show column Displays a list of all hidden columns, enabling you to select
the one you wish to have shown again.
Column font Displays a Font dialog, allowing you to change font attributes
for the tabular data in the current report.
Mar 08 7-23
Header font Displays a Font dialog, allowing you to change font attributes
for column headers in the current report.
Edit title Allows you to edit the table title and font.
Copy table as text Enables you to copy the entire table (column headers and
data) and then insert it into another program. Columns are
tab-delimited, allowing easy alignment
Graphs
Autoscale Autoscales all axes of the graph. This function is useful for
returning to a full view after having zoomed in.
Redraw Sets axis boundaries to its original view. You can also use this
function to remove cross-hairs.
Show curve Shows any curve(s) that has been hidden. This option is
disabled (grayed) if no curves have been hidden.
Hide curve Hides (removes from view) any unwanted curve(s).
7-24 Mar 08
Edit curve Displays the Curve Properties dialog, allowing you to edit
curve properties.
Title Displays the title of the curve you are editing. You can edit
the title if desired.
Style This drop-down list contains the styles in which collected

data can be displayed.
Choices:Curve, Histogram, Points, Curve and Points
Curve group box Contains options for curves and points. You can edit the
curve interpolation, the style of curve and/or points, as well
as the pen color. The options in this group box are disabled if
Histogram is chosen in the Style drop-down list.
Histogram group box The options in this group box are enabled when you choose
Histogram as the style for collected data. The choices in the
drop-down list allow you to choose the type of fill for the
Histogram, then you can click Color to select the fill color.
Mar 08 7-25
Edit axis Displays the Axis Properties dialog, allowing you to edit axis
properties.
Edit legend Displays the Legend Properties dialog, allowing you to edit
the placement of the legend. You can also edit the font if
desired.
Edit title Displays the Title Properties dialog, allowing you to edit the
current graph’s title and font.
Copy as metafile Copies the graph and places it on the clipboard, allowing you
to paste it into other applications accepting Windows
metafiles.
Copy as text Copies the data used to generate the graph as a series of tab-
delimited columns of text.
7-26 Mar 08
Zoom Feature
A zoom feature is included with the report system so that you can zoom in to examine fine
details. To use this feature, simply hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse cursor
(drawing a box) across the area you wish to view; then release the button. The enlarged area
immediately fills the graph area. Right-click in the graph area and choose Autoscale from the
shortcut menu to return to the normal view
Axis Cross Hair
A cross-hair function is available so that you can view axis coordinates. To use this feature,
simply left-click in the desired area of the graph.
X-axis position
Point of Coordination
Y-axis position
Right-click in the graph area and choose Autoscale or Redraw from the shortcut menu to
remove cross-hair lines and return to the normal view. Alternatively, you can click outside of
the graph area.
Mar 08 7-27
Report Examples ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Report Examples
The remainder of this chapter contains samples of some of the reports that can be generated by
the ASAP 2020 Program. Most of the reports can be varied through entries on the report
options screens.
7-28 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Report Examples
Isotherm Plot
Mar 08 7-29
BET Surface Area
7-30 Mar 08
Mar 08 7-31
Freundlich Isotherm
7-32 Mar 08
Alpha-S Method
Mar 08 7-33
f-Ratio Method
7-34 Mar 08
BJH Adsorption/Desorption
Mar 08 7-35
Options Report
7-36 Mar 08
Heat of Adsorption Report
Mar 08 7-37
Micropore Reports
Horvath-Kawazoe
7-38 Mar 08
Dubinin
Mar 08 7-39
Overlay Reports
Same Type of Graph from Multiple Samples
7-40 Mar 08
Two Types of Graphs from Same Sample
Mar 08 7-41
8. OPTIONS MENU
The commands on the Options menu enable you to configure the system to your laboratory’s
requirements and establish sample defaults.
Description
Option Presentation Allows you to display the sample file dialog in Advanced,
Basic, or Restricted mode. Page 8-2.
Sample Defaults Enables you to specify default values for sample and
parameter files. Page 8-4.
Units Enables you to choose the way in which data are presented
on the screen and in printed reports. Page 8-11.
Graph Grid Lines Enables you to choose the type(s) of grid lines to show on
your report. Page 8-11.
Live Graph Enables you to choose the variable for the X-axis during
data colleciton. Page 8-12.
Parameter Files Directory Allows you to specify a location for the parameter files used
in the Basic sample file editor. Page 8-12.
Service Test Mode Enables you to perform certain troubleshooting procedures.

This option is available only under the direction of a
Micromeritics service representative. Page 8-13.
Mar 08 8-1
Option Presentation ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Option Presentation
The sample editing dialogs for the ASAP 2020 analysis program may be presented in three
modes: Restricted, Basic, and Advanced. Each format displays sample information dialogs
differently.
• Advanced: displays all parts of the sample information file in a tabbed dialog as in an
index card file. You just click on the tab of the desired parameter. This format also allows
you to switch to the Basic mode.
• Basic: displays all parts of the sample file as a single dialog. in which you select from pre-
defined parameter files. This format also allows you to switch to the Advanced mode if
editing of parameters is desired.
• Restricted: displays in the same manner as the Basic format. Certain menu options, how-
ever, become disabled and you cannot switch to the Advanced mode. You also must enter
a password to access and exit this format.
Advanced
The Advanced format presents all parts of the sample information file in a tabbed dialog. Each
tab opens its associated dialog. For example, if you are using the Advanced format and you
open or create a sample information file, the following dialog is displayed.
The Advanced format can be used to edit sample parameters and customize files.
The Advanced format can be used to edit sample parameters and customize files.
8-2 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Option Presentation
Basic
The Basic format presents the sample information file and its parameter files as a single
dialog. You also have access to all menu options. For example, if you are using the Basic
format and open or create a sample information file, the dialog is displayed in this manner.
Predefined parameter files

are selected from drop-
down lists.
The Basic format is used to quickly create sample information files using previously defined
parameter files. You also can switch easily to the Advanced format to view or edit details of
parameter files.
Restricted
The Restricted format is identical to the Basic format, except that certain options are disabled.
You also cannot switch to the Advanced format. This format is password-protected and
typically is used in laboratories where analysis conditions must remain constant, for example,
in the pharmaceutical industry.
When you select Restricted, a dialog requesting a password is displayed.
You can enter any password (up to 31 characters) to enable the Restricted mode. You must
enter the same password to exit the Restricted mode. For example, if you enter “password” to
enable the Restricted format, then you must enter “password” to exit. If you forget the
password, open the application INI file and navigate to the Private section. The current
password is shown immediately following “OptionPresentationPassword.” Make a note of the
password, exit the INI file, and enter the password where requested. Deleting the password
from the INI file will not disable the Restricted mode; you must enter the password using the
Password dialog to exit the Restricted format.
Mar 08 8-3
Sample Defaults ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Sample Defaults
Sample defaults are the values you see in the sample information editors when you create a
new sample file. This option allows you to specify the default values. This feature makes it
easy for you to apply the same conditions to many samples.
For efficiency, it is best to specify defaults for materials you most commonly analyze. You can
always edit the values in the sample file when it is created. Sample defaults can be specified
using the Basic or Advanced format.
The analysis program contains one complete default sample information file. When you select
Open, Sample information from the Main Menu, a new file with these default values is
generated. Default files for degas conditions, analysis conditions, adsorptive properties, and
report options also are included. Appendix F, Default Files and System Files lists details on
system default files.
Sample defaults can be specified using the Advanced or Basic format. The Advanced or Basic
format is chosen by selecting Options > Option presentation from the main menu.
Basic Format
When you select Sample Defaults using the Basic format, the Basic Sample Defaults dialog is
displayed.
Sequence Allows you to specify a default sequence for the sample file
name. The number you specify is incrementally sequenced
each time you create a sample file. It is the number that
appears in the File name field when you select File > Open
> Sample information.
8-4 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Sample Defaults
Sequence Use numbers, letters, or other printable characters, such as

(continued) dashes. At least three numbers must be included.
• Use up to eight characters.

• Do not use characters such as * or ?.
Sample Allows you to enter an additional identification that provides

more information than the sample file name itself.
The field on the left allows you to specify a name for the
identification label. For example, you may prefer to use Test
or Material.
The field on the right allows you to specify a format for the
sample identification.
Use numbers, letters, or other printable characters, such as

dashes.
• Use up to 20 characters for the prompt.
• Use up to 43 characters (including the $ symbol).
• Include the automatically generated file name as part of

the identification by using the $ symbol where you want
the sequence number to appear.
For example, if the sequence number is 000-001, enter

the identification as follows:
Lab #25 - $
The resulting sample identification for the first sample

information file would be:
Lab #25 - 000-001
for the second file:
Lab #25 - 000-002, and so on.
Mass Enter a value that represents the approximate mass of your

most commonly analyzed material. You can enter a more
accurate value in the sample file when the analysis is
completed.
Mar 08 8-5
Density The sample density is used when using a calculated free

space. The default value is appropriate unless you typically
use a calculated free space. This field can always be edited
in the sample file.
Sample Tube Each parameter has a drop-down list containing files

Degas Conditions included with the software, as well as any you may have
Analysis Conditions created and saved to the Parameter Files Directory.
Report Options
Choose from the list provided for each parameter the file you
wish to use as the default.
Replace All Use this push button to replace the current default values
with those from an existing sample file.
Save Saves the current definition as the defaults
Close Closes the dialog box.
Advanced Switches the sample editor to the Advanced format.
8-6 Mar 08
Advanced Format
When you select Sample Defaults while using the Advanced format, the Advanced Sample
Defaults dialog is displayed.
The defaults you specify for the parameters in the Advanced format display as the
defaults for newly created standalone parameter files
Sequence Allows you to specify a default sequence for the sample file
name. The number you specify is incrementally sequenced
each time you create a sample file. It is the number that
appears in the File name field when you select File > Open
> Sample information.
• Use numbers, letters, or other printable characters, such

as dashes. At least three numbers must be included.
• Use up to eight characters.
• Do not use characters such as * or ?.
Mar 08 8-7
Sample Allows you to enter an additional identification that provides

more information than the sample file name itself.
The field on the left allows you to specify a name for the
identification label. For example, you may prefer to use Test
or Material.
The field on the right allows you to specify a format for the
sample identification.
• Use numbers, letters, or other printable characters, such

as dashes.
• Include the automatically generated file name as part of

the identification by using the $ symbol where you want
the sequence number to appear.
For example, if the sequence number is 000-001, enter

the identification as follows:
Lab #25 - $
The resulting sample identification for the first sample

information file would be:
Lab #25 - 000-001
for the second file:
Lab #25 - 000-002, and so on.
Operator These fields contain the name (or other identification) of the
Submitter operator and submitter.
The fields on the left can be edited to display a different label

if desired.
8-8 Mar 08
Operator The fields on the right allow you to specify default names or
Submitter titles.
(continued) • Include the automatically generated file number as part

of the identification by using the symbol $ where you
want the sequence number to appear. Refer to the exam-
ple in the previous section.
• Omit either (or both) item entirely from the sample infor-
mation file by selecting Omit.
Mass Enter a value that represents the approximate mass of your

most commonly analyzed material. You can enter a more
accurate value in the sample file when the analysis is
completed.
Density Enter a default density. If there is a material you analyze quite

often, you may wish to use its default in this field. This value
can be edited in the sample information file.
Type of Data Choose whether you wish to enter data or have it collected
automatically by the system.
User Parameters The fields in this group box are used primarily for SPC (Sta-
tistical Process Control) reporting. They are used to specify
characteristics of the sample or its manufacturing process.
Once specified, these parameters display on the sample edi-

tor and in the SPC Sample Options dialog (accessed through
the SPC Report Options dialog).
These fields can also be used to record analysis conditions or

sample information so that it can be printed on the Summary
report.
Select Omit if you do not wish to use these fields; this will
prevent them from displaying on the sample information dia-
log.
Comments Use this window to enter sample characteristics, analysis

conditions, etc. Anything you type in this window is printed
in the report header.
Mar 08 8-9
Add Log Entry Allows you to enter comments about the sample or its
analysis conditions. Anything you enter using this option
appears in the Instrument Log Report; it does not display in
the report header.
Replace All Use this push button to replace the current default values with
those from an existing sample file.
Save Saves the current definition as the defaults
Basic Switches the sample editor to the Basic format.
8-10 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Units
Units
This menu command displays the Units Selections dialog which allows you to choose the
manner in which to display data on reports.
Graph Grid Lines

Graph Grid Lines enables you to choose the type(s) of grid lines to show on your reports; the
Graph Grid Lines dialog is displayed.
X-Axis Enables you to choose Major and/or Minor lines to

Y-Axis display in printed reports for the Logarithmic and Linear
scales.
If you deselect these items (remove the check marks),

your report will not display grid lines.
Grid Line Style Allows you to choose the type of grid line to display if
grid lines are being shown.
Mar 08 8-11
Live Graph ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Live Graph
This option enables you to choose the variable for the x-axis during data collection. You can
also choose to correct for thermal transpiration which should always be selected for micropore
analyses (refer to page 5-34 for additional information on thermal transpiration).
Parameter Files Directory
This option allows you to specify a location for the predefined Analysis conditions, Degas
conditions, Adsorptive properties, and Report options files displayed in the drop-down lists on
the Basic Sample Information dialog. The current directory is displayed above the drives/
directory window.
The default directory is params and includes several parameter files supplied with the analysis
program. If you specify a different directory, these files will not be included in the drop-down
lists unless you copy (or move) them to the new directory.
If you wish to continue using the params directory for parameter files, be sure to save any files
you create to this directory(s).
8-12 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Service Test Mode
Service Test Mode
Various service tests are included in the ASAP 2020 operating program. These tests can be
performed only with the assistance of a trained Micromeritics service representative. When
you select Service Test Mode from the Options menu, a dialog box prompting you to enter a
password is displayed. This password is coded to change on a regular basis and is known only
by your service representative. You will not be able to perform these tests without his
guidance.
Mar 08 8-13
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Troubleshooting
9. TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
The ASAP 2020 system has been designed to provide efficient and continuous service.
However, to get the best results over the longest period of time, certain maintenance
procedures must be followed. This chapter includes troubleshooting information,
recommended preventive maintenance procedures, and routine maintenance procedures.
Troubleshooting
Most operational problems are caused by leaks (commonly around the sample tube O-ring at
the analysis port), sample weighing errors, use of too much analysis bath fluid in the Dewar at
the start of an analysis, or entry of incorrect system volume for analysis. Always check these
first when expected analysis results are not obtained. Some common operational problems,
which are not indicated on the video monitor screen, and their respective causes and solutions
are provided in the following table.
What Happened Why What To Do
Analysis Dewar cannot Elevator that moves dewar stuck Check for possible obstruction to
be raised (or lowered). in up position, down position, or elevator movement.
somewhere in between.
Vacuum pump gurgles Sample tube or cold trap tube Tighten fitting. Replace O-ring.
continuously. O-ring or fitting loose.
Sample tube cracked. Replace with new sample tube.
No sample tube loaded on a Install plug or empty sample

selected port. tube.
Gas inlet valve open while With manual control enabled, use
vacuum valve open. the instrument schematic to close
gas inlet valve.
Vacuum gauge shows Vacuum pump oil is low, causing Add or change vacuum pump oil.
reading above 20 ineffective evacuation. Be sure to add oil to proper level
µmHg, even after according to indicator window on
extended pumping the pump.
through unrestricted
valve with analysis or
degas ports closed.
Mar 08 9-1
Troubleshooting ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
What Happened Why What To Do
Vacuum gauge shows Cold trap obstructed by Clean the cold trap tubes. Refer
reading above 20 condensation. to Cleaning the Cold Trap
µmHg, even after Tubes on page 9-14.
extended pumping
through unrestricted Filter in port being used is dirty. Replace filter in port. Refer to
valve with analysis or Replacing the Port Filters on
degas ports closed. page 9-6.
(continued)
Leak in vacuum plumbing. Check and tighten all connections
in vacuum plumbing, including
cold traps.
Vacuum pump turned off or Check pump power plug and

unplugged. power switch.
The alumina in the oil vapor trap Replace or dry the alumina. Refer
is holding moisture. to Replacing the Alumina in the
Oil Vapor Traps on page 9-11.
Analysis valves cannot Circuit opened by circuit breaker. Reset breaker (depress breaker
be operated. button) located on the right side
of the instrument near (page 3-4
shows location). If it does not
stay in or if it continues to trip,
contact appropriate service
personnel.
Cable from computer to the Make sure the cable is seated

instrument is loose. properly.
9-2 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance
The table below lists the preventive maintenance procedures you should perform to keep your
analyzer operating at peak performance. Instructions for each procedure follow the table.
Micromeritics recommends that you perform these procedures as indicated, as well as by one
of our service representatives every 12 months.
Maintenance Required Frequency
Clean the analyzer, page 9-18 As required or every 6 months
Lubricate elevator screw, page 9-4 As required or every 6 months
Check analysis port Dewar, page 9-4 Weekly
Replace sample tube O-ring, page 9-5 As required or every 3 months
Replace port filters, page 9-6 Every 30 days
Replace vacuum pump exhaust filter*, page 9-7 Annually (Heavy use may require more
frequent maintenance.)
Inspect and change vacuum pump fluid*, page 9-9 As required or every 3 months
Replace alumina in oil vapor traps*, page 9-11 As required or every 3 months
(if installed)
Replace diaphragm in vacuum pump (oil-free pump Every 12 months

only)**
Clean cold trap tubes, page 9-14 As required or every 3 months
Calibrate manifold temperature sensor, page 9-16 Every 12 months
Calibrate system volume Every 12 months
Check analyzer outgassing rate Every 6 months
Test analyzer for leaks, page D-1 As required or every 12 months
*Oil-based vacuum pumps only.

**After about 12 to 18 months of operation, the diaphragm in the pump will wear out and
become completely inoperable. To prevent any instrument downtime due to an inoperable
pump, it is recommended that you have the diaphragm replaced by a Micromeritics Service
Representative every 12 months.
Mar 08 9-3
Preventive Maintenance ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Lubricating the Elevator Screw
Apply a light coat of lithium grease to the elevator screw, accessed from the rear of the
instrument, as needed.
Checking the Analysis Port Dewar
When handling Dewars, be sure to observe the Dewar precautions outlined in

Installing Dewars in Chapter 3.
Ice and suspended frost particles may accumulate in the bottom of the analysis port Dewar.
Particles or deposits exceeding 1/4 in. (0.64 cm) in depth may jam between the bottom of the
sample tube and the bottom of the Dewar, causing the Dewar not to raise fully. Accumulations
of fine particles impede liquid nitrogen circulation around the bottom of the sample tube. This
causes the sample temperature to be slightly higher which, in turn, can cause pore volume
measurement errors in those samples exhibiting high isotherm slope above 0.97 relative
pressure. Accumulated ice is likely to melt and form a pool of water in the Dewar if all liquid
nitrogen evaporates. The water must be removed; otherwise it will solidify when liquid
nitrogen is added and could press on the bottom of the sample tube causing breakage.
To ensure problems do not develop due to ice accumulation, check the Dewar after each use.
Clean on a weekly basis as follows:
1. Lift out the entire analysis port Dewar.
2. Pour out liquid nitrogen into an appropriate cryogenic container.
Do not pour liquid nitrogen directly into a sink. Doing so may cause drain pipes
to burst.
3. Rinse the Dewar with warm water to melt any ice accumulation which may remain in the
Dewar, then dry thoroughly.
4. Replace the Dewar.
9-4 Mar 08
Replacing the Sample Tube O-ring
It is important to maintain a vacuum-tight seal near the top of the sample tube stem. If an O-
ring becomes worn or cracked, it does not provide a good seal and will need to be replaced.
This procedure applies to both degas and analysis ports.
Before removing (or installing) a sample tube, ensure that the port valve is
closed. Observe the instrument schematic or degas schematic to verify valve
status.
To replace the O-ring:
1. Holding the sample tube firmly with one hand, loosen the sample tube connector nut by
turning counterclockwise.
Be careful not to let the sample tube connector nut drop onto the bottom of the
tube as it may break the tube.
Sample Connector
O-ring
Ferrule
Sample Tube
Connector Nut
Sample Tube
2. Carefully pull the sample tube down until it is free from the port. You may have to grasp
the sample tube with both hands.
3. Remove the O-ring from the top of the sample tube and replace it with a new one.
If the O-ring remains inside the sample port, you may use a pair of tweezers or
needle-nose pliers to remove it.
Mar 08 9-5
4. After the new O-ring is in place, insert the sample tube back into the sample port until it is
fully seated.
5. Slide the sample tube connector nut up the tube (the ferrule and O-ring will move along
with the connector nut). Then, turning clockwise, hand-tighten the connector nut to the
sample connector.
Replacing the Port Filters
A porous metal filter is located in the analysis port and in each degas port of the analyzer. If a
filter on a degas port is contaminated, the contaminant may adsorb atmospheric gases when
the port is not plugged (with either a sample tube or plug), resulting in extended degassing
time for samples on that port. Using a contaminated filter on the analysis port may extend the
time required to achieve a vacuum at that port. More importantly, the contaminant may adsorb
or desorb during analysis, affecting the analysis results. A contaminated filter on the analysis
port may be detected by a leak test (if the contaminant outgasses) or by a free space reading
much lower than normal.
Perform the following steps to replace the filters:
Analysis Port
1. Make sure the Dewar and sample tube (or plug) are removed. Make sure the analysis port
(sample valve) is closed.
2. Using a wrench, remove the sample tube fitting from the manifold connector and remove
the filter and O-ring.
O-ring
Filter
Sample Tube Fitting
9-6 Mar 08
3. Replace the filter and the O-ring. Carefully reassemble the sample tube fitting, filter, O-
ring and manifold connector, and tighten by hand. Then tighten with a wrench to prevent
leaks when evacuated.
To avoid analysis problems, the new filter and O-ring must be clean. Do not
touch them with bare hands.
Degas Port
1. Using a wrench, remove the degas port fitting and remove the filter and O-ring.
2. Replace the filter and the O-ring. Carefully reassemble the sample tube fitting, filter, O-
ring and manifold connector, and tighten by hand. Then tighten with the wrenches to
prevent leaks when evacuated.
To avoid degassing problems, the new filter and O-ring must be clean. Do not
tough them with bare hands.
Replacing the Vacuum Pump Exhaust Filter
This procedure does not apply, and is not required, for dry vacuum pumps.
The gases used by the ASAP 2020 are exhausted by vacuum pumps. An exhaust filter is
installed on the exhaust port of each vacuum pump. The filter minimizes the release of oil
vapor and should be replaced when it becomes so saturated with oil that it is ineffective.
Exhaust filters are used on the vacuum pump to minimize the release of oil
vapors. The gases used are diluted substantially upon being released form the
vacuum pumps. However, it may be desirable in some locations to provide a
fume hood for added protection from hazardous gases and vapors released into
the work area.
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, remove the screws from the vacuum pump panel on the
front of the analyzer, then remove the panel to access the pump.
Mar 08 9-7
2. Loosen the wing nut of the vacuum clamp at the vacuum pump exhaust port. Swing the
clamp fastening screw away from the exhaust port. Open the clamp to remove it from the
port.
Filter
Clamp
3. Make sure the dust cover has been removed. Lift the exhaust filter from the exhaust port
and discard it. Install a new filter on the exhaust port and push the filter against the O-ring.
4. Open the clamp and place it around the flange of the exhaust port and the flange of the
exhaust filter. Swing the clamp fastening screw toward the exhaust port until it fits into the
slot in the other half of the clamp. Tighten the wing nut.
5. Reinstall the vacuum pump panel.
9-8 Mar 08
Inspecting and Changing Vacuum Pump Fluid
This procedure does not apply, and is not required, for dry vacuum pumps.
The fluid in the vacuum pump should be changed every three months or when the efficiency of
the vacuum pump declines (requiring increased time to reach vacuum levels). The fluid can
first be inspected to determine if a change is necessary.
Use oil supplied by Micromeritics, or refer to the manual for the vacuum pump for other
acceptable oils.
Inspecting Fluid
Inspect the fluid as follows:
1. Remove the vacuum pump panel (located on the left front side of the analyzer).
2. View the vacuum pump fluid through the oil level indicator window. Fluid in good
condition is clean, clear or light in color, and transparent. If the color of the fluid is
darkened, the fluid should be changed.
Changing Fluid
Change the fluid as follows:
1. Place the analyzer ON/OFF switch in the OFF position.
If the high vacuum pump is installed, wait for it to stop completely (approximately
10 minutes).
2. Remove the vacuum pump panel (if not already removed).
3. Disconnect the vacuum pump power cord from its power source.
Always drain the vacuum pump while the pump is warm and switched off
(unplugged).
4. Disconnect the vacuum pump hose from the top of the vacuum pump.
5. Grasp the handle on top of the vacuum pump and lift it out of the analyzer; place the
vacuum pump on a work table.
Mar 08 9-9
6. Drain the used oil:
a. Place a waste container under the drain fitting.
b. Remove the plug from the drain spout.
c. Allow the oil to drain into the waste container.
Badly contaminated fluid requires flushing of the pump once or twice with fresh
fluid to wash out contaminants.
d. Replace the drain plug.
7. Remove the Oil-fill plug; add fresh fluid to the oil-fill port until the level is midway
between the two indicator lines.
Adding fluid above the midway position on the fluid level indicator may cause
fluid to splash into the vacuum hoses and leak from the internal vacuum pump.
OIl-Fill Plug
Indicator Lines
Oil-Level Indicator
Window
8. Check the washer or O-ring used at the oil-filling port; replace if necessary. Replace the
oil-fill plug.
9. Place the vacuum pump back into the analyzer onto the drip tray and reconnect the
vacuum pump hose.
10. Reconnect the vacuum pump power cord.
11. Replace the vacuum pump panel.
12. Place the analyzer ON/OFF switch in the ON position. The pump must run a few hours (or
overnight) to eliminate air and moisture from the fresh fluid and to produce efficient
vacuum operations.
9-10 Mar 08
Replacing the Alumina in the Oil Vapor Traps
The activated alumina in the oil vapor traps becomes saturated during use. The alumina should
be replaced if any of the following conditions exist:
• The alumina has been used for a three-month period.

• Oil has accumulated in the cold trap.
• Most of the alumina pellets are no longer white.
When you replace the alumina, you may also need to change the vacuum pump
oil if the interval between changes of alumina has been short.
Do not perform the following procedure on used alumina. The resultant oil
vapors may cause a fire or an explosion.
Perform the following steps to replace the alumina:
1. Remove the vacuum pump panel.
2. Turn off power to the vacuum pump
3. Prepare fresh alumina as follows:
a. Heat an oven between 250 °C and 350 °C.
b. Pour about 180 grams of alumina into a glass or metal container for each trap
(approximately 250 mL if a graduated beaker is used). Place the container in the
oven.
c. Bake the alumina for two hours; turn off the oven.
d. Allow the alumina to cool in the oven before pouring it into the traps.
4. Display the Instrument Schematic and select Enable Manual Mode.
5. Open the vacuum valve (P1 on analysis schematic and D5 on degas schematic) and an
inlet valve (nitrogen or helium) until the pressure stabilizes around atmospheric pressure.
Then, close all valves. This step fills the vacuum section before disconnecting.
Mar 08 9-11
6. Remove the traps by opening both vacuum clamps and separating the trap from the
vacuum pump and hose connections.
Hose
Hose Fitting
Centering Ring
Clamp
Oil Vapor Trap
Clamp
Centering Ring
Intake
7. Remove one end fitting from each trap body.
End Fitting
O-ring
Body
O-ring
End Fitting
8. Remove the used alumina from the trap body and dispose of it in an appropriate manner.
9-12 Mar 08
9. If the trap body interior appears oily or dirty, wash it with isopropyl alcohol or ethyl
alcohol and dry it thoroughly.
Exposure of the trap body to oil vapor may cause small cracks on the inside
surface of the trap body. Under normal circumstances, these cracks will not
cause problems or leaks.
Ensure adequate ventilation when using solvents for cleaning purposes.
10. Pour the new activated alumina pellets into each trap until they are level with the tops of
the trap bodies.
Fill Level
11. Screw the end fittings back onto the trap bodies and tighten securely by hand.
12. Replace the traps on the vacuum pump.
13. Reconnect the hose.
14. Turn on power to the vacuum pump.
15. Replace the vacuum pump access panel.
Mar 08 9-13
Cleaning the Cold Trap Tubes
Oil vapor from the vacuum pumps accumulates in the cold trap. Clean the tubes as follows:
If the high vacuum pump is installed, wait for it to completely stop

(approximately 10 minutes).
1. Remove the vacuum pump panel.
2. Disconnect the vacuum pump power cord from its power source.
3. Display the [unit] Instrument Schematic and select Enable Manual Control.
4. Open analysis valves in the following order: P1, PS, 5, 7, and 1. Allow the pressure to
stabilize until around atmospheric. Then, close the valves in the same order as they were
opened. This step fills the analysis vacuum section before disconnecting.
5. Display the Degas Instrument Schematic and select Enable Manual Control.
6. Open degas valves in the following order: D5 and D7. Allow the pressure to stabilize until
around atmospheric. Then, close valve D7 and D5. This step fills the degas vacuum
section before disconnecting.
7. Remove the connector nut from the glass tube and inspect the O-ring. Replace the O-ring
if it is cracked or worn.
O-ring
Connector Nut
8. Carefully slide the glass tube down over the metal tube and remove the glass tube.
9. Rinse the tube with acetone; then dry it.
9-14 Mar 08
10. Reinstall the cold trap tube. Make sure the O-rings are in place.
11. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the other cold trap.
12. Reconnect the vacuum pump power cord
13. Replace the vacuum pump access panel.
Mar 08 9-15
Calibrating the Manifold Temperature Sensor
You should calibrate the manifold temperature on an annual basis. This allows you to correct
for any changes in the manifold temperature sensor that occur with time.
You will need a small diameter probe, such as a 1/16-in. (1.5-mm) thermocouple to calibrate
the manifold temperature sensor.
1. Insert the thermocouple probe into the opening located to the left of the sample port
connector.
Manifold Probe Hole (to the left of the analysis port)
2. Move the thermocouple back and forth until you locate the small opening on the underside
of the manifold. Push the thermocouple through the white insulation into the opening until
the thermocouple stops.
You may have to scrape the insulation to locate the opening on the underside of
the manifold.
3. Allow the temperature gauge reading to stabilize.
4. Select Unit > Calibration > Temperature; the Calibrate Manifold Temperature dialog is
displayed.
9-16 Mar 08
5. Enter the manifold temperature indicated on the reference temperature gauge. Click OK to
store the new value.
6. Remove the thermocouple probe.
Testing the Analyzer for Leaks
Refer to Appendix D, page D-1 for instructions on testing the ASAP 2020 for leaks.
Mar 08 9-17
Routine Maintenance ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Routine Maintenance
The procedures in this section are performed as needed.
Cleaning the Analyzer
The ASAP 2020 should be cleaned every six months, or sooner if required.
Clean the outside casing of the analyzer (except for the shields) with a clean cloth dampened
with isopropyl alcohol (IPA), a mild detergent in water, or a 3% hydrogen peroxide solution. It
is not necessary to remove any switches or screws to clean the outside casing. Use only a mild
detergent in water to clean the shields.
Use only a mild detergent in water to clean the shields. Do not use isopropyl
alcohol. Isopropyl alcohol could damage the surface of the shield.
9-18 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Routine Maintenance
Calibrating the Pressure Offset
When operating the system in manual mode, Calibration > Pressure Zero enables you to
evacuate the manifold and zero all the transducers. Your system may contain up to three
transducers.
The system automatically zeros the transducers before an analysis begins. Therefore, you do
not need to use this feature unless you are operating the system in manual mode.
Perform the following steps to calibrate the pressure gauge:
1. Select Unit > Calibration > Pressure Zero; the Calibrate Pressure Offset dialog is
displayed
.
2. Click Start to evacuate the manifold and zero the pressure gauge(s).
3. When the calibration is complete, click OK to close the dialog.
You may cancel a calibration at any time by selecting Cancel. If you cancel a
calibration, no new calibration data are saved.
Mar 08 9-19
Routine Maintenance ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Calibrating the Pressure Scale
Calibration > Pressure Scale allows the software to adjust the gain of the selected transducer
to match a reference standard.
1. Attach a reference pressure gauge to the sample port of the analyzer.
2. With manual control enabled:
a. Dose the manifold with helium or nitrogen to 760 mmHg.
b. Open the sample port to expose the reference pressure gauge to the same pressure as
the analyzer’s transducer.
3. Select Unit > Calibration > Pressure Scale; the Calibrate Pressure Scale dialog is
displayed.
4. Select Match to entered pressure.
5. Enter the pressure reported by the reference pressure gauge, then click OK.
6. Close the sample port and evacuate the manifold.
7. Remove the reference pressure gauge.
9-20 Mar 08
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Analysis System Components and Accessories
10. ORDERING INFORMATION
The ASAP2020 system components and accessories can be ordered using one of the following
methods:
• Call our Customer Service Department at (770) 662-3636

• Access our web site at www.micromeritics.com
• Contact your local sales representative
When ordering, please use the information provided in this chapter to place your order:
Analysis System Components and Accessories
Part Number Item and Description
Peripheral Accessories
060-00030-00 FlowPrep 060, degasses up to six samples at up to 400 ºC with
flowing gas.
061-00030-00 VacPrep 061, degasses up to six samples at up to 400 ºC with either

flowing gas or by evacuation (evacuation requires a vacuum pump).
021-00000-00 Model 021 LN2 transfer system, for easy filling of sample Dewars;
includes 47-L Dewar, mobile platform, and pump with 100-cm
discharge line
202-33050-00 Water vapor option; allows water vapor adsorption studies
System Components
202-25849-00 Dewar, 3 liter, cold trap
202-25850-00 Dewar, 3 liter, analysis
200-25928-00 Dewar, 1 liter, analysis (wide mouth)
240-25901-00 Dewar depth gauge
202-31708-00 Dewar cover, cold trap
202-31707-00 Dewar cover, analysis
200-25929-00 Dewar stopper, sample port, 1-liter Dewar
004-25103-00 Ferrule, front, Teflon 1/4 in.
004-25104-00 Ferrule, rear, Nylon 1/4 in.
290-25846-00 Copper tube, for gas inlet, 1/8-in. diameter
Jan 09 10-1
Analysis System Components and Accessories ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
004-25549-00 Reducer, 1/8-in. tube x 1/4-in. tube, accepts 1/8-in. tube, connects to
1/4-in. swage fittings
004-62230-35 Gas pressure regulator, CGA 350 fitting (CO, H2), 30 psig
004-62230-54 Gas pressure regulator, CGA 540 fitting (O2), 30 psig
004-62230-32 Gas pressure regulator, CGA 320 fitting (CO2), 30 psig
004-33601-00 Expansion Kit; adds an additional outlet to the gas regulator, includes
fittings and instructions
004-33602-00 Pressure Relief Kit; prevents excessive gas pressure in the event of
regulator failure (not to be used with noxious gases)
003-26043-00 Heating mantle with type K thermocouple, 450 ºC maximum, 24 V
003-26045-00 Heating mantle with type K thermocouple, 450 ºC maximum, 24 V,

side-laced to accommodate monolithic and nonstandard sample tubes
230-25808-00 Heating mantle clip
202-42801-00 Operator’s manual
004-25006-00 O-ring, size 006, Buna-N, for Po tube
004-16821-00 Reference material, high surface area
004-16816-00 Reference material, low surface area (krypton)
004-16843-00 Reference material, micropore, 13X
004-16844-00 Reference material, micropore, Y-zeolite
004-54609-00 Sample tube brush
240-25853-00 Sample tube funnel
240-14855-00 Sample tube rack
240-32805-00 Sample tube support, assists sample weighing
200-25840-00 Saturation pressure tube, includes isothermal jacket
250-25608-00 Valve gasket, Kel-F, for analysis manifold
250-25627-00 Valve plunger, Buna-N seal, for analysis manifold
201-22600-00 Valve spring, for Buna-N plunger, for analysis manifold
004-25459-00 Valve plunger, Kalrez seal, for analysis manifold
250-25602-00 Valve spring, for Kalrez plunger, for analysis manifold
10-2 Jan 09
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Analysis System Components and Accessories
Vacuum System Components

062-00100-00 Vacuum forepump, dry, for systems with high-vacuum option, 115/
230 VAC
004-62109-01 Service kit, for dry forepump
062-00001-11 Vacuum pump, oil-sealed, with built-in anti-suckback valve, 100/120

VAC; includes hose kit and alumina oil vapor trap
062-00001-23 Vacuum pump, oil-sealed, with built-in anti-suckback valve, 220/240

VAC; includes hose kit and alumina oil vapor trap
062-33002-00 Activated alumina oil vapor trap, for one vacuum pump
004-16003-01 Vacuum pump oil, 1 liter
200-25879-00 Vacuum pump oil funnel
004-27040-00 Vacuum pump exhaust filter
004-16830-00 Activated alumina, 500 grams, for oil vapor trap
004-25652-00 O-ring, size 217, for oil vapor trap
Software
202-33021-00 Rate of Adsorption Program; includes software and operator’s
manual. This program allows you to measure the rate at which gas is
adsorbed by the sample.
202-33024-00 DataMaster; includes software and operator’s manual. This program

allows you to generate and manipulate data on a computer other than
the one controlling the analyzer.
202-33025-00 Isotherm Cycling; allows you perform up to 500 adsorption/

desorption cycles over a user-defined range. Includes software and
operating instructions
202-33001-00 Software package, ASAP 2020 physisorption; includes current

version of software and operator’s manual
202-33011-00 Software package, CFR Part 11 Confirm, includes current version of

software and operator’s manual
Jan 09 10-3
Sample Tubes and Components ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
Sample Tubes and Components
A C
B F
D E G
J
K L
I
N Q T V
P S
R U
O

004-25466-00 A O-ring, size 010, Buna-N, for 1/4-in. sample tube
004-25465-00 O-ring, size 010, Kalrez, for 1/4-in. sample tube
004-25022-00 B O-ring, size 012, Buna-N, for 3/8-in. sample tube
260-25891-00 C Opener, seal frit, for 1/2-in. sample tube
240-25803-00 D Ferrule, 1/4 in.
240-25802-00 E Ferrule, 3/8 in.
004-25044-00 F O-ring, size 013, Buna-N, for 1/2-in. sample tube
260-25843-00 G Ferrule, 1/2 in.
300-25824-00 H Nut, sample tube
004-32604-00 I Cap (stopper) for 1/4-in. sample tube (not shown)
004-32004-00 J Stopper, for 3/8-in. sample tubes
240-32000-00 K Stopper, for 1/2-in. sample tube
260-25890-00 L Seal Frit with built-in check valve for air-sensitive samples
202-25901-00 N Isothermal jacket, 1/4 in.
10-4 Jan 09
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Cold Trap Tubes and Components

240-61001-00 O Sample tube, 1/4 in.
240-61014-00 P Volume displacement insert, 1/4 in.
202-25902-00 Q Isothermal jacket, 3/8 in.
240-61002-00 R Sample tube, 3/8 in.
240-61015-00 S Volume displacement insert, 3/8 in.
202-25903-00 T Isothermal jacket, 1/2-in. sample tube
240-61003-00 U Sample tube, 1/2 in.
240-61016-00 V Volume displacement insert, 1/2 in.
Cold Trap Tubes and Components

004-25469-00 A O-ring, Buna-N, size 014
004-25979-00 B Nut, cold trap
004-61063-00 C Tube, 1/2-in. OD stem, cold trap
Jan 09 10-5
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix A
A. FORMS
This appendix contains the following form:
• Sample Data Worksheet
Copy and use this form as needed.
Mar 08 A-1
ASAP Series Sample Data Worksheet
This form is provided to assist you in obtaining an accurate sample mass for report calculations. You may
use the After Degas value (Step 5) or the After Analysis value (Step 7), provided they are close to the
same.
Sample tube:_____________________ Sample: _______________________________
Before Degas:
1. Mass of empty sample tube ________ (g)
2. Mass of sample tube plus sample ________ (g)
3. Mass of sample (Step 2) – (Step 1) ________ (g)
After Degas:
4. Mass of sample tube plus sample ________ (g)
After Analysis:
6. Mass of sample tube plus sample (g) ________ (g)
Compare the sample mass obtained after analysis (Step 7) with the sample mass after degas (Step 5).
These two values should be close in range. If a significant difference is noted, analysis problems may
exist or the sample may have been improperly degassed.
Appendix B ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
B. ERROR MESSAGES
Error messages are listed numerically. If the Action response instructs you to contact your
service representative, record the error message and make backup copies of any files involved
in the operation.
The 1000-series error messages (used primarily for software testing) are not
included in this appendix. These errors should not occur during normal operation.
If you receive a 1000 series error message or an error message not listed in this
appendix: record the error message, make backup copies of any files involved,
then contact your service representative.
2200 and 2400 Series
2201- Cannot execute report subsystem.
Cause: Start Report failed to execute the report subsystem (which is a separate
process).
Action: Restart the computer. If the problem persists, reinstall the application
(this will not affect any of your sample files). If the problem continues,
contact a Micromeritics service representative.
2401- FATAL ERROR: (error message).
Cause: An internal processing and/or hardware error has occurred.
Action: Contact your service representative if you continue to receive this error
message.
2430- Error accessing file (file name), error code = (number).
Cause A: A computer or network problem occurred.
Action A: Check the performance of your computer devices or network.
Cause B: A software error occurred when the file was accessed.
Action B: Contact your service representative.
Mar 08 B-1
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix B
2431- Error writing file (file name), error code = (number).
Cause: The hard disk does not have enough space left to perform the opera-
tion.
Action: Copy files not used regularly from the hard disk to a diskette, CD, or
network directory, delete them from the hard disk, and then try the
operation again.
2432- Invalid response from MMI ‘FILE_READ’ request.
message.
2433- New entries have been found in this directory. Refresh the directory
information?
Cause: Several ASAP 2020 files (sample information, analysis conditions,

adsorptive properties, or report options) have been added to this direc-
tory by some function other than the ASAP 2020 program.
Action: Select Yes to update the directory information with data from each new
file. This operation may take a minute.
Select No if you do not want to spend the time updating the directory
information. This option may be feasible if a large number of files have
been copied into the directory and you know the name of the file you
wish to access.
2434- File (file name) — Subset # (number) wrote wrong amount of data.
message.
B-2 Mar 08
2436- Path specification (path name) is invalid.
Cause: You entered an invalid path name and/or extension.
Action: Type a valid path name (including the proper extension) and press
Enter.
2437- File (file name) does not exist.
Cause: You entered a file specification that does not exist.
Action: Enter an existing file specification or select a file name from the list
box.
2438- Disk drive (letter): is inaccessible.
Cause: You selected a disk drive that is not presently accessible.
Action: Ensure that the disk is not write-protected.
2439- Could not register file.

2440- Subset not found.
2441- Seek within file failed.
2442- Bad header in subset file.
2443- Subset owner denied access.
2444- Not a valid file format.
2445- Subset wrote the wrong amount of data.
2446- Error reading data.
2447- Error writing data.
Cause: An unexpected error occurred when you tried to access a data file.
Action: Contact your service representative.
2448- File directory (path name) is invalid. Resetting to the installation directory.
Cause: A working directory specified in the .INI file is invalid. The directory
may have been deleted or moved to a different location.
Action: The installation directory will be substituted. The next time you open a
file, use the Directories: list to move to the correct directory.
Mar 08 B-3
2449- This field does not contain a valid file specification.
Cause: You entered an invalid file name.
Action: See the description of file naming conventions in your DOS or Win-
dows manual and re-enter the name.
2450- Sample Defaults may not be edited while this operation is in progress. Do you
wish to save and close the Sample Defaults edit session?
Cause: You are in the process of initiating an automatic analysis (an analysis in
which sample files are created using the defaults) while editing the
defaults.
Action: Finish your edit session of the defaults and close the dialog. Then
restart the automatic analysis.
2452- Attempt to write MICATTR.DIR in read only mode. (file name)

2453- Attempt to append MICATTR.DIR in read only mode. (file name)
Cause: The Read-Only attribute is turned on in the application’s

MICATTR.DIR file (this file exists in each folder containing sample or
parameter files).
Action: Use Windows Explorer to access the folder containing the

MICATTR.DIR file and disable the Read-Only option.
2454- Too many selections for a print-to-file operation. Only the first (number) selec-
tions will be processed. Please reselect the remainder.
2455- Too many selections for an export-to-file operation. Only the first (number)
selections will be processed. Please reselect the remainder.
Cause: You selected too many files for this operation.
Action: Select only the number of files specified in the message.
B-4 Mar 08
2456- Insufficient file handles available. Application cannot continue.
Cause: You have more than 50 files open at the same time.
Action: Refer to the manual for your operating system and set the limit for
open files to 50 or greater.
2457- Results cannot be displayed. More than (number) windows are currently dis-
playing or printing results.
Cause: You have too many windows open in the application.
Action: Close some of the open windows.
2458- An instrument is performing a critical operation. Wait a few moments before

exiting the application.
Cause: You attempted to exit the application while the analyzer is performing
a critical operation. This operation must be completed before the appli-
cation can be stopped.
Action: Wait a few minutes before attempting to exit the application again.
2459- An instrument is busy. A delay in restarting this application could result in loss
of new data. Continue with program Exit?
Cause: You attempted to exit the application while the analyzer was perform-
ing an operation.
Action: Rather than exiting the application you may choose to minimize it.
Mar 08 B-5
2460- Fatal Communications error on (unit n).
Cause: Repeated attempts to maintain communication with the analyzer have

failed.
Action: Check the communications cable connecting the analyzer to the com-
puter. Confirm that the analyzer is turned on and that the status light is
not blinking.
If these checks are okay, exit the analysis program and then restart the
application. If this error persists, contact your service representative.
2461- No instruments are in operation. This application will unconditionally

terminate.
Cause: At least one analyzer must be active for the application to operate. The
initialization of the analyzers configured with the Setup program has
failed. The application stops.
Action A: Usually this message is preceded by another message giving the reason
for the analyzer’s failure to initialize. See the instructions for that mes-
sage.
Action B: Check the cable connection between the analyzer and the computer.
Verify that the analyzer has the power switch in the ON position and
that the light on the front panel is illuminated. If the application con-
tinues to fail in its attempts to initialize the analyzer, contact your ser-
vice representative.
2471- Unit n - S/N; nn has an invalid communications port specified. It cannot be

initialized.
Cause: The communications port specified for this analyzer during installation
(or configuration) is invalid.
Action: Use the setup program to change the analyzer configuration.
B-6 Mar 08
2474- (Unit n) Communications port COM (port number) specified in the program con-
trol files is already in use. Unit cannot initialize.
Cause: The communications port assigned to the indicated unit is in use by

another program.
Action: End the program using the busy port or use the Setup program to
change the communications port assigned to this program.
2475- (Unit n) Communications port COM (port number) specified in the program con-
trol files cannot be accessed. Unit cannot initialize.
Cause: The operating system has prevented the application from accessing the
communications port.
Action: Review the hardware configuration of the computer, ensure that no

other application is using the port. Contact your service representative
if you continue to receive this error message.
2476- Unit startup failed. Cannot initialize the communications port.
Cause: The communications port specified during installation is invalid.
Action: Use the setup program to change the analyzer configuration. Contact
your service representative if you continue to receive this error mes-
sage.
2477- (Unit n; Serial nn) did not properly initialize.
Cause: The software was unable to initialize the analyzer.
Action A: Run the Setup program and ensure that a valid port is specified; if not,
specify a valid one when prompted.
Action B: Reinstall the software, then restart application.
Action C: Contact your Micromeritics service representative if you continue to

get this message.
Mar 08 B-7
2478- Error copying sequential data segment.
Cause: An internal processing and/or hardware error occurred while accessing

a portion of a sample file.
Action: Confirm that the media being accessed does not contain errors; for
example, you may wish to use a utility such as ScanDisk. Contact your
service representative if you continue to receive this error message.
2479- (Unit n; Serial nn) The instrument is busy performing an operation of which this
application is unaware. Do you want to cancel? (Yes, No)
Cause: During initialization of the application, the status of the analyzer was
found to be in a different state than expected.
Action: Click Yes to cancel the operation in process, allowing the analyzer to
reset and continue with initialization.
Click No to cancel the initialization process.
If you continue to get this message, verify that files in the application
directory structure are not being changed or removed.
2480- File (file name) cannot be analyzed. It is currently being edited.
Cause: You attempted an analysis using a sample file that is being edited.
Action: Save the changes and close the dialog box.
2481- Error accessing the sample information file (file name).
Cause A: You attempted to open a file that is already open, possibly minimized.
Action A: View the minimized icons, locate and maximize the file.
Cause B: A computer or network problem occurred.
Action B: Check the performance of your computer devices or network.
B-8 Mar 08
Cause C: A software error occurred when the file was accessed.
Action C: Contact your service representative.
2482- File cannot be opened for writing. It is already in use.
Cause: You are attempting to open a file that is currently being used (either by
this application or another).
Action: Locate the application using the file (in the Micromeritics application,
use the Windows menu item to get a list of all windows, one of which
may contain this file).
2483- An analysis cannot be performed on (file name). It is open for editing and con-
tains errors.
Cause: You attempted to use a sample file containing errors that is currently
open.
Action: Go to the window containing the file, correct the errors, and save it.
2484- The edit session for (file name) must be saved before the analysis. Save
changes and continue with the analysis.
Cause: You attempted an analysis using a sample file that contains unsaved
changes.
Action: Select Yes to save the changes and continue with the analysis.
Select No to abort the analysis and return to the sample file.
2485- The service test file has an invalid status and cannot be used for this analysis.
Cause: The selected service test file has a status other than No Analysis.
Action: Select a different service test file or create a new one and use Replace
All to copy parameters from the file you originally selected.
Mar 08 B-9
2486- Cannot construct (name) report type. Program will terminate.

2487- Cannot start report generator. Error code (number). Program will terminate.
Cause A: You may not have full rights to the application’s folders and files.
Action A: Contact your system administrator and have him grant you full rights.
Cause B: An internal processing and/or hardware error has occurred.
Action B: Contact your service representative if you continue to receive this error
message.
2488- File (file name) cannot be opened for editing. It is already in use.
Cause: The file you specified is being used in another edit operation.
Action: Check the Windows list to locate the other edit session.
2490- No ‘.INI’ file present. Application will terminate.
Cause: The ASCII (.INI) file containing initialization and system options
information cannot be found. The .INI file may have become cor-
rupted. The application cannot operate without this file.
Action: Use the Setup CD to uninstall the ASAP 2020 application. When you
uninstall the application, only the application files are deleted; data
files remain intact.
After the uninstall opration is complete, reinstall the ASAP 2020 appli-
cation.
2491- Highlighted fields contain errors. Please correct the errors before closing dia-
log box.
Cause: The highlighted fields contain invalid entries. You will not be able to
close the dialog box until you correct the errors.
Action: Check the entries, correct the errors, and close the dialog.
B-10 Mar 08
2492- This field’s entry is invalid.
Cause: The highlighted field contains an invalid entry.
Action: Check the entry and correct the error.
2493- An entry is required for this field.
Cause: This field requires a valid entry for you to proceed.
Action: Enter or select an appropriate value.
2494- Value is out of the valid range.

2495- Value is out of the valid range. Enter a value between (value) and (value).
Cause: The value you entered in the highlighted field is outside the valid range
of values.
Action: Check the entry and enter or select an appropriate value.
2496- Invalid number.
Cause: The number you entered in the highlighted field is invalid.
Action: Check the entry and enter or select a valid number.
2497- This field contains an invalid character.
Cause: You entered an invalid character in the highlighted field.
Action: Check the entry and enter valid characters.
Mar 08 B-11
2498- The requested change to the Sample’s status is invalid at this time.
Cause: A request to change the file’s status (for example, from automatically
collected to manually entered) could not be done.
message. Record the name of the sample file in which the problem
occurred.
2499- Sequence number must contain at least 3 digits.
Cause: You tried to enter a sequence number that did not contain at least three
digits.
Action: Enter a sequence number that contains at least three digits.
B-12 Mar 08
2500 Series
2500- All sample file names that can be created using the sequence number pattern
already exist. You may want to modify the next sequence number.
Cause: No more sample information files can be created using the currently
entered file name sequence number.
Action: Select Options > Sample Defaults from the Main Menu and enter a
new sequence number.
2501- System resources have reached a dangerously low level. Please close some
windows to avoid the loss of data.
Cause: A large number of windows are open and consuming the system
resources available to all applications.
Action: Close one or more windows on the screen. Contact your service rep-
resentative if you continue to receive this error message.
2502- Error writing to file (name) during print. Error code: (number).
Cause: An error occurred in the file being written to during a print operation.
Action: Ensure that there is sufficient space on the drive containing the file.
2503- Error converting file (file name). Could not create DIO intermediate file.
Cause A: Insufficient space is available on the hard disk. The DIO file is placed
in the directory specified by the TEMP environment variable.
Action A: Determine if there is sufficient space on the drive where the TEMP
directory is located.
Cause B: An internal processing and/or hardware error has occurred.
Action B: Contact your service representative if you continue to receive this error
message.
Mar 08 B-13
2504- Cannot create output file for sample (sample name).
Cause: Insufficient space may be available on the hard disk.
Action: Ensure that sufficient space is available. Contact your service repre-
sentative if you continue to receive this error message.
2505- Error Logger cannot be initialized! Error code (number). Program will exit.
Action: Contact your service representative.
2506- (sample file) Output device (name) is not installed. Printing cannot be
accomplished.
Cause: The selected output device is not installed in Windows.
Action: Select a different output device in the System Configuration dialog

box. Install the device using the Control Panel, Printers operation.
2508- (sample file) Overlay file (name) was not found. It will not be included in the
reports.
Cause: The specified overlay file could not be found.
Action: Ensure that the file specified as an overlay does exist.
2509- (sample file) Error opening file (name): (error). Reports cannot be produced.
Cause: An error occurred while the program was opening a file necessary to
the report operation.
Action: Use the name given in the error message to investigate. Contact your
service representative if you continue to receive this error message.
B-14 Mar 08
2510- (sample file) Error parsing reports from file (name). Reports cannot be
produced.
Cause A: One or more data entry fields in the sample file may contain an invalid
character (such as a single quote or double quotes).
Action A: Review the data entry fields (for example, the Sample field) and
remove the invalid character.
Cause B: The system was unable to create the usual temporary files during the
report, possibly due to insufficient disk space.
Action B: Check the space available on the hard disk.
Cause C: An internal processing error occurred.
Action C: Contact your service representative.
2511- Print job (name) has been cancelled due to insufficient disk space. Delete
unnecessary files and restart the report.
Cause: The disk drive does not have enough space for the temporary file
required by the Windows Print Manager. Therefore, printing of the
requested report has been canceled.
Action: Delete unnecessary files from the disk. You will require at least five
megabytes of free space for normal operation.
2512- Print job (name) has been cancelled.
Cause: The requested print job was canceled at your request.
Action: None required.
Mar 08 B-15
2513- Unable to read the calibration file (file name).
Cause: You selected an invalid calibration file or one that cannot be read.
Action: Be sure the media containing the calibration file has no problems.
2514- Unable to write the calibration file (file name).
Cause: An attempt to Save calibration data has failed due to possible media
problems.
Action A: Be sure the media you want to Save the file to has no problems.
Action B: Choose an alternate media to Save the calibration data.
2515- Warning: Changing the calibration information will affect the performance of
the instrument. Only qualified service personnel should do this. Do you wish to
proceed?
Cause: You have started the process of performing a calibration operation.
Action: Calibration operations should only be done by or under the direction of

qualified service personnel.
2516- Warning: Keeping a backup copy of the calibration data is recommended by

Micromeritics. Would you like to do so now?
Cause: You have performed a calibration operation; a backup copy is recom-

mended.
Action: Perform a calibration Save operation.
2517- Canceling this dialog will reset the calibration state to what it was when this
dialog was first opened. Are you sure you want to cancel?
Cause: You have not accepted the calibration you performed.
Action: If the calibration operation was successful, press Accept.
B-16 Mar 08
2521- Unable to program controller.
Cause: A hardware malfunction has occurred.
Action: Contact your local Micromeritics service representative.
2522- Invalid controller application file.
Cause: The application’s control file has been corrupted or deleted.
Action: Reinstall the ASAP 2020 analysis program.
2523- Programming the controller failed.

2524- CRC check failed on programming controller.
2525- Unknown error programming controller.
2526- Controller download was not successful.
2527- Controller CRC error on boot block.
2528- Controller DRAM error.
2529- Controller Com1: error.
2530- Controller Com2: error.
2531- Controller debug port error.
message.
2532- The instrument contains a different software version. Do you want to reset it?
Cause: The application has discovered a different version of software operat-

ing in the analyzer.
Action: If there are no analyzers other than the ASAP 2020 connected to the
computer, select Yes and allow the updated software to load.
2533- Analyzer initialization failed.
message.
Mar 08 B-17
2534- Error opening file (name) for printing. Error code: (number).
Cause: An error occurred in the selected file for print output.
Action: Ensure that sufficient space is available on the drive containing the file.
B-18 Mar 08
4000 Series
4000- Memory Allocation Error.
Cause: An internal processing and/or hardware error occurred during report

generation.
message.
4002- Thermal Transpiration correction had no effect.
Cause: The Thermal transpiration correction option was selected on the Report
Options dialog box. However, the correction did not change any pres-
sure by more than one percent.
Action: De-select this option to disable this message. This correction is only
meaningful for very low pressures.
4003- Error Converting Pressures.

4004- Error Computing Volume Adsorbed.

generation.
message.
4005- Pressures were not smoothed. Not enough pressures below 0.10 P/Po.
Cause: The Smooth pressures below 0.10 P/Po option was selected on the
Report Options dialog. There must be at least 10 pressures within this
range for smoothing to occur.
Action: Deselect this option to disable this message.
Mar 08 B-19
4006- Report Type Not Found.

4007- Error Processing Report.

generation.
message.
4008- Report requested on sample file with no data points.
Cause: You selected a file for reporting which contains no collected data.
Action: Select another file which contains collected data and restart the report.
4009- Error, No Reports Selected.
Cause: You attempted to generate reports for a sample that has no reports
selected in its report options.
Action: Select the desired reports in the sample’s report options and save the
sample file.
4010- Summary Report was not included in the Selected Reports.
Cause: You did not select a plot or a table for any of the Selected Reports in
the Report Options dialog; you selected the reports only to generate an
entry in the summary. However, the Summary was not included in the
Selected Reports.
Action: Select a plot or table in one or more of the Selected Reports, and/or add
the Summary to the Selected Reports.
B-20 Mar 08
4011- Analysis gas in sample file does not match analysis gas in unit.
Cause: You attempted to start an analysis using a sample information file in

which the analysis gas specified does not match the analysis gas
entered in the unit configuration.
Action: If necessary, attach the appropriate gas bottle, then enter the gas in the
Unit Configuration dialog box.
4012- Psat gas in sample file does not match Psat gas in unit.
Cause: You attempted to start an analysis using a sample information file in

which the Psat gas does not match the Psat gas entered in the unit con-
figuration.
Action: If necessary, attach the appropriate gas bottle, then enter the gas in the
Unit Configuration dialog box.
4013- The ‘Incremental Dosing’ option is not available on the selected unit.
Cause: The MicroPore option is not installed.
Action: Install the MicroPore option before starting the analysis.
4014- File (name) is not a valid file for conversion.
Cause: The file selected for conversion is not a MICMOS 2000 or 2000
MicroPore file.
Action: Select only files that have been created by MICMOS 2000 or 2000
MicroPore programs.
Mar 08 B-21
4015- Error creating export file for sample <sample file name>.
Cause: A file error occurred during creation of an export output file.
Action: The output file name may be invalid. Ensure that the target directory
exists. Ensure that the target diskette is not full or write protected. The
target disk drive may be damaged or inoperative. Verify that other files
may be created on the same drive. Contact your service representative
if you continue to receive this error message.
4016- Sample (file name) has no data for export.
Cause: The file selected for export has a status of No Analysis. No export file
will be created.
Action: Select a file which contains analysis data.
4017- Damage to the instrument will result if the sample has not been manually evac-
uated. Have you evacuated the sample?
Cause: You did not select Backfill sample at start of analysis on the Sample
Backfill Options dialog box. The sample tube is normally at atmo-
spheric pressure when an analysis is started, and it must be backfilled
before the analysis begins to prevent sample material from being
drawn into the manifold.
Action: If you have manually evacuated the sample tube, select Yes. If you
have not, select No and then either perform a manual evacuation or go
to the Sample Backfill Options dialog box and select Backfill sample
at start of analysis.
B-22 Mar 08
4020- Disabling this option may damage the instrument. Are you sure that the sample
should not be backfilled?
Cause: You did not select Backfill sample at start of analysis on the Sample
Backfill Options dialog. The sample tube is normally at atmospheric
pressure when an analysis is started; it must be backfilled before the
analysis begins to prevent sample material from being drawn into the
manifold.
Action: If you want to manually evacuate the sample prior to the start of the
analysis, select Yes. Otherwise, select No, go to the Sample Backfill
Options dialog, and select Backfill sample at start of analysis.
4021- The entered Po value (Po and Temperature Options of the Analysis Conditions)
is outside the range of the pressures listed in the Psat vs. Temperature Table
(Adsorptive Properties).
Cause: The temperature that corresponds to the entered Po cannot be found

because the entered Po is outside of the range of values in the Psat vs. T
table.
Action A: Enter a Po that is within the range of the table.
Action B: Use a different Psat vs. T table.
4022- The entered bath temperature value (Po and Temperature Options of the Anal-
ysis Conditions) is outside the range of the temperatures listed in the Psat vs.
Temperature Table (Adsorptive Properties).
Cause: The Po that corresponds to the entered temperature cannot be found

because the entered temperature is outside of the range of values in the
Psat vs. T table.
Action A: Enter a temperature that is within the range of the table.
Action B: Use a different Psat vs. T table.
Mar 08 B-23
4023- The file (sample file) cannot be prepared for analysis. It is open for editing and
contains errors.
Cause: You attempted an analysis using a sample file that is being edited and
has invalid values in one or more of its fields.
Action: Enter valid values into the fields that have errors, save the changes, and
close the dialog box.
4024- Backfill gas in sample file does not match any gas in unit.
Cause: You selected a backfill gas that is not included in the gas configuration.
Action: Make sure that gas selections match the gases that are attached to the
instrument. Choose one of the gases as the backfill gas, or edit the sam-
ple file and choose one of the existing gases as the backfill gas.
4025- There is no Helium attached to the unit.
Cause: A measured free space has been requested but Helium does not appear
to be available.
Action: Make sure the helium cylinder is attached to the unit at its designated
port.
4026- Cannot calculate Dubinin-Astkahov: bad least squares data.
Cause: Less than two selected data points are within the fitted pressure range.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments on the Collected Data dialog, or

change the fitted pressure range on the Dubinin report options dialog.
4027- Fewer than two sample files have data suitable for heat of adsorption reports.
Cause: Less than two of the sample files you selected for heat of adsorption
reports contain appropriate data.
Action: Edit the Quantity Adsorbed table, or select other sample files.
B-24 Mar 08
4028- Dubinin calculations cannot be performed because the affinity coefficient of

the analysis gas is zero.
Cause: Dubinin values could not be calculated because the affinity coefficient
of the analysis gas is zero.
Action: Access the Dubinin Report Adsorptive options in the sample file and
enter an appropriate value for the analysis gas.
4029- At least two fitted data points are needed for Alpha-S calculations.
Cause: Fewer than two data points fall within the selected Alpha-s range.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments or the fitted Alpha-s range, or use a
different reference curve.
4030- Preparations failed in primary data.
Cause: Appropriate data were not available to generate the report.
Action: This message was preceded by a different error message; refer to the
cause/action of the preceding message.
4031- Not enough points with a relative pressure in the range (n,n)
Cause: Fewer than two data points selected for the Dubinin report falls within
the selected relative pressure range.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments or the fitted relative pressure range.
4032- Some summary reports could not be produced because they require the
Micropore option.
Cause: Some of the summary reports you requested were not produced
because you do not have the micropore option installed.
Action: Edit the summary report and deselect the micropore options.
Mar 08 B-25
4033- Not enough points to generate Dubinin Tabular Report.
Cause: There are fewer than two valid data points available for the Dubinin
tabular reports.
Action: Examine the calculation assignments in the Collected Data dialog of

the sample file. You must have at least two micropore pressures
selected for inclusion in the Dubinin report.
4034- Fewer than 2 points available for Dubinin calculations.
Cause: There are fewer than two valid data points available for Dubinin
reports in one of the sample files selected for overlaying.
Action: Examine the calculation assignments in the Collected Data dialog of

the sample file. You must have at least two micropore pressures
4035- Cannot calculate optimized Astakhov exponent: Not enough points with a rel-
ative pressure in the range [(pressure), (pressure)].
Cause: There are fewer than two valid data points in the relative pressure
range specified. Astakhov reports will not be produced.
Action: Examine the calculation assignments in the Collected Data dialog for
the sample file. You must have at least two pressures in the given range
4036- Fewer than 2 points available for Horvath-Kawazoe calculations.
Cause: You must select at least two data points for inclusion in the Horvath-
Kawazoe analysis on the Collected Data dialog. No report will be pro-
duced.
Action: From the Collected Data dialog, select the data points to be analyzed.
B-26 Mar 08
4037- Computations failed while processing the primary data set. No reports will be
produced.
Cause: The preparation of data for reporting could not be successfully com-
pleted. No Horvath-Kawazoe reports will be produced. This message
will always be preceded with another one containing additional infor-
mation.
Action: Refer to the number of the error message which preceded this one for
an explanation.
4038- Fewer than 2 points available for the Langmuir Qm computation. Cheng/Yang
correction will not be applied.
Cause: The Cheng/Yang correction to the Horvath-Kawazoe equation requires

the value of the monolayer volume as calculated from the Langmuir
equation. The isotherm must include at least two points above 0.02 rel-
ative pressure for the Langmuir equation to be applied.
Action: The analysis will be performed without the Cheng/Yang correction.

Deselect Apply Cheng/Yang correction on the Horvath-Kawazoe
Report Options dialog to prevent this message from appearing on
future reports.
4039- The isotherm does not meet the constraints of the Cheng/Yang assumption.
Cheng/Yang correction will not be applied.

equation. The isotherm does not correlate to the Langmuir assumption
with a coefficient of 0.98 or more. The correction is not applicable to
this isotherm or to the range of the data points selected.
Action A: The analysis will be performed without the Cheng/Yang correction.

Deselect Apply Cheng/Yang correction on the Horvath-Kawazoe
Report Options dialog to prevent this message from appearing on
future reports.
Action B: Generate the Langmuir report for the same data points selected for the
Horvath-Kawazoe report. If the Langmuir correlation coefficient can
be brought above 0.98 by removing some points at high relative pres-
sure, remove them and reproduce the Horvath-Kawazoe reports.
Mar 08 B-27
4040- The value of Qm computed from the Langmuir equation is too low. The pore
size will not be computed for all data points.

equation. The computed value is less than the volume adsorbed at the
largest relative pressure included in the analysis. The correction is not
applicable to this isotherm or to the range of the data points selected.
Action: The analysis will be performed and the Cheng/Yang correction will be
applied to all points with a volume adsorbed less than the value of Vm.
The pore size will not be calculated for data points with an invalid vol-
ume adsorbed. Deselect Apply Cheng/Yang correction on the Horvath-
Kawazoe Report Options dialog to clear this message.
4041- Cheng/Yang correction is inappropriate for some P/Po.
Cause: The Cheng/Yang correction is usually inappropriate for any P/Po above
the isotherm knee. In some instances, the computed pore sizes may
decrease above the knee. While it is possible to include these relative
pressures (usually above 0.1 P/Po) in the analysis, the computed pore
sizes for these pressures are usually meaningless.
Action: Change the data points selected for the Horvath-Kawazoe report to
include only relative pressures at or below the knee of the isotherm, or
change the Horvath-Kawazoe report options so that the Cheng/Yang
correction is not applied.
4042- 0.0 cannot be a starting or ending pressure for a geometric progression from
low pressure.
Cause: You selected to generate a pressure table from a geometrically pro-

gressing range.
Action: Change the 0.0 entered value.
B-28 Mar 08
4043- 1.0 cannot be a starting or ending pressure for a geometric progression toward
saturation.
Cause: You selected to generate a pressure table from a geometrically pro-

gressing range.
Action: Change the 1.0 entered value.
4044- Points in the Langmuir report pressure table lie outside the collected data.
Cause: Calculation assignments are not being used and more than one of the
report pressure table points is above the range of the collected data, and
more than one is below.
Action: Change the report pressure table to be more consistent with the col-
lected data.
4045- Points in the report pressure table lie outside the collected data.
Cause: Calculation assignments are not being used and more than one of the
report pressure table points is above the range of the collected data, and
more than one is below.
Action: Change the report pressure table to be more consistent with the col-
lected data.
4046- (file name) could not be opened for reading.
Cause: A thickness curve file could not be opened.
Action: If the problem persists, restart your computer and optionally perform a
media integrity check (using ScanDisk).
4047- Warning: An error occurred while reading (file name).
Cause: An error happened during a read operation of a thickness curve file.
Action: If the problem persists, restart your computer and optionally perform a
media integrity check (using ScanDisk).
Mar 08 B-29
4048- Warning: An error occurred while restoring the heat of adsorption report editor.
Cause: The state of the heat of adsorption report editor could not be restored.
Default settings will be used.
Action: No action.
4049- The sample (file name) does not have enough data. A minimum of two adsorp-
tion points is required.
Cause: A sample file has been included in the Heat of Adsorption report that
does not have enough data.
Action: Remove the file from the selected file list.
4050- None of the requested quantities adsorbed is within the range of the collected
data of more than one sample file.
Cause: The Heat of Adsorption report failed because the specified quantities
are not within the range of the collected data.
Action A: Edit the quantities adsorbed so that they are within the range of the col-
lected data, or select other sample files.
4051- The sample (file name) does not have any data in the range of the requested
quantities adsorbed.
Cause: The sample’s data cannot be interpolated to any of the quantities

adsorbed.
Action: Edit the quantities adsorbed so that they are within the range of the col-
lected data.
4052- Fewer than two points are selected for this report.
Cause: At least two points are required for the BET calculations.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments for the BET report.
B-30 Mar 08
4053- At least two data points must be selected for t-Plot calculations.
Cause: At least two points are required for the t-Plot calculations.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments for the t-Plot report.
4054- Fewer than two data points are inside the fitted thickness range.
Cause: At least two points must be within the fitted thickness range for the t-
Plot calculations.
Action A: Edit the calculation assignments for the t-Plot report.
Action B: Edit the fitted thickness range in the t-Plot report editor.
4055- The BET surface area could not be calculated.
Cause: Fewer than two points were assigned to the requested surface area cal-
culation in the collected data table.
Action A: Assign more points to the surface area calculation.
Action B: Select a different surface area in the t-Plot report editor.
4056- The Langmuir surface area could not be calculated.
Cause: Fewer than two points were assigned to the requested surface area cal-
culation in the collected data table.
Action A: Assign more points to the surface area calculation.
Action B: Select a different surface area in the t-Plot report editor.
Mar 08 B-31
4057- At least two data points are needed for Freundlich calculations.
Cause: Less than two data points have been selected for the Freundlich report;
at least two are required.
Action: Select Freundlich points on the Collected Data dialog. If calculation

assignments are not being used, edit the Freundlich Report options,
Absolute pressure range in the sample file.
4058- At least two data points are needed for Temkin calculations.
Cause: Less than two data points have been selected for the Temkin report; at
least two are required.
Action: Select Temkin points on the Collected Data dialog. If calculation

assignments are not being used, edit the Temkin Report options,
Absolute pressure range in the sample file.
Cause: You have selected at least one point with a negative pressure value to
include in the Temkin report.
Action: Negative pressure points void Temkin calculations. Open the sample
file and click the Collected Data tab. Locate the negative value(s) in
the Temkin column and deselect it(them).
4059- Fewer than 2 points available for MP-Method calculations.
Cause: At least two points are required for the MP-Method calculations.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments for the MP-Method report.
4060- Sample (file name) contains no data points.
Action: An attempt was made to save a sample without collected data as a t-

curve or alpha-S curve.
Cause: Repeat the save as t-curve or save as alpha-S operation after opening a
sample that has collected data.
B-32 Mar 08
4061- The t-curve must contain at least 2 points.
Cause: At least two points are required in a thickness curve definition.
Action: Edit the thickness curve.
4062- Error during report generation.
Cause: An internal processing error has occurred.
Action: Contact your Micromeritics service representative.
4063- The data requested on this report are not available.
Cause: There is no information in the sample log to report.
Action: You selected a sample file for which no instrument operations have
been used. Select a sample file with a status of Prepared, Preparing,
Analyzing, or Complete to obtain a valid sample log report.
4064- This report cannot be produced without the Micropore option.
Cause: You requested a report that requires the micropore option.
Action: Deselect the report. Order the Micropore option to install on the ana-
lyzer.
4067- No data points are within the range of pressures in the reference isotherm.
Cause: Thre are no collected data points within the range of pressures in the
reference isotherm.
Action: Select data points that are in the range of the reference isotherm, or
select a more appropriate reference isotherm.
Mar 08 B-33
4068- No points were selected for the f-Ratio report.
Cause: The collected data column for the f-Ratio report does not have any
points selected.
Action: Edit the collected data dialog and select points for the f-Ratio report.
4069- Dosing method choice is invalid. The Analysis Conditions choice of Absolute
pressure dosing requires that the Adsorptive Properties (Dosing Method) is set
to Normal.
Cause: There is an incompatibility between the analysis conditions choice of

Absolute pressure dosing and the adsorptive properties dosing
method.
Action: Edit one of the choices.
4070- Unable to load deconvolution model (name).
Cause: For some reason, the list of available models was corrupted, therefore,
the model selected could not be loaded for the deconvolution.
Action: Exit the program and reinstall the software, then try again.
4071- The selected pressures points do not form a valid set for deconvolution.
Cause: The data points selected for analysis do not contain enough informa-
tion to allow a DFT data reduction.
Action A: Edit data points in the table of the Collected Data dialog, or select
another sample file. At least two points with strictly increasing pres-
sures and volumes adsorbed are required for a DFT Plus data reduc-
tion.
Action B: Edit the pressure range on the DFT report options dialog.
B-34 Mar 08
4072- The range of pressures selected is too small to deconvolute using this model.
Cause: A null result was found using the selected model.
Action: Edit data points in the table of the Collected Data dialog, or select
another sample file. At least two points with strictly increasing pres-
sures and volumes adsorbed are required for a DFT data reduction.
4073- The analysis gas (name) does not match the model gas (name).
Cause: The model assumes a specific gas and the sample file uses a different
one.
Action: Select a model that assumes the same gas.
4074- The analysis temperature (nn) does not match the model temperature (nn).
Cause: The temperature for the selected model did not match the analysis tem-
perature.
Action: Select a different model.
4075- The models cannot be located in the models folder. Reinstall the software.
Cause: The models could not be located. They may have been inadvertently
deleted or moved.
Action: Reinstall the software.
Mar 08 B-35
4076- Invalid sample file - Adsorptive Properties “Non-condensing adsorptive” can-

not be used unless Analysis Conditions “Absolute pressure dosing” is
selected.
Cause: You selected a sample file that has Non-condensing adsorptive

selected in the Adsorptive Properties but does not have Absolute pres-
sure dosing selected in Analysis Conditions.
Action A: If you plan to use a non-condensing adsorptive, select Absolute pres-

sure dosing on the Analysis Conditions dialog.
Action B: If you are not using a non-condensing adsorptive, deselect the Non-
condensing adsorptive option on the Adsorptive Properties dialog, or
choose an adsorptive that you are sure in not non-condensing.
4077- Cannot get surface area for: (file name)
Cause: The Isotherm report for the named overlay file has Per gram selected
for the Volume Adsorbed, and the Isotherm report for the primary file
has a surface area option selected for the Volume Adsorbed.
Action A: Edit the Isotherm report for the named overlay file and select a surface
area option for Volume Adsorbed.
Action B: Click Overlays on the Report options dialog of the primary file and
remove the named overlay file from the list.
4078- Slope and Y-Intercept cannot be determined from the selected points.
Cause: The Langmuir report cannot be generated from the selected points.
Action: Edit the calculation assignments in the Langmuir column on the

Collected Data dialog.
4079- Points found with negative pressure values will not appear on the graph.
Cause: Collected data contains negative pressure values.
Action: Negative pressure points are automatically removed from isotherm

graphs. If you wish to have negative pressure values appear on the
graph: Open the sample file and click the Collected Data tab.
Deselect Use calculation assignments and then select the points with
negative pressures as Outliers.
B-36 Mar 08
6200 Series
6201- ‘GetOpenFile()’ reports error code (number). File selection cannot be made.
Cause: You specified a file name which does not exist.
Action: Confirm that the file name used is valid and that the file exists.
6202- Invalid communications port (port name) specified in the application’s config-
uration settings. Unit cannot initialize.
Cause A: The communications port assigned to the ASAP 2020 cannot be made
available for proper communications.
Action A: Run the ASAP 2020 Setup program, select Change analyzer setup, and
enter the correct port information. If the message continues, contact
your service representative.
Cause B: The ASAP 2020 control file was manually modified and an invalid
communications port was specified.
Action B: Use the ASAP 2020 Setup program to change the communications port
assigned to the ASAP 2020.
6203- No serial number available. Unit cannot initialize.
Cause: The ASAP 2020 control file does not contain a serial number for the
unit.
Action: Run the ASAP 2020 Setup program, select Change analyzer setup, and
define the serial number for the instrument.
6204- The disk does not have enough room for the ROA data. The space required is
(number) megabytes.
Cause: The computer’s disk is almost out of disk space.
Action: Delete unwanted files.
Mar 08 B-37
6209- Analysis startup failed. (Secondary message number and text.)
Cause: The ASAP 2020 Program was unable to start an analysis with the indi-
cated unit.
Action: Refer to the specified error number and text for instructions.
6212- Calibrating. This action must be completed before the application exits.
Cause: The unit is calibrating.
Action: Do not exit the application until the calibration is complete.
6216- Instrument could not initialize. Reason: (reason).
Action: The specific reason given may identify a possible corrective action.
Contact your service representative if you continue to receive this error
message.
6235- (Unit [number]) Analysis canceled: Time limit exceeded while dosing Psat tube
to 925 mmHg.
Cause A: A pressure of 925 mmHg was not attained within the allowed time. The
Psat gas regulator may be set too low or turned off.
Action A: Set the Psat gas regulator to 10 psig (0.7 bar). Then restart the analysis.
Cause B: The Psat gas bottle is empty.
Action B: Connect a new Psat gas bottle. Then restart the analysis.
Cause C: The Psat tube fitting is loose.
Action C: Check the Psat tube fittings and ensure that the tube is attached
securely to the port. Then restart the analysis.
B-38 Mar 08
6237- (Unit [number]) Analysis canceled: Time limit exceeded while evacuating Psat
tube.
Cause: The maximum time for evacuating the Psat tube was exceeded before
the vacuum set point was achieved.
Action: Check the Psat tube fittings. Tighten the connector nut if necessary;
then restart the analysis.
6240- Leak test failed.
Cause: With the sample port valve closed, the sample pressure increased by
0.15 mmHg before the leak test duration was completed.
Action: Check sample tube fitting and ensure that it is securely attached to the
port. Then restart the analysis.
6241- (Unit [number]) Analysis canceled: Maximum time exceeded before the elevator
reached the UP (or DOWN) position.
Cause A: The maximum time for the analysis was exceeded before the elevator
reached the UP (or DOWN) position. Ice may be present in the bottom
or the neck of the Dewar.
Action A: Check the Dewar and remove ice if necessary. Refer to Checking the
Analysis Port Dewar in Chapter 8. Then restart the analysis.
Cause B: The Psat tube is interfering with elevator movement.
Action B: Make sure the Psat tube is close to the sample tube and the Dewar
cover is over both the sample and Psat tubes. Then restart the analysis.
Mar 08 B-39
6244- (Unit [number]) Analysis canceled: Time limit exceeded while storing analysis
gas in Psat tube.
Cause A: The time limit (10 minutes) was exceeded while storing the analysis
gas in the Psat tube. The Psat gas regulator may be set too low or
turned off.
Action A: Set the Psat gas regulator to 10 psig (0.7 bar). Then restart the analysis.
Cause B: The Psat gas bottle is empty.
Action B: Connect a new Psat gas bottle. Then restart the analysis.
Cause C: The Psat tube fitting is loose.
Action C: Check the Psat tube fittings and ensure that the tube is attached
securely to the port. Then restart the analysis.
B-40 Mar 08
6500 Series
6500- Failed to evacuate manifold to VAC SET in (number of) seconds. Calibration
canceled.
Cause A: The vacuum set point is set too low.
Action A: Ensure that the vacuum set point is at 5.0 mmHg. If the set point is
already at 5.0 mmHg or above, the vacuum gauge may need servicing.
Cause B: Leak in manifold.
Action B: Locate the leak and repair it. Refer to Chapter 9, Troubleshooting and
Maintenance. Restart calibration.
Cause C: Valve failure.
Action C: Identify the leaking valve. Contact your service representative.
6501- The 1000 mmHg transducer offset exceeds recommended limits: (number)
Cause: The Pressure Gauge Calibration operation showed the transducer offset
exceeds the recommended limit.
Action: Repeat the Pressure Gauge Calibration operation, if this message

occurs again contact a Micromeritics service representative.

Mar 08 B-41

6504- Unable to write the calibration file (name).
Cause: A Save to File operation failed.
Action: Confirm there is sufficient free space on the media receiving the file
and that the media is not corrupted (run ScanDisk). If the problem per-
sists contact a Micromeritics service representative.
6505- Unable to read the calibration file (name).
Cause: A Load from File operation failed.
6506- Calibration file for (file name) is invalid.
Cause: A Load From File operation failed due to invalid information in the
file.
6509- The sample has an invalid status and cannot be used for degassing.
Cause: A file selected for degassing has a status other then No Analysis or Pre-
pared.
Action: Select a different file.
B-42 Mar 08
6510- Error evacuating.
Cause: An evacuation error occurred during a degas operation.
Action: If the problem persists, contact a Micromeritics service representative.
6511- Error dosing.
Cause: A dosing error occurred during a degas operation.
6512- Error calibrating the servo.
Cause: An error occurred while calibrating the servo valve.
6513- Error waiting for pressure to drop.
Cause: A pressure error occurred during a degas operation.
6514- Problem encountered dosing to target [PR2] [PR-U], last pressure = [PR4] [PR-
U], elapsed time = [0]:[0].
Cause: Dosing during an analysis did not come within the allowed range of the
target.
Action: Check that the outlet stage of the gas regulator is within specification.
If the problem occurs frequently contact a Micromeritics service rep-
resentative.
Mar 08 B-43
6516- (Unit n]) Analysis canceled: Sample pressure greater than (pressure) mmHg is
not allowed.
Cause: An absolute pressure greater than (pressure) mmHg was attained dur-
ing Low pressure dosing (either fixed dose mode or incremental dose
mode).
Action: The analysis was canceled. All previously collected data were stored.
6517- (Unit n) Analysis canceled: Total volume dosed greater than (volume) cm3 is
not allowed.
Cause A: More than (volume) cm3 has been dosed onto the sample, possibly due
to leaks in the system.
Action A: Perform leak checks on the system. Refer to Appendix E, Testing for
Leaks.
Cause B: The value for the Po may be too low, causing the instrument to mistake
condensation for actual adsorption.
Action B: Change the analysis variables to directly measure the value of Po dur-
ing the experiment.
Cause C: The amount of sample you used may be too large. Multiply the max-
imum value from the Volume Adsorbed column of the Isotherm Report
by the sample weight. If the result exceeds (volume) cm3, the amount
of sample is too large.
Action C: Reduce the amount of sample.
6518- (Unit n) Analysis canceled: Pressure of (pressure point) mmHg exceeds the
maximum manifold pressure of (pressure point) mmHg.
Cause: An absolute pressure greater than (pressure) mmHg was attained that
exceeded the specified maximum manifold pressure.
Action: The analysis was canceled. All previously collected data were stored.
Change the maximum manifold pressure value in the Adsorptive Prop-
erties file.
B-44 Mar 08
6519- (Unit n) Analysis canceled: Psat gas is not condensing.
Cause A: The working Dewar does not contain enough bath liquid.
Action A: Retry the operation after filling the Dewar.
Cause B: The Psat gas is contaminated.
Action B: Replace the Psat gas supply.
Cause C: The Psat tubing from the regulator to the instrument is contaminated.
Action C: Pump out the tubing.
6520- Power failure detected.
Cause A: Main power failed but UPS (if attached) is working.
Action A: Restore power to the analyzer.
Cause B: The value for the Po may be too low, causing the instrument to mistake
condensation for actual adsorption.
Action B: Change the analysis variables to directly measure the value of Po dur-
ing the experiment.
Cause C: The amount of sample you used may be too large. Multiply the max-
imum value from the Volume Adsorbed column of the Isotherm Report
by the sample weight. If the result exceeds (volume) cm3, the amount
of sample is too large.
Action C: Reduce the amount of sample.
Mar 08 B-45
6521- Transducer overrange detected.
Cause: A manifold pressure over 1000 mmHg was detected.
Action: Observe caution when operating the analyzer manually. If the problem
persists contact a Micromeritics service representative.
6522- (Unit n) Analysis canceled: Time limit exceeded while evacuating manifold.
Cause A: Maximum manifold evacuation time was exceeded before the vacuum
set point was achieved. Vacuum pump may be turned off.
Action A: Turn on vacuum pump switch. Then restart the analysis.
Cause B: The vacuum pump oil level is low.
Action B: Check the vacuum pump oil level and add more oil if necessary. Then
restart the analysis.
Cause C: The manifold is contaminated or leaking.
Action C: Correct the problem. Refer to Appendix D, Testing for Leaks. Then
restart the analysis.
6523- (Unit n) Analysis canceled: Time limit exceeded while evacuating sample
(unrestricted).
Cause: The maximum time for evacuating the sample through the unrestricted
valve was exceeded. Possible causes are a leak in the sample tube fit-
ting or a crack in the sample tube.
Action: Check the sample tube and the sample tube fitting; ensure that the tube
is securely attached to the port. Then restart the analysis.
B-46 Mar 08
6524- (Unit n) Analysis canceled: Time limit exceeded while evacuating sample
(restricted).
Cause: The maximum time for evacuating the sample through the restricted
valve was exceeded. Possible causes are a leak in the sample tube fit-
ting, a crack in the sample tube, or a poorly degassed sample.
Action: Check the sample tube and the sample tube fitting; ensure that the tube
is securely attached to the port. Verify that the sample is properly
degassed; then restart the analysis
6525- Power failure lasted too long.
Cause: A power failure on an anlyzer which has an Uninteruptible Power Sup-

ply attached has lasted for an hour or more; therefore, the analysis has
been canceled.
Action: Determine the cause of the poewer failure and correct it.
6526- Time limit exceeded while backfilling manifold to [PR4] [PR-U] with [G].
Cause A: The maximum time was exceeded before the target pressure point was
reached. The gas regulator may be set too low or turned off.
Action A: Set the gas regulator to 10 psig (0.7 bar). Then resume the analysis.
Cause B: The gas bottle is empty.
Action B: Connect a new gas bottle. Then resume the analysis.
Mar 08 B-47
6527- (Unit n) Analysis suspended: Time limit exceeded while dosing manifold to (tar-
get pressure point) mmHg with (gas name).
Cause A: The maximum time was exceeded before the target pressure point was
reached. The nitrogen regulator may be set too low or turned off.
Action A: Set the analysis gas regulator to 10 psig (0.7 bar). Then resume the
analysis.
Cause B: The analysis gas bottle is empty.
Action B: Connect a new analysis gas bottle. Then resume the analysis.
6528- Low pressure gauge offset too high - [PR4] [PR-U].
Cause: A check of the 1000 mmHg gauge’s offset during an automatic oper-
ation indicated it was too high.
Action: If this message occurs repeatedly, contact a Micromeritics service rep-

resentative
6529- Master pressure gauge offset is too high - [PR1] [PR-U].
Cause: A check of the 10 mmHg or 1 mmHg gauge’s offset during an auto-

matic operation indicated it was too high.
Action: If this message occurs repeatedly contact a Micromeritics service rep-

resentative.
6530- Volume calibration canceled due to failure (code [0]).
Cause: A problem occurred during volume calibration.
Action: Contact a Micromeritics service representative.
B-48 Mar 08
6531- The gas configuration file for (unit number) is invalid.
Cause: The contents of the gas configuration file are not valid.
Action A: Exit the application, navigate to the application hardware directory,

and delete the <S/N>.SST file. Then restart the application and reas-
sign gasses.
Action B: Confirm there is sufficient free space on the media receiving the file
sists, contact a Micromeritics service representative.
6532- The instrument is currently running the Physi software. Do you want to reset
it?
Cause: The analyzer is under the control of the 2020 Physisorption software.
Action: Selecting Yes will reset the analyzer and download the 2020 Chemi-
sorption control software.
6533- The instrument is currently running the Chemi software. Do you want to reset
it?
Cause: The analyzer is under the control of the 2020 Chemisorption software.
Action: Selecting Yes will reset the analyzer and download the 2020 Pyh-
sisorption control software.
6534- Instrument (unit number) is not calibrated.
Cause: Calibration information for various analyzer components are missing.
Action: Run the application setup program and reinstall calibration information
for the specified unit.
Mar 08 B-49
6535- Problem encountered evacuating.
Cause: Evacuation during the manifold dosing operation did not come within
the allowed range of the target.
Action: Check that the outlet stage of the gas regulator is within specification.
If the problem occurs frequently, contact a Micromewritics service rep-
resentative.
6536- There is no Nitrogen attached to the unit.
Cause: A volume calibration has been requested but N2 is not one of the gases
selected in the unit/gas configuration.
Action: Make sure the nitrogen cylinder is attached to the unit and edit unit
configuration to match the gases that are present.
6537- Error reading SmartVac ADC.
Cause: There was a problem reading one of the signals on the SmartVac board.
Action: Exit the application, turn off the power switch on the analyzer, then
turn the power back on. Restart the application and the degas opera-
tion. If the problem persists, contact your service representative.
6538- Power failure detected. The sample is in an unknown condition. A run termina-
tion will be performed for safety.
Cause: A total power failure occurred (a UPS was not connected) while an
analysis was in progress.
Action: Allow the analysis to terminate.
6539- Error overheating Current = (no.), Target = (no.), Limit = (no.)
Cause A: The heating mantle is reporting a higher temperature than expected.
Action A: Ensure that the heating mantle and thermocouple cables are plugged in
fully on the port(s).
B-50 Mar 08
Cause B: An internal failure of the degas system may have occurred.
Action B: Unplug the heating mantle power connector; do not unplug the ther-
mocouple. Allow the heating mantle to cool down (approximately 15-
30 minutes). Then exit the analysis program and turn off the analyzer.
Wait a couple of minutes, then turn the instrument on and restart the
program. If the problem recurs, contact your Micromeritics service
representative.
6540- Error thermocouple unplugged. Current= (no.), Target = (no.)
Cause: The heater was enabled, but the thermocouple was unplugged.
Action: Plug in the thermocouple and try again.
6541- Error: SmartVac is not in a valid state to check degas.
Cause: You clicked Check to check degassing but the sample was not in an
appropriate state. You can only check the degassing operation after the
vacuum setpoint has been attained, or during a temperature ramp or
hold.
Action: Wait until an appropriate time during the degassing operation and
check the degassing operation again.
Mar 08 B-51
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix C
CALCULATIONS
Saturation Pressure (Po)
Po method is selected by the user on the Po and Temperature Options dialog box. It may be
entered, measured, or calculated from temperature.
If entered, Po = user entered value
If measured, Po = equilibrated pressure reading after saturating Po tube
If calculated from temperature, interpolate Po from the Psat vs Temperature table on the Po
and Temperature Options dialog box, given the analysis bath temperature
Relative Pressure
If Po was measured:
For points taken before the previous Po measurement,
( Po 2 ∠ Po 1 ) × ( T I ∠ To 1 )
Po I = Po 1 + --------------------------------------------------------------
-
( To 2 ∠ To 1 )
For points taken after the previous Po, use the previous Po:
PoI = Po1
If Po was entered, use the entered Po:
PoI = PoE
If Po was calculated, use the calculated Po:
PoI = PoC
Calculate relative pressure for the Ith data point:
P
P rel1 = -------1-
Po I
May 06 C-1
Appendix C ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
where
PoI = saturation pressure for the Ith data point (mmHg)

Po1 = most previous measured saturation pressure before Ith data
point (mmHg)
Po2 = first measured saturation pressure after the Ith data point (mmHg)
PoC = calculated Po
PoE = entered saturation pressure (mmHg)
TI = time when the Ith data point was taken (minutes)
To1 = time when Po1 was measured (minutes)
To2 = time when Po2 was measured (minutes)
PrelI = relative pressure for the Ith data point (mmHg)
PI = absolute pressure for the Ith data point, taken at equilibrium (mmHg)
Free Space
Free-space volumes are calculated using the following equations:
V LOW P
- × -----1 ∠ 1 × T STD
V FW = -----------
T1 P2
V LOW P
- × -----1 ∠ 1 × T STD
V FC = -----------
T2 P3
V FC ∠ V FW
V ABT = -------------------------
-
T ABT
1∠ ----------
T RM
where:\
P1 = system manifold pressure before dosing helium onto sample (mmHg)

P2 = system manifold pressure after dosing helium onto sample (mmHg)
P3 = sample pressure after raising Dewar and equilibrating with helium (mmHg)
TSTD = standard temperature (273.13 K)
TRM = approximate room temperature (298 K)
T1 = system manifold temperature before dosing helium onto sample (K)
T2 = system manifold temperature after raising Dewar and equilibrating with
helium (K)
VLOW = lower manifold volume (cm3)
VFC = volume of free space, cold (cm3 at standard temperature)
C-2 May 06
VFW = volume of free space, warm (cm3 at standard temperature)

VABT = portion of cold free space at analysis bath temperature: used in non-ideality
correction (cm3 at standard temperature)
TABT = analysis bath temperature (K), from the Po and Temperature Options dialog
box
Volume Adsorbed
For the Ith dose:
Psys1 Psys2 T STD

Ngas I = Ngas I ∠ 1 + V LOW × ----------------I ∠ ----------------I × ----------
-
Tsys1 I Tsys2 I P STD
Nads I = Ngas I ∠ Psam I ÷ P STD × ( V FC + Psam I × V ABT × C )
Nads
V I = ---------------I
Wsam
where:
C = non-ideality correction factor, user-entered on Adsorptive Properties dialog

box
NgasI = total amount of gas dosed into sample tube after Ith dose (cm3 STP)
NadsI = amount of gas adsorbed after equilibrating Ith dose (cm3 STP)
PSTD = standard pressure (760 mmHg)
Psys1I = system manifold pressure before Ith dose of gas onto sample (mmHg)
Psys2I = system manifold pressure after Ith dose of gas onto sample (mmHg)
PsamI = sample pressure after equilibrating Ith dose of gas onto sample (mmHg)
Tsys1I = system manifold temperature before Ith dose of gas onto sample (K)
Tsys2I = system manifold temperature after Ith dose of gas onto sample (K)
Wsam = weight of sample (g)
VI = amount of gas adsorbed per gram of sample (cm3/g STP)
May 06 C-3
Equilibration
Equilibration is reached when the pressure change per equilibration time interval (first
derivative) is less than 0.01% of the average pressure during the interval. Both the first
derivative and average pressure are calculated using the Savitzky-Golay1 convolution method
for polynomial functions. The equations below are those used to compute weighted average
and first derivative, respectively, for the 6th point of an 11-point window.
∠ 36 ( P 11 + P 1 ) + 9 ( P 10 + P 2 ) + 44 ( P 9 + P 3 ) + 69 ( P 8 + P 4 ) + 84 ( P 7 + P 5 ) + 89 ( P 6 )
P AVG = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
429
5 ( P 11 ∠ P 1 ) + 4 ( P 10 ∠ P 2 ) + 3 ( P 9 ∠ P 3 ) + 2 ( P 8 ∠ P 4 ) + ( P 7 ∠ P 5 )
P CHG = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110
where the numerical constants are from the Savitzky-Golay convolution arrays, and
PAVG = average pressure (mmHg)

PCHG = change in pressure (mmHg)
PI = Ith pressure reading taken at equilibrium intervals (mmHg)
After equilibration has been reached, if the user-entered minimum equilibration time from the
Low Pressure Options dialog box has not elapsed, the equilibration continues until the entered
time has elapsed.
If the user entered a non-zero maximum equilibration time from the Low Pressure Options
dialog box, and this time period has elapsed before equilibration has been reached, the
equilibration ends as if equilibration had been reached, and the point is collected.
If a non-zero value that is too small is entered for the maximum equilibration time,
the points are collected before equilibration is reached.
If PAVG is greater than 0.995 times the current Po, equilibration will not take place
until the Minimum equilibration delay for P/Po 0.995 has expired, in addition to the
standard equilibration criteria.
C-4 May 06
Thermal Transpiration Correction
During data reduction, thermal transpiration correction is applied to the data if the user
selected Thermal transpiration correction from the Report Options dialog box. Starting
with the first collected pressure, the following calculations are performed until the pressure
ratio (PC/P) is greater than or equal to 0.99.
2
P × SD × MD 3
Y = ----------------------------------- × 10
2.33 × T
1+G×Y
µ = -----------------------
1+H×Y
1
F = -----------------------------------------------------
2
-
(α × Y ) + (β × Y) + µ
⎧ T ABT⎞ 0.5⎞ ⎫
PC = ⎨ 1 ∠ F ∠ ⎛ F ⎛ ---------- ×P
⎝ ⎝ T RM ⎠ ⎠ ⎬
⎩ ⎭
where:
P = equilibrated collected pressure measured by gauge at temp

TRM (mmHg)
SD = inside diameter of sample tube (mm), from the Report Options
dialog box
MD = thermal transpiration hard sphere diameter of gas (Å), from
the Adsorptive Properties dialog box
T = average temperature [TABT + TRM] / 2 (K)
α = Weber’s coefficient, 0.033
β = Weber’s coefficient, 0.245
G = Weber’s coefficient, 2.5
H = Weber’s coefficient, 2
TABT = analysis bath temperature (K), from the Po and Temperature Options dialog
box
TRM = room temperature (298 K)
PC = corrected equilibrated pressure at temperature TABT (mmHg)
F,Y,µ = intermediate values for subsequent calculations
May 06 C-5
BET Surface Area
For each point designated for surface area calculations, the BET2 transformation is calculated
as follows:
P rel1
B 1 = -----------------------------------------------
-
( 1.0 ∠ P rel1 ) × N ads1
where BI is in units of g/cm3 STP.
A least-squares fit is performed on the (PrelI ,BI) designated pairs where PrelI is the
independent variable and BI is the dependent variable. The following are calculated:
a. Slope (S g/cm3 STP)
b. Y-intercept (YINT g/cm3 STP)
c. Error of the slope (SERR g/cm3 STP)
d. Error of the y-intercept (YIERR g/cm3 STP)
e. Correlation coefficient (Cc)
Using the results of the above calculations, the following can be calculated:
BET Surface Area (m2/g):
23
CSA × ( 6.023 × 10 )
SA BET = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 18 2 2
-
( 22414 cm STP ) × ( 10 nm /m ) × ( S + Y INT )
where
CSA = analysis gas molecular cross-sectional area (nm2), user-entered on the

Adsorptive Properties dialog box
BET C value:
S + Y INT
C = ------------------
-
Y INT
Volume of the Monolayer (cm3/g STP):
1 1
V M = -------------------- = -------------------
C × Y INT S + Y INT
C-6 May 06
Error of the BET Surface Area (m2/g):
2 2 0.5
SA BET × ( S ERR + YI ERR )
BET ERR = --------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Y INT + S
For each point designated for surface area calculations, the Langmuir3 transformation is cal-
culated as follows:
P rel
L I = -----------I
N adsI
where LI is in units of g/cm3 STP
A least-squares fit is performed on the (PrelI ,LI) designated pairs where PrelI is the inde-
pendent variable and LI is the dependent variable. The following are calculated:
a. Slope (S g/cm3 STP)
b. Y-intercept (YINT g/cm3 STP)
c. Error of the slope (SERR g/cm3 STP)
d. Error of the y-intercept (YIERR g/cm3 STP)
Langmuir Surface Area (m2/g):
23
CSA × ( 6.023 × 10 )
SA LAN = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 18 2 2
( 22414 cm STP ) × ( 10 nm /m ) × S
where
CSA = analysis gas molecular cross-sectional area (nm2), user-entered on the

Adsorptive Properties dialog box
May 06 C-7
Volume of the Monolayer (cm3/g STP):
1
V M = ---
S
Langmuir b Value:
b = ( Y INT ) ( V M )
Error of the Langmuir Surface Area (m2/g):
SA LAN × S ERR
LAN ERR = -------------------------------
S
C-8 May 06
t-Plot
For each point designated for t-Plot4 calculations, the following calculations are done:
Thickness for the Ith point (Å):
HP2 HP3
t I = HP1 × -------------------- (Halsey5)
ln ( P relI )
or
HJP3
HJP1
t I = --------------------------------------------- (Harkins and Jura6)
HJP2 ∠ log ( P relI )
where:
tI = thickness for Ith point

HP1 = Halsey parameter #1
HJP1 = Harkins and Jura parameter #1
PrelI = relative pressure for the Ith point (mmHg)
A least-squares analysis fit is performed on the (tI, NadsI) data pairs where tI is the indepen-
dent variable and NadsI is the dependent variable. Only the values of tI between tMIN and
tMAX, the minimum and maximum thickness, are used. The following are calculated:
a. Slope (S cm3/g-Å STP)
b. Y-intercept (YINT cm3/g STP)
c. Error of the slope (SERR cm3/g-Å STP)
d. Error of the Y-intercept (YIERR cm3/g STP)
External Surface Area (m2/g):
3 10 3 3
( S cm /g ∠ A STP ) × ( 10 A/m ) × ( D cm liquid/cm STP )
SA EXT = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 3 3
F × ( 10 cm /m )
May 06 C-9
where
F = surface area correction factor, user-entered on the t-Plot Report Options dialog
box
D = density conversion factor, user-entered on the Adsorptive Properties dialog
box
Micropore Surface Area (m2/g):
SA µP = SA TOT + SA EXT
where SATOT is the BET surface area if the user enabled the BET report exclusively, or Lang-
muir surface area if the user enabled the Langmuir report exclusively. If neither report has
been selected, SATOT is the BET surface area value calculated using a set of default
parameters.
Micropore Volume (cm3 liquid/g):
3 3 3
V µP = ( Y INT cm /g STP ) × ( D cm liquid/cm STP )
C-10 May 06
BJH Pore Volume and Area Distribution
For adsorption data, the relative pressure and volume adsorbed data point pairs collected dur-
ing an analysis must be arranged in reverse order from which the points were collected during
analysis. All calculations are performed based on a desorption model, regardless of whether
adsorption or desorption data are being used.
The data used in these calculations must be in order of strictly decreasing numerical value.
Points which do not meet this criterion are omitted. The remaining data set is composed of
relative pressure (Pr), volume adsorbed (Va) pairs from (Pr1, Va1) to (PrN, VaN) where (PrN =
0, VaN = 0) is assumed as a final point. Each data pair represents an interval boundary (or des-
orption step boundary) for intervals i=1 to i=N-1 where N = total number of (Pr, Va) pairs.
Generally, the desorption branch of an isotherm is used to relate the amount of adsorbate lost
in a desorption step to the average size of pores emptied in the step. A pore loses its con-
densed liquid adsorbate, known as the core of the pore, at a particular relative pressure related
to the core radius by the Kelvin7 equation. After the core has evaporated, a layer of adsorbate
remains on the wall of the pore. The thickness of this layer is calculated for a particular rel-
ative pressure from the thickness equation. This layer becomes thinner with successive
decreases in pressure, so that the measured quantity of gas desorbed in a step is composed of
a quantity equivalent to the liquid cores evaporated in that step plus the quantity desorbed
from the pore walls of pores whose cores have been evaporated in that and previous steps.
Barrett, Joyner, and Halenda8 developed the method (known as the BJH method) which incor-
porates these ideas. The algorithm used on the ASAP 2020 is an implementation of the BJH
method.
Explanation of Terms
A pore filled with condensed liquid nitrogen has three zones:
a. The core - evaporates all at once when the critical pressure for that radius is reached;
the relationship between the core radius and the critical pressure is defined by the
Kelvin equation.
b. The adsorbed layer - composed of adsorbed gas that is stripped off a bit at a time
with each pressure step; the relationship between the thickness of the layer and the
relative pressure is defined by the thickness equation.
May 06 C-11
c. The walls of the cylindrical pore - the diameter of the empty pore is required to
determine the pore volume and pore area. End area is neglected.
pore
a
d
s
o
r c
b o wall
e r
d e
l
a
y
Insignificant e
compared to r
core length
Calculations
The volumes adsorbed (Va) are converted to the liquid equivalent volumes (V1, cm3/g):
VI I = ( Va I ) ( D )
where D is the Density Conversion Factor from the Adsorptive Properties dialog box.
The relative pressure (Pr1) is assumed to be close to unity so that substantially all the pores in
the sample are filled.
The corresponding Kelvin core radius is calculated. Only pores smaller than this size will be
included:
∠A
Rc I = -----------------------------------------
( 1 + F ) [ ln ( Pr I ) ]
where
A = adsorbate property factor (the BJH Adsorptive Options dialog box)

F = fraction of pores open at both ends (from the BJH Adsorption Report Options
dialog box or the BJH Desorption Report Options dialog box); assumed to be
zero for desorption
This radius will be adjusted for the thickness of the adsorbed layer during subsequent calcu-
lation steps.
C-12 May 06
The thickness of the remaining adsorbed layer at this relative pressure is calculated:
HP3
HP2
Tw 1 = HP1 ------------------
ln ( Pr 1 )
where
HP1, HP2, and HP3 are Halsey Parameters 1, 2, and 3 (respectively) from the Halsey Thick-
ness Equation dialog box.
These calculations illustrate the use of the Halsey thickness equation. If the Harkins/Jura
equation was selected, substitute the following wherever the thickness equation appears:
HJ3
HJ1
Tw 1 = ---------------------------------------
HJ2 ∠ log ( Pr 1 )
where
HJ1, HJ2, and HJ3 are Harkins-Jura Parameters 1, 2, and 3 (respectively) from the Harkins-
Jura Thickness Equation dialog box.
The following calculations (a-c) are made for each relative pressure interval based on the
increment of volume desorbed during that interval. The variable I refers to the interval num-
ber, that is I=1 for the first interval from Pr1 to Pr2, and so on. J refers to each previous
interval during which new pores were found. K refers to the total number of intervals in
which new pores have been found. K is also the number of lines reported on the BJH table for
collected data.
a. The thickness of the adsorbed layer at the end of the interval is calculated as follows:
HP3
HP2
Tw I + 1 = HP1 ------------------------
ln ( Pr I + 1 )
(For the last pressure interval from the lowest PrI to zero relative pressure, TwI+1 = 0.)
For the first pressure interval, there are no previously opened pores so the volume
desorbed from walls of previously opened pores is zero (Vd1 = 0), and the remainder
of Step a is skipped.
The change in thickness of the wall layer due to desorption from preivously opened
pores is calculated:
∆Tw = Tw 1 ∠ Tw I + 1
May 06 C-13
The annular cross-sectional area of the wall layer desorbed is calculated for all pre-
viously opened pores:
2 2 ∠ 16 2 2
CSA J = π [ ( Rc j + ∆Tw ) ∠ Rc j ] ( 10 cm /A )
The total volume of gas desorbed from walls of previously opened pores is
calculated:
Vd I = ∑ ( LpJ ) ( CSAaJ ) for all previously opened pores
where LPJ = length of previously opened pores as calculated in Step b(2).
b. The physical processes occurring for this pressure interval are determined as follows:
(1) If VdI is greater than the current increment of volume desorbed (VlI - VlI+1),
desorption from walls only is occurring. Total surface of walls exposed thus far
(cm2/g) is calculated as follows:
∠8
SA W = ∑ π ( LPJ ) ( Davg ) ( 10 J
cm/A ) for all previously opened pores
where
DavgJ = weighted average pore diameter calculated below in Step b(2).
A new layer thickness (∆Tw) that will not overcompensate for the actual volume
desorbed in this interval is calculated:
8
( V1 I ∠ V1 I + 1 ) ( 10 A/cm )
∆Tw = ---------------------------------------------------------------
-
SAw I
Since no cores are evaporated in this pressure interval, no new pores are revealed.
Thus no ending Kelvin radius and average pore diameter are calculated for this
interval. Note that this means the report may have fewer tabulated intervals on
the collected data report than experimental pressure intervals.
(2) If VdI is less than the volume increment desorbed during this interval
( Vl 1 ∠ Vl l + 1 ) , the remaining volume is due to new pores with core evaporation
taking place in this interval. K, the number of intervals with new pores exposed,
is increased by 1. (For the interval from the lowest Pr1 to zero relative pressure,
no new pore volume is calculated and the rest of Step b is skipped.)
The volume desorbed from newly opened pores in this interval is calculated as
follows:
C-14 May 06
Vc I = ( VI I ∠ VI I + 1 ) ∠ Vd I
The Kelvin radius for the end of the interval is calculated as follows:
∠A
Rc K + 1 = -----------------------------------------------
( 1 + F ) [ ln ( Pr I + 1 ) ]
All new pores opened in this interval are represented by one pore having a
length-weighted average pore diameter and a corresponding length sufficient to
account for the required volume of adsorbate. The weighted average pore diam-
eter is calculated as follows:
( 2 ) ( Rc K + Rc K + 1 ) ( Rc K ) ( Rc K + 1 )
D avgK = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 2
-
Rc K + Rc K + 1
DavgK is the diameter of a pore which would have a surface area that is the aver-
age of the areas for pores radius RcK and RcK+1, if its length was the mean of the
lengths at those radii.
The relative pressure corresponding to is calculated as follows:
∠1 ∠ 2A
P avgK = ln -----------------------------------
( 1 + F ) ( D avgK )
The thickness of the adsorbed layer at this pressure is calculated as follows:
HP2 HP3
Tw avgK = HP1 ----------------------
ln ( P avgK )
The decrease in thickness of the wall layer by desorption from the walls of new
pores during the lower portion of the pressure interval is calculated as follows:
∆Td = Tw avgK ∠ TW I + 1
The cross-sectional area of the newly opened pores is calculated as follows:
2
Davg ∠ 16 2 2
CSAc K = ----------------K + ∆Td ( 10 cm /A )
2
May 06 C-15
The length of the newly opened pores is calculated as follows:
Vc I
LP K = ----------------
-
CSAc K
c. Pore diameters and radii are adjusted for the change in thickness of the adsorbed wall
layer during this interval. If new pores were opened during this interval, the average
diameter is adjusted by the change in layer thickness during the second portion of the
desorption interval as follows:
D avgKnew = D avgKold + 2 ( ∆Td )
The layer thickness change during the whole interval is added to diameters of previ-
ously opened pores as follows:
D avgJnew = D avgJold + 2 ( ∆ Tw )
(not including DavgK)
The layer thickness change desorbed during this interval also is added to the radii
corresponding to the ends of the pressure intervals as follows:
Rc Jnew = Rc Jold + ∆Tw
for all except RcK+1.
Steps a to c are repeated for each pressure interval.
After the above calculations have been performed, the diameters corresponding to the
ends of the intervals are calculated as follows:
Dp J = 2 ( rc J )
for all RcJ including RcK+1.
The remaining calculations are based on DP(I), Davg(I), and LP(I). These calculations
are only done for Davg(I) values that fall between the Minimum BJH diameter and the
Maximum BJH diameter specified by the operator on the BJH Adsorption Report
Options dialog box or the BJH Desorption Report Options dialog box.
1) Incremental Pore Volume (VpI, cm3/g):
D avg 2 16 2 2
Vp I = π ( Lp I ) -----------I 10 cm /A
2
C-16 May 06
2) Cumulative Pore Volume (VpCUM(1), cm3/g):
VP CUM(1 ) = ∑ VpJ for ( J ≤ 1 )
3) Incremental Surface Area (SAI, m2/g):
∠2 ∠ 10
SA I = π ( LP I ) ( 10 m/cm ) ( D avgI ) ( 10 m/A )
4) Cumulative Surface Area (SACUM(I), m2/g):
SA CUM10 = ∑ SAJ for J ≤ 1
5) dV/dD pore volume (dV/dDI, cm3/g-A):
VP I
dV/dD I = -------------------------------
Dp I ∠ Dp I + 1
6) dV/dlog(D) pore volume (dV/dlog(D)I, cm3g):
Dp I ⎞
dDv/d log ( D ) I = VP I / log ⎛ --------------
-
⎝ Dp I + 1⎠
7) dA/dD pore area (dA/dDI, m2/g-A):
SA I
dA/dD I = -------------------------------
Dp I ∠ Dp I + 1
8) dA/dlog(D) pore area [dA/dlog(D)I, m2/g]:
Dp I ⎞
dA/d log ( D ) I = SA I / log ⎛ --------------
-
⎝ Dp I + 1⎠
For fixed pore size tables (if selected), the following calculations are performed:
1) Average Fixed Pore Size (DFavgJ, A):
Dp FJ + Dp FJ + 1
DF avgJ = --------------------------------
-
2
calculated for all intervals in the fixed pore size table.
May 06 C-17
For the intervals with between the Minimum BJH diameter and the Maximum
BJH diameter.
2) Cumulative Pore volume (VpFCUMI, cm3/g):
VpF CUMI = INTERP ( DpF I + 1 )
where INTERP(x) is the value interpolated from the function X = DpJ+1 and Y =
VPCUMJ, using an AKIMA semi-spline interpolation.
3) Incremental Pore Volume (VpFI, cm3/g):
VpF I = VpF CUMI ∠ VpF CUMI ∠ 1
where VpFCUM0 = 0.
4) Cumulative Surface Area (SAFCUMI, m2/g):
SAF CUMI = INTERP ( DpF I + 1 )
where INTERP(x) is the value interpolated from the function X = DpJ+1 and Y =
SACUMJ.
5) Incremental Surface Area (SAFI, m2/g):
SAF I = SAF CUMI ∠ SAF CUMI ∠ 1
where SAFCUM0 = 0.
6) dV/dD pore volume (dV/dDpFI, cm3/g-A)):
dV/dDpF I = INTERP ( DpF I + 1 )
where INTERP(x) is the value interpolated from the function X = DavgJ and Y =
dV/dDJ.
7) dV/dlog(D) pore volume [dV/dlog(DpF)I, cm3/g]:
dV/d log ( D pF I ) = INTERP ( DpF I + 1 )
dV/dlog(D)J.
C-18 May 06
8) dA/dD pore area (dA/dDpFI, m2/g-A):
dA/dDpF I = INTERP ( DpF I + 1 )
dA/dDJ.
9) dA/dlog(D) pore area [dA/dlog(DpFI), m2/g]:
dA/d log ( D pF I ) = INTERP ( DpF I + 1 )
dA/dlog(D)J.
Compendium of Variables
Va = quantity adsorbed expressed as a volume (cm3/g STP)

Vl = liquid equivalent volume of volume adsorbed (cm3/g)
D = density conversion factor from the Adsorptive Properties dialog box
(cm3/cm3 STP)
Pr = relative pressure
Dp = pore (or core) diameter (A)
Rc = Kelvin radius (A) of core
A = adsorbate property factor; from the BJH Adsorptive Options dialog box
F = fraction of pores open at both ends; from the BJH Adsorption Report
Options dialog box or the BJH Desorption Report Options dialog box
∆Tw = thickness of adsorbed layer desorbed during interval (A)
Tw = thickness of remaining adsorbed wall (A)
HP1, HP2, and HP3 are Halsey Parameters from the Halsey Thickness Equation dialog box.
HJ1, HJ2, and HJ3 are Harkins and Jura Parameters from the Harkins/Jura Thickness Equa-
tion dialog box.
Vd = volume of gas desorbed from walls of previously opened pores (cm3/g)

Davg = average pore diameter (A)
CSAa = annular cross-sectional area of the desorbed layer (cm2)
CSAc = cross-sectional area of opening of newly opened pores (cm2)
SAw = total surface area of walls exposed (cm2/g)
∆Td = thickness of layer desorbed from walls of newly opened pores (A)
Vc = volume desorbed from cores of newly opened pores (cm3/g)
Lp = length of pore (cm/g)
May 06 C-19
Horvath-Kawazoe
A relative pressure lower limit is determined such that L-d0 never equals zero. All pressure
points less than this limit are discarded. For each collected relative pressure point, values of L
are chosen in an iterative manner, and the relative pressure (P/Po) determined by solving one
of the following equations:
• Slit Pore Geometry (original Horvath-Kawazoe)

• Cylinder Pore Geometry (Saito/Foley)
• Sphere Pore Geometry (Cheng/Yang)
Slit Pore Geometry (original HK)
When you use the original Horvath-Kawazoe9 method, the following equation is solved for
each value of P. The value of L is determined when the solved-for relative pressure is within
0.1% of the collected absolute pressure.
32 4 4 4 10 4 10
K IP × 10 JA /J cm
P- = ------ σ σ σ σ
ln ------ - × -------------------------------------------------
- × --------------------------------3 ∠ --------------------------------9 ∠ --------------3- + ---------------9
Po RT 4
σ × ( L ∠ 2 × d0 ) 3 × ( L ∠ d0 ) 9 × ( L ∠ d0 ) 3 × d0 9 × d0
where
K = Avogadro’s number (6.023 x 1023)

R = gas constant (8.31441 x 107 ergs/mole K)
T = analysis bath temperature (K), from an entered or calculated
value on the Po and Temperature Options dialog box
ZS + ZA
σ = gas solid nuclear separation at zero interaction energy (Å), ----------------
-
2
where:
ZS = sample equilibrium diameter at zero interaction energy (Å) from the
Horvath-Kawazoe Physical Properties dialog box
ZA = zero interaction energy diameter from the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical

Properties dialog box
DA + DS ( A )
d0 = -----------------------------
-
2
where:
DA = molecular diameter (Å) from the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical
DS = diameter of sample atom (Å) from the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical

dialog box
C-20 May 06
L = pore width (nucleus to nucleus) (Å)

P = equilibrium pressure (mmHg)
Po = saturation pressure (mmHg)
IP = interaction parameter (10-43 ergs-cm4) from the Horvath-Kawazoe
Report Options dialog box
Cylinder Pore Geometry (Saito/Foley)
When you use the Saito-Foley10 method, the following equation is solved for each value of P.
The value of L is determined when the solved-for relative pressure is within 0.1% of the
collected absolute pressure.
∞
P 3 πK IP × 10 JA /J cm-
32 4 4
1 ⎛ d 2k ⎧ 21 d 10 d 4⎫
ln ⎛ -------⎞ = --- ------- × ------------------------------------------------- × ∑ ----------- 1 ∠ -----0⎞ × ⎨ ------ α k ⎛ -----0⎞ ∠ β k ⎛ -----0⎞ ⎬
⎝ Po⎠ 4 RT k + 1⎝ rp⎠ ⎝ rp⎠ ⎝ rp⎠
⎩ 32
4
d0 k=0
⎭
where
K = Avogadro’s number (6.023 x 1023)

T = analysis bath temperature (K), from an entered or calculated
value on the Po and Temperature Options dialog box
IP = interaction parameter (10-43 ergs-cm4) from the Horvath-Kawazoe Report
Options dialog box
DA + DS ( A )
d0 = ---------------------------
-
2
where:
DA = molecular diameter (Å) from the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical
dialog box
∠ 4.5 ∠ k 2
αk = ⎛ -----------------------⎞ α k ∠ 1 ,α 0 = 1.0
⎝ k ⎠
∠ 1.5 ∠ k 2
βk = ⎛ -----------------------⎞ β k ∠ 1 ,β 0 = 1.0
⎝ k ⎠
L
rp = radius of the cylindrical pore, ---
2
May 06 C-21
Sphere Pore Geometry (Cheng/Yang)
When you use the Cheng/Yang11 method, the following equation is solved for each value of
P. The value of L is determined when the solved-for relative pressure is within 0.1% of the
collected absolute pressure.
* * 3 32 4 4
P 6 ( N 1 ε 12 + N 2 ε 22 )L × 10 J A /J cm
ln ⎛ -------⎞ = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
⎝ Po⎠ RT ( L ∠ d 0 )
3
d 6 1 1 d 12 1 1
∠ ⎛ -----0⎞ ⎛ ------ T 1 + --- T 2⎞ + ⎛ -----0⎞ ⎛ ------ T 3 + ------ T 4⎞
⎝ L ⎠ ⎝ 12 8 ⎠ ⎝ L ⎠ ⎝ 90 80 ⎠
where

T = analysis bath temperature (K), from an entered or calculated value on the Po
and Temperature Options dialog
DA + DS ( A )
d0 = ---------------------------
-
2
where:
DA = molecular diameter (Å) from the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical Properties
dialog
dialog
N1 = 4π L2 NS, where NS = number of sample atoms/cm2 at monolayer
N2 = 4π (L - d0)2 NA, where Ns = number of gas molecules/cm2
2
AS 6 × MC × α S × α A
e*12 -6 , where A S = --------------------------------------------
= ----------- -
4d S αS αA
----- + ------
χS χA
2
AA 3 × MC × α A × χ A
ε*22 = -------------
-6 , where A A = --------------------------------------------
-
4D A 2
1 1
T1 = --------------------3 ∠ -------------------3
(1 ∠ S) (1 + S)
1 1
T2 = -------------------2 ∠ --------------------2
(1 + S) (1 ∠ S)
1 1
T3 = --------------------9 ∠ -------------------9
(1 ∠ S) (1 + S)
C-22 May 06
1 1
T4 = -------------------8 ∠ --------------------8
(1 + S) (1 ∠ S)
L∠d
where S = ----------------0
L
Cheng/Yang Correction
This factor corrects for the nonlinearity of the isotherm. It adds an additional term to the
equations for the different geometrics:
P 1 1
ln ⎛ -------⎞ = G ( L ) ∠ 1 ∠ --- ln ⎛ -------------⎞
⎝ Po⎠ θ ⎝ 1 ∠ θ⎠
where
G(L) = one of the Horvath-Kawazoe equations given above

θ = degree of void filling; θ is estimated by first computing the monolayer
capacity (Vm) with the Langmuir equation over the range of data points from
relative pressure 0.02 to 0.2 or the maximum relative pressure included in the
Horvath-Kawazoe analysis. θ is computed as the volume adsorbed over Vm.
Interaction Parameter
The interaction parameter (IP) results from the following calculations:
The Kirkwood-Muller dispersion coefficients -
2
6 × MC × α S × α A
A S = --------------------------------------------
-
αS αA
----- + ------
χS χA
2
3 × MC × α A × χ A
A A = --------------------------------------------
-
2
where
MC2 = kinetic energy of electron (0.8183 x 10-6 erg)

αS = polarizability of sample atoms (cm3)
αA = polarizability of gas molecule (cm3)
χS = diamagnetic susceptability of sample atom (cm3)
May 06 C-23
χA = diamagnetic susceptability of gas molecule (cm3)
IP = ( N A × A A ) + ( N S × A S )
where:
NA = number of gas molecules/cm2 at monolayer from the Horvath-Kawazoe

Physical Properties dialog
NS = number of sample atoms/cm2 from the Horvath-Kawazoe Physical Properties
dialog
Refer to Interaction Parameter Components later in this Appendix for recommended

values.
Additional Calculations
Based on the previous calculations, the following can be calculated:
Adjusted Pore Width (Å):

(Shell to Shell)
AL I = L I ∠ DS
Cumulative Pore Volume (cm3/g):
V CUMI = V I × D
where
D = density conversion factor (cm3 liquid/cm3 STP) on the Adsorptive Properties

dialog box
dV/dD Pore Volume (cm3/g-Å):
dV V CUMI ∠ V CUMI ∠ 1
--------- = ---------------------------------------
-
dD I AL I ∠ AL I ∠ 1
C-24 May 06
Median Pore Width (Å):
V CUM
V HALF = --------------N
2
log ( D G ) ∠ log ( D L )
D MED = 10 log ( D L ) + [ log ( V HALF ) ∠ log ( V L ) ] × -----------------------------------------------
log ( V G ) ∠ log ( V L )
where
VCUMN = total cumulative pore volume (VCUMI) for points designated for Horvath-
Kawazoe calculations
VHALF = 50% of total cumulative pore volume
VL = cumulative pore volume (VCUMI) for first point less than VHALF
VG = cumulative pore volume (VCUMI) for first point greater than VHALF
DL = pore width (LI) that corresponds to VL
DG = pore width (LI) that corresponds to VG
May 06 C-25
Interaction Parameter Components
Table C-1. Interaction Parameters
Interaction
Bath Parameter
Temperature Calculated
Gas (K) Sample Type Value*
Argon 87.3 Carbon (Ross/Olivier value) 2.61
Carbon (Horvath/Kawazoe value) 5.89
Zeolite 3.19
Carbon 298.15 Carbon (Ross/Olivier value) 4.20
Dioxide Carbon (Horvath/Kawazoe value) 9.20
Zeolite 5.08
273.15 Carbon (Ross/Olivier value) 4.34
Zeolite 5.22
194.65 Carbon (Ross/Olivier value) 4.72
Zeolite 5.60
Nitrogen 77.15 Carbon (Ross/Olivier value) 2.84
Zeolite 3.49
*The interaction parameter is entered in the Horvath-Kawazoe Report Options dialog in the
following field:
Interaction parameter: (calculated value) x 10-43 ergs-cm4
The following values were used to calculate the values in Table C-1.
Carbon-Graphite Zeolite
DS = 3.40 DS = 3.04
NS = 3.845 x 1015 NS = 3.75 x 1015
χS = 1.05 x 10-29 (Ross/Olivier) χS = 1.94 x 10-29
13.5 x 10-29 (Horvath/Kawazoe, implicit) αS = 0.85 x 10-24
αS = 1.02 x 10-24
Nitrogen Argon
DA = 3.00 DA = 2.95
ΝA = 6.71 x 1014 ΝA = 7.608 x 1014
χA = 3.6 x 10-29 χA = 3.22 x 10-29
αA = 1.76 x 10-24 αA = 1.63 x 10-24
C-26 May 06
Carbon Dioxide
DA = 3.23
NA = 4.567 x 1014 (25 ºC)
5.45 x 1014 (0 ºC)
7.697 x 1014 (-78 ºC)
χA = 5.0 x 10-29
αA = 2.7 x 10-24
DA values are from van der Waal’s constant.

NA values are from liquid densities.
χ and α values are derived from data found in Ross and Olivier12.
The physical parameters referenced in Saito/Foley are as follows:
Aluminophosphate Aluminosilicate
DS = 2.60 DS = 2.76
NS = 1.48 x 1015 Ns = 1.31 x 1015
χS = 1.3 x 10-29 χS = 1.3 x 10-29
αS = 2.5 x 10-24 αS = 2.5 x 10-24
May 06 C-27
Dubinin-Radushkevich
The Dubinin-Radushkevich13 equation is as follows:
2 2
B×T Po
log ( V ) = log ( Vo ) ∠ --------------- × log -------
β P
where:
V = volume adsorbed at equilibrium pressure (cm3/g STP)

Vo = the micropore capacity (cm3/g STP)
Po = saturation vapor pressure of gas at temperature T (mmHg)
B = a constant
β = the affinity coefficient of analysis gas relative to Po gas
(for this application β is taken to be 1)
T = analysis bath temperature (K), from the Po and Temperature
Options dialog box
For each point designated for Dubinin-Radushkevich calculations, the following calculations
are done:
LV = log (V)
2
Po
LP = log ⎛ -------⎞
⎝ P⎠
The intercept, log(Vo) can be found by performing a least-squares fit on the (LP,LV) desig-
nated pairs where LP is the independent variable and LV is the dependent variable. Assuming
the adsorption of gas is restricted to a monolayer, Vo is the monolayer capacity. Based on this
assumption, the following are calculated:
a. Slope (S cm3/g STP)
b. Y-intercept (YI cm3/g STP)
c. Error of the slope (SERR cm3/g STP)
d. Error of the y-intercept (YIERR cm3/g STP)
C-28 May 06
Monolayer Capacity (cm3/g STP):
Vo = 10YI
Error of Monolayer Capacity (cm3/g STP):
VoERR = Vo x (10YIERR - 1.0)
Micropore surface area (m2/g):
23
σ × Vo × ( 6.023 × 10 )
SDP = --------------------------------------------------------------------
3 18 2 2
22414 cm × ( 10 nm /m )
where
σ = molecular cross sectional area of gas (nm2)from the Adsorptive Properties

dialog box
May 06 C-29
Dubinin-Astakhov
The Dubinin-Astakhov equation is a follows:
N N
RT Po
log ( V ) = log ( Vo ) ∠ --------- × log -------
βE 0 P
where
V = volume adsorbed at equilibrium pressure (cm3/g STP)

Vo = the micropore capacity (cm3/g STP)
Po = saturation vapor pressure of gas at temperature T (mmHg)
T = analysis bath temperature (K)
R = the gas constant (0.0083144 kJ/mol)
E0 = characteristic energy (kJ/mole)
N = Astakhov exponent, may be optimized or user entered from the Dubinin
Report Options dialog box
β = the affinity coefficient of the analysis gas relative to the Po gas, from the
Dubinin Adsorptive Options dialog box
For each point designated for Dubinin-Astakhov calculations, the following calculations are
done:
LV = log(V)
N
Po
LP = log -------
P
A least-squares fit is performed on the (LP,LV) designated pairs where LP is the independent
variable and LV is the dependent variable. If the user selected yes for the Optimize Astakhov
Exponent prompt, a systematic search for the optimum value of N is conducted by recalcu-
lating the linear regression and selecting the value of N that gives the smallest standard error
of the y-intercept. The exponent N is optimized to within 10-4. If the optimum value for N is
not found in this range, an exponent of 2 is used. The following are calculated:
a. Slope (S cm3/g STP)
b. Y-intercept (YI cm3/g STP)
c. Error of the slope (SERR cm3/g STP)
d. Error of the y-intercept (YIERR cm3/g STP)
f. Optimized Astakhov exponent (N)
C-30 May 06
Monolayer Capacity (cm3/g STP):
V0 = 10YI
Micropore Volume (cm3/g):
WI = (VI x D)
where
D = density conversion factor (cm3 liquid/cm3 STP) from the Adsorptive

Limiting Micropore Volume (cm3/g):
W0 = (V0 x D)
where
D = density conversion factor (cm3 liquid/cm3 STP) from the Adsorptive

Error of Limiting Micropore Volume (cm3/g):
W0ERR = W0 x (10YIERR - 1.0)
Characteristic Energy (KJ/mole):
2.303 × R × T
E = ------------------------------------
1/N
-
β ( 2.303 × S )
Modal Equivalent Pore Width (nm):
1/3
⎧ 3N 1/N
k ⎫
w mode = 2 × ⎨ ---------------- × ----- ⎬
⎩ 3N + 1 E0 ⎭
where
k = the interaction constant for benzene, 8.969 kJ•nm3/mol
May 06 C-31
Maximum Differential Pore Volume (cm3/g-nm):
This value is also known as frequency of the mode
1/3N 1/3
dV - 3N + 1 E 3N + 1
--------------- Max = 0.5 × ( 3N + 1 ) × W o × ---------------- × -----0 × exp ⎛ ∠ ---------------- ⎞
dw mode 3N k ⎝ 3N ⎠
Mean Equivalent Pore Width (nm):
k- 1/3
----
E0
w mean = 2 × --------------------------
3N + 1
Γ ⎛ ----------------⎞
⎝ 3N ⎠
Micropore surface area (m2/g):
1/3
E 3N + 1
SDA = 1000 × 2.0 × W 0 × -----0 × Γ ⎛ ----------------⎞
k ⎝ 3N ⎠
Γ is calculated by a polynomial approximation over the domain 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 as follows:
Γ(x+1) = 1+b1x + b2x2 + b3x3 + b4x4 + b5x5 + b6x6 + b7x7 + b8x8 + ε(x) | ε(x) | ≤ 3 x 10-7
where
b1 = -0.57719 1652
b2 = 0.98820 5891
b3 = -0.89705 6937
b4 = 0.91820 6857
b5 = -0.75670 4078
b6 = 0.48219 9394
b7 = -0.19352 7818
b8 = 0.03586 8343
and where
3N + 1
x + 1 = ⎛ ----------------⎞
⎝ 3N ⎠
C-32 May 06
Equivalent Pore Width (nm):
1/3N
k N
∠ ⎛ -----⎞
⎝ E 0⎠
w i = 2 × ------------------------------------------
ln ( W i ) ∠ ln ( W 0 )
dV/dw Pore Volume (cm3/g-nm):
dV k N w ∠( 3N + 1 ) k N w ∠3N
-------- = 0.5 × W 0 × 3N × ----- × ⎛ -----i⎞ × exp ∠ ⎛ ----- ⎞ × ⎛ -----i⎞
dw i E0 ⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ E0 ⎠ ⎝ 2⎠
MP-Method
For each point designated for MP-method14 calculations, the following calculations are done:
Thickness for the Ith point (Å):
HP2 HP3
t I = HP1 × -------------------- (Halsey6)
ln ( P relI )
or
HJP3
HJP1
t I = --------------------------------------------- (Harkins and Jura7)
HJP2 ∠ log ( P relI )
where:
tI = thickness for Ith point

PrelI = relative pressure for the Ith point (mmHg)
May 06 C-33
With the (tI,VI) data pairs, the Akima semi-spline interpolation method is used to interpolate
volume adsorbed values based on thickness values that are evenly spaced 0.2 Angstrom apart
starting at the first outlier point. Outliers are defined as those points have the maximum
instantaneous slope within an iteratively shrinking subset of all points. The remaining pore
surface area calculation result is the slope of the line defined by two consecutive interpolated
points. The slopes of each pair of consecutive points from the origin to the last point must be
monotonically decreasing and non-negative. With the interpolated points set the following
can be calculated:
Average pore hydraulic radius (Å):
tI + tI ∠ 1
R I = ------------------
-
2
Remaining pore surface area for the Ith point (m2/g):
∠6 3 3
( V I ∠ V I ∠ 1 ) × ( D × 10 m /cm )
S I = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
∠ 10
-
( t I ∠ t I ∠ 1 ) × 10 m/A
where
D = density conversion factor (cm3 liquid/cm3 STP) on the Adsorptive Properties

dialog box
Incremental pore surface area occluded for the Ith point (m2/g):
S INCI = S I ∠ 1 ∠ S I
Cumulative pore surface area occluded for the Ith point (m2/g):
S CUMI = S INCI + S INC I ∠ 1 + … + S INC1
dA/dR pore surface area for the Ith point (m2/g-Å):
dA S INCI
-------- = -------------------
-
dR I tI ∠ tI ∠ 1
Incremental pore volume occluded for the Ith point (cm3/g):
4 2 2 ∠8
V INCI = ( S INCI × 10 cm /m ) × ( R I × 10 cm/Å )
C-34 May 06
Cumulative pore volume occluded for the Ith point (cm3/g):
V CUMI = V INC I + V INCI ∠ 1 + … + V INC1
dV/dR pore volume for the Ith point (cm3/g-Å):
dV- V INC I
------- = -------------------
-
dR I tI ∠ tI ∠ 1
Freundlich Isotherm
The Freundlich isotherm has the form:
Q-
----- 1/m
= CP
QS
where
Q = quantity of gas adsorbed

QS = quantity of gas in a monolayer
C = temperature-dependent constant
m = temperature-dependent constant
The pressure is absolute; typically, m > 1. In terms of quantity adsorbed,
1/m
Q = Q S CP
Taking the log of both sides yields:
1
log Q = log Q S C + ---- log P
m
May 06 C-35
Temkin Isotherm
The Temkin isotherm has the form,
Q RT
------ = --------- ln ( A 0 P )
QS q0 α
where
Q = quantity of gas adsorbed

QS = quantity of gas in a monolayer
q0 = the differential heat of adsorption at zero surface coverage
A0 = a0 exp {-q0/RT}, where α0 and a0 are adjustable constants
In terms of quantity adsorbed,
RTQ P
Q = --------------S ln A 0 + ln ⎛ -------⎞
q0 α ⎝ Po⎠
Thus, the plot of the natural log of absolute pressure vs. quantity adsorbed yields a straight
line with slope RTQS/q0 and intercept (ln A0) RTQS/q0α.
C-36 May 06
DFT (Density Functional Theory)
The adsorption isotherm is known to convey a great deal of information about the energetic
heterogeneity and geometric topology of the sample under study. The data of physical adsorp-
tion have been used for many years as the basis for methods to characterize the surface area
and porosity of adsorbents. Real solid surfaces rarely approach ideal uniformity of structure.
It is accepted that in general, the surface of even a nonporous material presents areas of
greater or lesser attraction for adsorbed molecules.
This energetic heterogeneity greatly affects the shape of the adsorption isotherm with the
result that simple theories such as the Langmuir and BET formulas can, at best, give only
approximate estimates of surface area. Porous solids virtually are never characterized by a
single pore dimension, but instead exhibit a more or less wide distribution of sizes. The
observed adsorption isotherm for a typical material is therefore the convolution of an adsorp-
tion process with the distribution of one or more properties which affect that process. This
was first stated mathematically by Ross and Olivier12 for the case of surface energy distribu-
tion and has become known as the integral equation of adsorption.
The Integral Equation of Adsorption
In a general form for a single component adsorptive, the integral equation of adsorption can
be written as
Q ( p ) = ∫ da db dc…q ( p, a, b, c… ) f ( a, b, c… ) (1)
where
Q(p) = the total quantity adsorbed per unit weight at pressure p,

a,b,c,... = a set of distributed properties,
f(a,b,c,...) = the distribution function of the properties, and
q(p,a,b,c,...) = the kernel function describing the adsorption isotherm on unit
surface of material with fixed properties a,b,c,...
Equation (1), a Fredholm integral of the first kind, is a member of a class of problems known
as ill-posed, in that there are an infinite number of functional combinations inside the integral
that will provide solutions. Even when the kernel function is known, experimental error in the
data can make solving for even a single distribution function a difficult task. Solving for mul-
tiple distribution functions requires more data than provided by a single adsorption isotherm.
May 06 C-37
Application to Surface Energy Distribution
Under certain conditions, an energetically heterogeneous surface may be characterized by a

distribution of adsorptive energies. The conditions are that the sample is not microporous, i.e.,
that adsorption is taking place on essentially a free surface with no pore filling processes at
least to about 0.2 relative pressure. Secondly, that each energetically distinct patch contributes
independently to the total adsorption isotherm in proportion to the fraction of the total surface
that it represents. This condition is satisfied if the patches are relatively large compared to an
adsorptive molecule, or if the energy gradient along the surface is not steep. In mathematical
terms, this concept is expressed by the integral equation of adsorption in the following form.
Q ( p ) = ∫ dε q ( p, ε ) f ( ε ) (2)
where
Q(p) = the experimental quantity adsorbed per gram at pressure p,

q(p,e) = the quantity adsorbed per unit area at the same pressure, p, on
an ideal free surface of energy e, and
f(e) = the total area of surface of energy e in the sample.
The exact form of the energy-dependent term depends on the form of the model isotherms
expressed in the kernel function and is provided in the model description (refer to Appendix
G for model descriptions).
Application to Pore Size Distribution
Similarly, a sample of porous material may be characterized by its distribution of pore sizes.
It is assumed in this case that each pore acts independently. Each pore size present then con-
tributes to the total adsorption isotherm in proportion to the fraction of the total area of the
sample that it represents. Mathematically, this relation is expressed by
Q ( p ) = ∫ dH q ( p, H ) f ( H ) (3)
where
Q(p) = the experimental quantity adsorbed at pressure p,

q(p,H) = the quantity adsorbed per unit area at the same pressure, p, in
an ideal pore of size H, and
f(H) = the total area of pores of size H in the sample.
Numerical values for the kernel functions in the form of model isotherms can be derived from
modern statistical mechanics such as density functional theory or molecular simulations, or
can be calculated from one of various classical theories based on the Kelvin equation. Several
types are found in the models library.
C-38 May 06
Performing the Deconvolution
The integrations in equations (2) and (3) are carried out over all surface energies or pore sizes
in the model. The functions q(p,e) and q(p,H), which we call the kernel functions, are con-
tained in numeric form as model isotherms. Because, in general, there is no analytic solution
for equation (1), the problem is best solved in a discrete form; the integral equation for any
distributed property Z becomes a summation:
Q(p) = ∑ q ( p, Z i ) f ( Z i ) (4)
i
Given a set of model isotherms, q(p,Z), from a model chosen from the models library and an
experimental isotherm, Q(p), contained in a sample information file, the software determines
the set of positive values f(Z) that most nearly, in a least squares sense, solves equation (4).
The distributed property, surface energy or pore size, is then displayed on the Report Options
dialog box as a selection of tables or graphs.
Regularization
DFT allows a selectable regularization (also referred to as smoothing) constraint to be applied

during the deconvolution process to avoid over-fitting in the case of noisy data or ill-fitting
models. The method used is based on co-minimization of the second derivative of the distri-
bution. The relative weight given to this term is determined by the value of the regularization
parameter, which is set on the DFT Pore Size or Surface Energy dialog box and also is shown
in the header of reports. The value of the regularization parameter varies from zero (for no
second derivative constraint) to ten (indicating a weight equal to minimizing the residuals), or
even larger. When the distribution and residuals obtained change little with the value of the
regularization parameter, it indicates that the chosen model provides a good representation of
the data. Conversely, a large sensitivity to the regularization parameter might indicate inade-
quate data or a poor choice of model to represent the data.
May 06 C-39
Summary Report
The following calculations and the results of previous calculations (as noted) are used to gen-
erate the summary report:
a. BET Surface Area
See BET Surface Area Calculations
b. Langmuir Surface Area
See Langmuir Surface Area Calculations
c. Single Point Surface Area (m2/g)
23
[ Va × ( 1 ∠ Pr ) ] × CSA × ( 6.023 × 10 -)
S 1PT = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 18 2 2
22414 cm STP × 10 nm /m
where
Pr = pressure closest to 0.3 of the relative pressure points designated for surface area
calculations.
Va = volume corresponding to Pr
d. Micropore Area
See t-Plot calculations.
e. Micropore Volume
See t-Plot calculations.
f. Horvath-Kawazoe Maximum Pore Volume
See Horvath-Kawazoe Calculations
g. Horvath-Kawazoe Median Pore Diameter
See Horvath-Kawazoe Calculations
h. Dubinin-Radushkevich Micropore Surface Area
See Dubinin-Radushkevich Calculations
i. Dubinin-Radushkevich Monolayer Capacity
See Dubinin-Radushkevich Calculations
C-40 May 06
j. Dubinin-Astakhov Micropore Surface Area
See Dubinin-Astakhov Calculations
k. Dubinin-Astakhov Micropore Volume
See Dubinin-Astakhov Calculations
l. MP-Method Cumulative Surface Area of Pores
MPSTOT = SCUMI, (see MP-method Calculations) for the last collected data point used
in the MP-method Calculations, and the range of hydraulic pore radii over which the
cumulative surface area was computed.
m. MP-Method Cumulative Pore Volume of Pores
MPVTOT = VCUMI, (see MP-method Calculations) for the last collected data point
used in the MP-method Calculations, and the range of hydraulic pore radii over
which the cumulative pore volume was computed.
n. Average Pore Hydraulic Radius (A)
MPV TOT ∠6 3 10
MP DAVER = -------------------- × 10 m /cm × 10 Å/m
MPSTOT
May 06 C-41
SPC Report Variables
Regressions Chart Variables
The line of best fit for the Regression Chart is calculated by the usual Least Squares methd.
(Refer to BASIC Scientific Subroutines Vol II, by F.R. Ruckdeschel, Copyright 1981 BYTE
Publications/McGraw Hill, p. 16.) If there is only a single point or all N points have the same
x-value, there can be no line of best fit in the standard form.
Σx
XAve = ---------i
N
Σy
YAve = ---------i
N
Σ ( x i ∠ XAve ) ( y i ∠ YAve )
Slope = -----------------------------------------------------------------
2
-
Σ ( x i ∠ XAve )
The coefficient of Correlation for this line is also calculated in the usual way. (Refer to Math-
ematical Handbook for Scientists and Engineers, by Granino A. Korn and Theresa M. Korn,
Copyright 1961, 1968 McGraw Hill, Sec. 18.4.)
2
Σ ( x i ∠ XAve )
σx = -------------------------------------
-
N
2
Σ ( y i ∠ YAve )
σy = -------------------------------------
N
Σ ( x i ∠ XAve ) ( y i ∠ YAve )
Cov ( x, y ) = -----------------------------------------------------------------
-
N
Cov ( x, y )
Correlation Coefficient = -----------------------
σx σy
C-42 May 06
Control Chart Variables
Σy
Mean = ---------i
N
2
StdDev = Σ ( y ∠ Mean )-
------------------------------------
N∠1
StdDev
CoefVar = -------------------
Mean
PlusNSig = Mean + n ⋅ StdDev
MinusNSig = Mean ∠ n ⋅ StdDev
May 06 C-43
References
1. Savitzky, A. and Golay, M.J.E., Anal. Chem. 36, 1627 (1964).
2. Brunauer, S.; Emmett, P.H.; and Teller, E., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 60, 309 (1938).
3. Langmuir, I., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 38, 2267 (1916); J. Am. Chem. Soc. 40, 1361 (1918);
Phys. Rev 8, 149 (1916).
4. deBoer, J.H., et al, J. Catalysis 3, 32, 38, 44, 268 (1964); J. Catalysis 4, 319, 643, 649
(1965); Cranston, R. and Inkley, F., Adv. Catalysis 9, 143 (1957).
5. Halsey, G., J. Chem. Phys. 16, 931-937 (1948).
6. Harkins, W.D. and Jura, G., J. Chem. Phys. 11, 431 (1943).
7. Kelvin, J. (published under the name of Sir William Thomson), Phil. Mag. 42, 448-452
(1871).
8. Barrett, E.P.; Joyner, L.S.; and Halenda, P.P., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 73, 373-380 (1951).
9. Horvath, G. and Kawazoe, K., J. Chem. Eng. Japan 16(6), 470 (1983).
10. Saito, A. and Foley, H.C., AlChE Journal 37(3), 429 (1991).
11. Cheng, Linda S. and Yang, Ralph T., Chemical Engineering Science 49(16), 2599-2609
(1994).
12. Ross and Olivier, J.P., “On Physical Adsorption,” J. Wiley and Sons, New York (1964).
13. Dubinin, M., Carbon 21, 359 (1983); Dubinin, M., Progress in Surface and Membrane
Science 9, 1, Academic Press, New York (1975); Dubinin, M. and Astakhov, V., Adv.
Chem. Ser. 102, 69 (1971); Lamond, T. and Marsh, H., Carbon 1, 281, 293 (1964); Medek,
J., Fuel 56, 131 (1977); Polanyi, M., Trans. Faraday Soc. 28, 316 (1932); Radushkevich,
L., Zh. fiz. Kemi. 33, 2202 (1949); Stoeckli, H., et al, Carbon 27, 125 (1989).
14. Mikhail, R., Brunauer, S. and Bodor, E., J. Colloid and Interface Sci. 24, 45 (1968).
C-44 May 06
Appendix D ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
D. TESTING FOR LEAKS
This appendix contains general instructions for testing the ASAP 2020 and the SmartVac
degasser (if installed) for leaks. If the analyzer successfully performs a blank tube analysis
using nitrogen, you do not need to test for leaks.
These procedures may be performed individually or sequentially. Record pressure readings on

the Valve Test Data Sheet included at the end of this appendix. After you finish testing for
leaks, replace any leaking valves.
You will need the following items to perform tests:
• Stopwatch
• Valve Test Data Sheet (included in this appendix)
Testing Individual Valves
Analysis Valves
This procedure removes differential pressure from all valves in the analysis system and estab-
lishes that there are no leaks in the analysis system. It should be performed before testing for
individual valves.
1. Ensure that the analyzer is idle.
2. Close the regulator outlet valve for each gas supply line to the analyzer.
3. Attach the Po tube to the Po port.
4. Insert a plug (or attach a clean, empty sample tube) into the analysis port.
5. Insert a plug into the vapor inlet (if the vapor option is not installed).
Mar 05 D-1
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix D
6. Select Show Instrument Schematic, then Enable Manual Control from the Unit menu.
(For clarity, this illustration shows only the valve portion of the schematic.) Table D-1 lists
descriptions of the analysis valves.
Table D-1. Analysis Valve Descriptions
Valve Description
1 Unrestricted vacuum
2 Restricted vacuum
3 Helium inlet port valve
4 Restricted analysis gas
5 Unrestricted analysis gas
7 Lower manifold isolation
8 Vapor inlet port
9 Sample port
10 Restricted Psat tube port
11 Unrestricted Psat tube port
P1 through P6 Gas inlet port valves
PS Supply valve for physisorption gases
PV Vacuum valve for physisorption gases
7. Open valves 1, 2, 4, 5, and 7; close all other manifold valves.
8. Open valve PS.
9. Open valve 3 and allow the pressure to drop below 1000 µmHg (1 mmHg).
10. Repeat Step 9 for valves P1 through P6.
11. Open valve 9.
D-2 Mar 05
12. Open valves 10 and 11.
13. Open valve 8.
14. Open valve PV.
15. Allow the system to evacuate for a minimum of one hour; a four-hour or overnight
evacuation is preferred.
16. Obtain the manifold outgassing rate:
Use the pressure transducer with the lowest range. For example, if you have a 1
mmHg transducer, it is the first choice. Next is the 10 mmHg transducer. If you have
neither, use the Vacuum Gauge.
a. Close valves 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, and P1 through P6.
b. Evacuate manifold for another 30 minutes.
c. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for the manifold.
d. Close valves 1 and 2.
e. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for the manifold.
f. Subtract P1 from P2 and divide the difference by 10 to obtain the outgassing rate per
minute;
∠ P1-
Outgassing rate = P2
--------------------
10
Record this value as the outgassing rate for the manifold. This value should be less
than 0.5 µmHg for the lower manifold alone and less than 0.7 µmHg for the upper
and lower manifolds combined.
17. Obtain the gas inlet valve outgassing rate:
a. Open valves PS and 5; valve 7 should still be open.
b. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for the gas inlet valve.
c. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for the gas inlet
valve.
d. Subtract P1 from P2 and divide the difference by 10; record this value as the outgas-
sing rate for the gas inlet valve. This value should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
Mar 05 D-3
Valves 3 and P1 through P6
1. Open the regulator outlet valve for the gas connected to port 3.
2. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valve 3.
3. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for valve 3.
4. Subtract P1 from P2 and divide the difference by 10; record this value as the outgassing
rate for Valve 3. This value should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for valves P1 through P6 to which a gas is attached. Record the
values on the Valve Test Data Worksheet in the spaces provided.
Valves PS, 5, and 7
1. Close valve PS.

2. Open valve P1 for 60 seconds, then close it.
3. Take a pressure reading; store it as P1 for valve PS.
4. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for valve PS.
5. Subtract P1 from P2 and divide the difference by 10; record the value as the outgassing
rate for Valve PS. This value should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
6. Close valve 5 (close Valve 4 if open).
7. Open valve PS.
11. Subtract P1 from P2 and divide the difference by 10.; record this value as the outgassing
12. Close valve 7; open valve 5.
D-4 Mar 05
Valves 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 11, and PV
Valves 10 and 11
1. Open valve PV; wait 5 minutes (Valves PS and 5 should be open.).
2. Open valve 7; allow the system to evacuate to below vacuum setpoint (should be 10
µmHg or less).
3. Close valves PV, PS, and 5.
4. Open valves 1 and 2; allow the system to evacuate for 30 minutes.
Valves 1, 2, and 7 should be the only valves open at this time.
5. Remove the Po tube.
6. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valves 10 and 11.
7. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for valves 10 and 11.
rate for Valves 10 and 11. This value should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
Valve 9
9. Remove the sample tube from the analysis port.
rate for valve 9. This should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
Valve 8
13. With valve 8 closed, remove the plug from the vapor inlet port on the side of the analyzer.
If the vapor accessory is installed, disconnect it from the analyzer.
rate for valve 8. This value should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
17. Before proceeding, reinstall the sample tube, the Po tube, and the plug from the vapor inlet
(or the vapor accessory).
Mar 05 D-5
Valves 1, 2, and PV
18. Open valves 1 and 2.
19. Open valves 4, 5, and PS.
20. Allow the system to evacuate for 15 minutes.
21. Close valves 1 and 2. Valve PV should be closed; if not, close it.
22. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valves 1, 2, and PV.
23. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for valves 1, 2, and PV.
rate for valves 1, 2, and PV. This value should be less than 0.7 µmHg.
25. Fill the manifold to 800 mmHg with N2, then close the nitrogen port valve.
26. Close valve 4.
27. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valve PV.
28. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for valve PV.
rate for valve PV. This value should be less than 0.05 µmHg.
If the pressure drops more than 0.05 mmHg; close valve 5, the PV valve may be leaking.
30. Take another pressure reading; record it as P1 for valves 1 and 2.
31. Wait 10 minutes and take another pressure reading; record it as P2 for valves 1 and 2.
rate for valves 1 and 2. This value should be less than 0.05 µmHg.
If the pressure drops more than 0.05 mmHg; close valve 7, valves 1 or 2 may be leaking.
33. Take another pressure reading; record it as P1 for valve 1.
rate for valve 1. This value should be less than 0.05 µmHg.
If the pressure drops more than 0.05 mmHg; close valve 1 may be leaking.
D-6 Mar 05
Degas Valves
Perform the following steps before testing the individual degassing valves.
1. Ensure that the analyzer is idle.
2. Close the regulator outlet valve for the backfill gas.
3. Insert a plug into (or attach a clean, empty sample tube) each degas port.
4. Select Degas, Show Degas Schematic, then Degas, Enable Manual Control from the
Unit menu. (For clarity, this illustration shows only the valve portion of the schematic.)
Table D-2 lists descriptions of the degas valves.
Table D-2. Degas Valve Descriptions
Valve Description
D1 and D2 Degas port valves

D5 Vacuum valve
D6 Servo isolation valve
D7 Gas inlet port valve
5. Open Valves D5, D1, D2, and then D7.
6. Open Valve D6.
7. Allow the degas system to evacuate to the vacuum setpoint, then evacuate for 60 minutes.
8. Close Valves D1, D2, D5, D6, and D7.
9. Take a pressure reading and record it as P1 for the preliminary test.
10. Wait 10 minutes and take another reading; record it as P2 for the preliminary test.
rate for the preliminary test. This value should be less than 1.0 µmHg per minute.
Mar 05 D-7
Valves D1 and D2
1. Remove the plug (or empty sample tube) from the left degas port.
2. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valve D1 (left port).
3. Wait 10 minutes and take another reading; record it as P2. for D1
rate for valve D1. This value should be less than 1.0 µmHg.
5. Remove the plug (or empty sample tube) from the right degas port.
6. Take a pressure reading and record it as P1 for valve D2 (right port).
7. Wait 10 minutes and take another reading; record it as P2 for valve D2.
rate for valve D2. This value should be less than 1.0 µmHg.
Valve D7
1. Reinstall the plugs (or empty sample tubes) onto the two degas stations.
2. Open the regulator valve on the regulator for the backfill gas.
3. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valve D7.
4. Wait 10 minutes and take another reading; record it as P2 for D7.
5. Subtract P1 from P2 and divide the difference by 10; record this value as the Outgassing
rate for Valve D7. This value should be less than 1.0 µmHg.
Valves D5 and D6
1. Open and close valve D7 until a pressure of 800 mmHg is attained.
2. Take a pressure reading; record it as P1 for valves D5 and D6.
3. Wait 10 minutes and take another reading; record it as P2 for valves D5 and D6.
rate for valves D5 and D6. This value should be less than 0.05 µmHg.
D-8 Mar 05
What To Do If You Detect a Leaking Valve
If you determine that a specific valve is leaking, remove differential pressure from the valve
and continue testing the remaining valves for leaks.
As an alternative, you may repair or replace the leaking valve after removing the
differential pressure on the valve. However, opening the analysis system to
replace or repair a valve exposes the analyzer manifold to atmospheric gases and
moisture. These gases and moisture greatly increase the time required to
evacuate the analyzer and prepare it for further testing or operation.
Removing Differential Pressure from a Leaking Valve
1. Select either of the following actions:
• Close the regulator outlet valve for the gas supply line to the valve.
• Reinstall the plug that was removed to test the valve.
2. Open the leaking valve.
3. Evacuate the analyzer until you obtain an outgas rate of less than 0.7 µmHg per minute.
Refer to Testing Individual Valves on page D-1 for detailed instructions on determining
the outgas rate for specific valves.
Repairing or Replacing a Leaking Valve
Whether you repair or replace a valve depends on the type of valve that is leaking.
• Valves on the Analysis manifold should be repaired

• Valves on the Degas and inlet manifold should be replaced.
Repairing Valves on the Analysis Manifold
1. Backfill the manifold with nitrogen to approximately 800 mmHg.
• Close off the helium gas supply if you are repairing the helium inlet valve.
• Turn off the vacuum pump system if you are repairing a vacuum valve.
2. Remove and replace the plunger for the leaking valve.
Mar 05 D-9
3. Closely inspect the valve seat area for any debris which may cause another leak.
4. Reassemble the valve.
• Reopen the helium supply if you are repairing the helium inlet valve.
• Turn on the vacuum pump system if you are repairing a vacuum valve.
5. Open and close the repaired valve approximately 20 to 30 times; this allows the valve to
seat properly.
6. Evacuate the analyzer until the outgas rate is less than 0.7 µmHg per minute. Refer to
Testing Individual Valves on page D-1 for detailed instructions.
D-10 Mar 05
Replacing Valves on the Degas and Gas Inlet Manifold
1. Backfill the manifold with nitrogen to approximately 800 mmHg.
2. Turn off the gas supply for the gas inlet valves.
3. Unscrew and remove the valve from the manifold.
4. Install the new valve, then reconnect the wiring.
5. Turn on the gas supply and vacuum pump system.
6. Evacuate the analyzer until the outgas rate is less than 0.7 µmHg per minute. Refer to
Testing Individual Valves on page D-1 for detailed instructions.
Mar 05 D-11
Valve Data Test Sheet
Make a copy of this form to record pressure readings and outgassing rates when leak-testing
system valves.
P1 P2
VALVE(s) (1st pressure reading) (2nd pressure reading) OUTGASSING RATE
Analysis Valves
Manifold
Gas inlet valve
3
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
PS
5
7
10 and 11
9
8
1, 2, and PV
1, 2, and PV
1 and 2
1
Degas Valves
Preliminary Test
D1 (left port)
D2 (right port)
D7
D5 and D6
D-12 Mar 05
Appendix E ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
E. CALCULATING FREE-SPACE VALUES

FOR MICROPORE ANALYSES
Many microporous materials, such as zeolites and activated carbons, trap and hold helium in
their complex pore structures for many hours after being exposed to helium. Helium trapped
in micropores can interfere with the analysis at low pressures, causing an “S”-shaped curve at
the lower end of the isotherm. For this reason, it is recommended that you enter the warm and
cold free-space volumes when performing micropore analyses, therefore avoiding exposure
of the sample to helium. Two techniques can be used for determining warm and cold free-
space values.
The first method is to perform a short analysis on the sample after partial degassing (one pres-
sure point with no incremental dosing), but prior to final sample preparation. Measure the free
space during this analysis. The measured free-space values will be printed on the report and
may then be entered into the sample file after more thorough sample preparation.
The second method requires prior tests using empty tubes that will be employed later for the
sample analyses. The measured free-space data can be used thereafter on every analysis per-
formed using these sample tubes. This small initial investment of time will save considerable
time later. Perform an empty tube analysis on each sample tube you intend to use for
micropore analysis. Measure the free space of each sample tube, taking only one pressure
point. Four important things to remember are: 1) be consistent in using seal frits; for example,
use the same seal frits for the analysis as you did for the empty tube test; 2) since the cold free
space is dependent on bath temperature, perform a test for each bath temperature to be used;
3) the isothermal jacket must be in the same position for the sample analysis as it was for the
empty tube test; and 4) correct the free-space volumes obtained for the volume displaced by
the sample when you use them.
To make the correction, subtract the amount of gas displaced by the sample. The calculations
are simple and are given here with a brief explanation of their derivation. Remember to
employ the appropriate free-space values for each bath temperature used, stating all temper-
atures in Kelvin.
To correct warm free space:
M s T std
V ws = V wm ∠ ⎛ ------- × ------------ ⎞
⎝ ρ s T amb ⎠
where
Vws = calculated warm free space with sample present (in standard cm3)
Vwm = warm free space measured for the empty tube (in standard cm3)
Ms = mass of sample to be analyzed (in grams)
rs = approximate sample true density (in grams/cm3)

Tamb = ambient temperature (in Kelvin)
Tstd = standard temperature (273.15 Kelvin)
Aug 04 E-1
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix E
To correct cold free space:
where
Vcs = calculated cold free space with sample present (in standard cm3)
Vcm = cold free space measured for the empty tube (in standard cm3)
Ms = mass of the sample to be analyzed (in grams)
rs = approximate sample true density (in grams/cm3)
Tbath = analysis bath temperature (in Kelvin)
Tstd = standard temperature (273.15 Kelvin)
When you later analyze a sample, select Enter Free Space, and use the values calculated
above.
Example:
The sample is 0.2345 grams of activated carbon with a density of 2.0000 g/cm3. The room
temperature is 22 ºC or 295.15 K. The analysis tube has been measured previously in an argon
bath. The measured warm and cold free spaces are 29.1234 and 89.4567 cm3 STP atm-1,
respectively. The analysis will be performed with argon at liquid argon temperature, 87.3 K.
With this information, enter the corrected warm free space as follows:
0.2345 g 273.2 K ∠1
V ws = 29.1234 cm STP ∠ ⎛ ---------------------------------- × ------------------- ⎞ = 29.0149 cm STP atm
3 3
⎝ 3 295.2 K ⎠
2.0000 g/cm
and enter the corrected cold free space as follows:
0.2345 g 273.2 K ∠1
V cs = 89.4567 cm STP ∠ ⎛ ---------------------------------- × ------------------- ⎞ = 89.0898 cm STP atm
3 3
⎝ 3 87.3 K ⎠
2.0000 g/cm
E-2 Mar 05
Appendix F ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
F. DEFAULT FILES AND SYSTEM FILES
The following table describes the default analysis conditions files provided with the ASAP
2020 software. The values in these files may not be universally accepted. You may change
them if necessary.
File Description
13XARLAR.ANC 13x reference material, argon, @ 87.29 K
13XARLN2.ANC 13x reference material, argon, @ 77.35 K
ALUMINA.ANC Alumina reference material, krypton, @ 77.35 K
BJHADS42.ANC BJH 42-point adsorption
BJHDES43.ANC BJH 43-point desorption
CHARCOAL.ANC Charcoal reference material, carbon dioxide, @ 273.15 K
KBLANK.ANC Krypton blank tube run
KSTDRD.ANC Krypton standard
NBLANK.ANC Nitrogen blank tube run
NSTDRD.ANC Nitrogen standard
SILALUMF.ANC Silica-alumina reference material, nitrogen; adsorption/desorp-
tion
SILALUMS.ANC Silica-alumina reference material, nitrogen; adsorption only
SURF1.ANC One-point surface area, nitrogen
SURF3.ANC Three-point surface area, nitrogen
SURF5.ANC Five-point surface area, nitrogen
SURF5lOW.ANC Five-point low surface area, nitrogen
T-PLOT.ANC 19-point t-Plot using nitrogen, nitrogen
VOLUME. ANC Volume ball run
Mar 05 F-1
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix F
The following table describes the default adsorptive properties files provided with the ASAP
2020 software. The values in these files may not be universally accepted. You may change
them if necessary.
File Description
ARLAR.ADP Argon, liquid argon temperature @ 87.29 K
ARLN2.ADP Argon, liquid nitrogen temperature @ 77.35 K
CO2.ADP Carbon dioxide @ 273.15 K
KR_SOLID.ADP Krypton @ 77.35 K (Solid Psat vs. Temperature)
KRYPTON.ADP Krypton @ 77.35 K
NITROGEN.ADP Nitrogen @ 77.35 K
OXYGEN.ADP Oxygen @ 77.35 K
The following table describes the default report options files provided with the ASAP 2020
software. The values in these files may not be universally accepted. You may change them if
necessary.
File Description
BJHADS.RPO BJH adsorption
BJHDES.RPO BJH desorption
FULL.RPO Full: includes Isotherm, BET, Langmuir, BJH adsorption, BJH
desorption, t-Plot
SURF.RPO Isotherm, BET, Langmuir
T-PLOT.RPO t-Plot
F-2 Mar 05
Appendix F ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
The following table describes the files created by the ASAP 2020 software.
File Description
* ASAP2020.INI ASCII file containing initialization information used during pro-
gram startup as well as system options information.
* ASAP2020.SMP Binary file containing 2020 sample defaults.
2020-N.STS Binary file containing 2020 instrument status information and
calibration data. The letter N in the file name represents the unit
number of the instrument for which information applies.
Do not attempt to edit this file. Personal injury or damage to the ASAP 2020 could
result because the operator may be given erroneous status information.
* ASAP 2020.LOG ASCII file containing a recorded log of all error messages dis-
played on the screen.
* N.LOG Binary log file for analyzer with serial number contents acces-
sible using the Show Instrument Log option on the Unit menu.
*Back up these files periodically to ensure data integrity. You may want to store
each backup set on a separate CD so you have access to different versions of the files. For
example, ASAP 2020.SMP contains the default sample information. Any time the
sample defaults are changed, an updated ASAP2020.SMP is created. Keeping version
backups of this file by storing each on a separate CD allows restoration of any version
desired.
Mar 05 F-3
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Appendix G
G. DFT MODELS
Theories are developed by scientists in an attempt to explain a class of observed behavior. In

the experimental physical sciences, theories are often expressed in terms of a model that can
be visualized and described mathematically. Early models of physical adsorption were quite
simple, both conceptually and mathematically, for very practical reasons — hand computa-
tions were required. Today we can explore complex models that describe adsorption systems
on the atomic scale of size and sub-picosecond time frame. This is not because scientists are
smarter, but because of available tools. The DFT models are created by classical approaches
to adsorption as well as models based on modern statistical thermodynamics.
Models Based on Statistical Thermodynamics

Included in this group are methods that model the adsorption system in terms of forces acting
between individual molecules.
Theoretical Background
Traditional adsorption theories attempt to describe experimental adsorption isotherms with an

isotherm equation containing a small number of parameters. At a minimum, these parameters
include the extent of the surface, such as the monolayer capacity (Vm), and the molar inten-
sity of the gas-surface interaction, such as the Langmuir “K” constant or the BET “C”
constant. In some equations, additional parameters take into account the lateral interaction of
adsorbed molecules with each other. Other theories, such as the Dubinin-Astakhov approach,
also include parameters for the effect of adsorbent porosity.
Instead of this classical kinetic or phenomenological approach, we can use a molecular-based

statistical thermodynamic theory that allows us to relate the adsorption isotherm to the micro-
scopic properties of the system: the fluid-fluid and fluid-solid interaction energy parameters,
the pore size, the pore geometry, and the temperature.
The following example is given so that you may understand how such a theory is constructed.
A clean sample of a solid material containing slit-shaped pores of a single width is placed in
an evacuated space. It is kept at a fixed temperature as a known quantity of pure argon gas is
admitted into the space surrounding the sample. The pressure within the space is recorded
over time. In this situation, the pressure falls rapidly from its initial value and gradually
approaches a steady reading, called the equilibrium pressure. The amount adsorbed corre-
sponds to the quantity of gas effectively removed from the gas phase by the solid surface. A
graph that plots amount adsorbed versus equilibrium pressure is called an adsorption
isotherm.
Under such conditions, the argon atoms that randomly enter the pore space feel the presence
of the solid surface as the action of an external attractive force (the dispersion forces or Van
der Waal’s forces) and spend more time near the surface. As a result, the space near the sur-
face acquires a greater average density of argon atoms than regions farther removed.
Jan 09 G-1
Appendix G ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
If the equilibrium distribution of the gas atoms near the surface could be described as a func-
tion of pressure and the molecular properties of the components of the system, then a model
could be constructed for the adsorption isotherm for the system. Modern physical chemistry
provides several ways to calculate this distribution. All these methods are based on the fun-
damental thermodynamic law that such a system adopts a configuration of minimum free
energy at equilibrium. Also needed is a description of the pairwise interaction energy between
atoms, U(s), commonly given by a Lennard-Jones potential:
σ 12 σ 6
U ( s ) = ⎛ ---⎞ ∠ ⎛ ---⎞
⎝ s⎠ ⎝ s⎠
where
ε = a characteristic energy of the adsorptive,

σ = the diameter of the adsorptive molecule, and
s = the separation distance.
Molecular Simulation Methods
Two simulation techniques are commonly used to determine the distribution of gas molecules
in a system in equilibrium: the molecular dynamics method and the Monte Carlo method.
Both of these are used as reference methods because their results are considered exact.
Molecular Dynamics Method
In the molecular dynamics method, the position and velocity of individual gas particles are
calculated over time at very short intervals. This method takes into account both the forces
acting between the gas particles themselves and those acting between the gas particles and the
atoms of the simulated surface. As the simulated particles collide with each other and with the
surface, the average concentration of particles in the space near the surface is calculated; this
calculation yields the amount of gas adsorbed.
This method can be thought of as a way to determine the chronological record of the move-
ment of each particle in the system using time steps of 10-14 seconds. Although the
mathematics are simple, the number of calculations required for a system of even a few hun-
dred particles is astronomical and challenges even the fastest computers.
Monte Carlo Method
In the Monte Carlo method, determination of the system equilibrium distribution begins with
an assumption (which may be only approximate) about the initial configuration of particles in
the system. The system is “equilibrated” through a process of randomly selecting one particle
and conditionally moving it a random distance in a random direction.
If the move results in a configuration of lower total energy, then the move is completed and
another particle is randomly selected to be moved.
G-2 Dec 08
If the move results in a configuration of higher energy, a probability for that event is calcu-
lated, and a random number between zero and one is generated. If the generated number is
smaller than the probability of the event, then the move is accepted; otherwise, another par-
ticle is selected and the process is repeated. This process continues until the average total
energy of the system no longer decreases; at this point, average configuration data are accu-
mulated to yield the mean density distribution of particles in the system.
Monte Carlo simulations require considerable less computation time than molecular dynamic
simulations and can yield the same results; however, neither method provides a really prac-
tical way to calculate complete isotherms.
Density Functional Formulation
Density functional theory offers a practical alternative to both molecular dynamic and Monte
Carlo simulations. When compared to reference methods based on molecular simulation, this
theory provides an accurate method of describing inhomogeneous systems yet requires fewer
calculations. Because the density functional theory provides accuracy and a reduced number
of calculations, it is the basis embodied in the DFT models.
The system being modeled consists of a single pore represented by two parallel walls sepa-
rated by a distance H. The pore is open and immersed in a single component fluid
(adsorptive) at a fixed temperature and pressure. Under such conditions, the fluid responds to
the walls and reaches an equilibrium distribution. In this condition (by the definition of equi-
librium), the chemical potential at every point equals the chemical potential of the bulk fluid.
The bulk fluid is a homogenous system of constant density; its chemical potential* is deter-
mined by the pressure of the system using well-known equations. The fluid near the walls is
not of constant density; its chemical potential is composed of several position-dependent con-
tributions that must total at every point to the same value as the chemical potential of the bulk
fluid.
As noted previously, at equilibrium, the whole system has a minimum (Helmholtz) free
energy, known thermodynamically as the grand potential energy (GPE). Density functional
theory describes the thermodynamic grand potential as a functional of the single-particle den-
sity distribution; therefore, calculating the density profile that minimizes the GPE yields the
equilibrium density profile. The calculation method requires the solution of a system of com-
plex integral equations that are implicit functions of the density vector. Since analytic
solutions are not possible, the problem must be solved using iterative numerical methods.
Although calculation using these methods still requires supercomputing speed, the calculation
of many isotherm pressure points for a wide range of pore sizes is a feasible task. The com-
plete details of the theory and the mathematics can be found in the papers listed under
References at the end of this appendix.
The following graphs and accompanying text illustrate the results of using density functional
theory to predict the behavior of a model system.
*Chemical potential may be thought of as the energy change felt by a probe particle when it is inserted
into the system from a reference point outside the system. It can also be defined as the partial derivative
of the grand potential energy with respect to density (or concentration).
Jan 09 G-3
Figure G-1 shows the density profile for argon at a carbon surface as calculated by density
functional theory for a temperature of 87.3 K and a relative pressure of about 0.5.
Figure G-1. Density Profile for Argon on Carbon at 87.3 K and a Relative Pressure of 0.5
This figure represents a cross-section of the region near the surface. Note the layerwise dis-
tribution of adsorbate; the first monolayer is sharply defined and a third layer can be
distinguished. The area under the profile curve represents the amount adsorbed per unit area
at this pressure. The positions of the maxima are separated by a distance determined by the
size of the adsorptive atom.
Given the density profile, the amount adsorbed at the stated pressure can be easily calculated
as the integral over the profile. Repeating this calculation over a range of pressures yields the
adsorption isotherm for the model. If the value of H is very large, the isotherm obtained cor-
responds to that of an external, or free, surface. If H is smaller, a range of pressures is reached
where two minima exist for the grand potential, showing the presence of two metastable
phases having different density distributions but the same chemical potential. The phase with
the lower GPE is the stable one. As the pressure is increased, a point is reached where the
other phase becomes the stable one. This phase transition reflects condensation of adsorbate
in the pore; the pressure at which it occurs is called the critical pore-filling pressure. This
pressure is analogous to the condensation pressure predicted by the Kelvin equation in the
classical model of pore filling.
Figure G-2 shows how the profiles change with pressure for a model pore with H = 40 Ang-
stroms. The insets show the density profiles for the corresponding points of the isotherm.
G-4 Dec 08
Figure G-2. Model Isotherm for Argon at 87.3 K in a 40 Å Slit in a Carbon Substrate
The profiles show the density distribution from one wall to the center of the slit; the other half
of the distribution is a mirror image of the profile shown.
As the pressure is first increased from zero, almost all the adsorbed atoms occupy a position
close to the surface.
• Inset a shows the profile corresponding to point a on the isotherm where the surface is
about half covered.
• At point b, the first layer is so full that it is more favorable for atoms to start a new
layer.
• At point c, a third layer is forming. Point c, for this size slit, is the critical pore-filling
pressure. In inset c, the profile shows the density decreasing to near zero (actually the
bulk gas density) at 4 or 5 molecular diameters from the surface.
• Inset d shows the profile converging on a density similar to that of bulk liquid argon in
the center of the pore, indicating a phase transition.
Note that the adsorption isotherms for pores larger than the one shown in Figure G-2 is iden-
tical up to point c. The lower branch of the isotherm simply continues to a higher pressure for
larger pores. This trend is illustrated in Figure G-3, where isotherms for some larger size
pores are shown. It is clear that pore size is uniquely characterized by a corresponding critical
pore-filling pressure. At large pore sizes, density functional theory produces results for the
critical filling pressures that are in good agreement with those produced by the Kelvin
equation.
Jan 09 G-5
Figure G-3. Model Isotherms for Some Larger Pore Widths Argon on Carbon at 87.3 K
Figure G-4 shows model isotherms for pores in the micropore size range. Note the logarith-
mic scale for pressure.
Figure G-4. Model Isotherms in the Micropore Size Range of Pore Width
Argon on Carbon at 87.3 K
G-6 Dec 08
Pores of 4 Å width, barely larger than the argon atom (3.38 Å), fill at pressures below 1 mil-
litorr. Pores below 15 Å fill before a monolayer is completed on the surface of the larger
pores. In the micropore size range, the pore volume fills more gradually with pressure and the
total shape of the isotherm is important in characterizing the pore size.
Models Included
Non-Local Density Functional Theory with Density Independent Weights
N2 - DFT Model
AR - DFT Model
Geometry: Slit
Substrate: Carbon (graphite)
Category: Porosity
Method: Nitrogen at 77 K; Argon at 87 K
Using the methods of non-local density functional theory, two sets of isotherms have been
calculated to serve as kernel functions for the characterization of porous solids from adsorp-
tion data. The model isotherms are stored in binary format files. These models assume a slit-
like pore geometry. The pore size range from 4.0 to 4000 Å is covered in 91 classes in a geo-
metric progression. The class intervals are rounded to the nearest 0.02 molecular diameters. A
model for the free or external surface is included to account for unfilled pores. Each of the 92
model isotherms has been calculated at 181 pressure points from near 1x10-6 to near 1.00 rel-
ative pressure.
These models are identical to those supplied with the original DOS version of DFT software.
Some slight difference from the DOS results may be noted when they are applied to the same
data due to improvements in the deconvolution algorithm and better regularization of the cur-
rent software.
Modified Non-Local Density Functional Theory with Density-Dependent

Weights
N2 - Modified Density Functional
Geometry: Free surface

Substrate: Surface energy
Method: Nitrogen at 77K
Using the modified Tarazona prescription described by Olivier (refer to References, refer-
ences 3 and 4), model isotherms were calculated for a wide range of adsorptive energies to a
relative pressure of 0.6. The model makes no provision for pore filling in the micropore
region. If the sample solid contains small mesopores, the isotherm data should be truncated
(using the Select Data Points dialog box) to a suitably low relative pressure to avoid trying to
fit this region; mesopore filling reports as a large area of low energy in the calculated distri-
bution of adsorptive potential.
Jan 09 G-7
The surface energy is reported in terms of the effective Lennard-Jones interaction parameter,
e, for the adsorptive/adsorbent pair divided by Boltzmann’s constant. The units are therefore
degrees Kelvin.
N2 - Cylindrical Pores - Oxide Surface

AR - Cylindrical Pores - Oxide Surface
Geometry: Cylinder
Substrate: Oxide
Category: Porosity
Method: Nitrogen at 77 K; Argon at 87 K
Model isotherms were calculated using a combination of statistical mechanical calculations

and experimental observations for macroporous silicas and MCM-41 mesoporous silicas as
well as zeolites. The pore-filling pressures were determined as a function of the pore size
from adsorption isotherms on MCM-41 materials characterized by X-ray and other tech-
niques. The variation of the pore fluid density with pressure and pore size has been accounted
for by density functional theory calculations. The N2 model reports pore sizes ranging from
3.8 to 387 Angstroms and the AR model from 3.8 to over 500 Angstroms.
Reference: M. Jaroniec, M. Kruk, J.P. Olivier, and S. Koch, “A New Method for the
Accurate Pore Size Analysis of MCM-41 and Other Silica-Based Mesoporous
Materials,” Proceedings of COPS-V, Heidelberg, Germany (1999)
N2 – Cylindrical Pores – Pillared Clay Surface (Montmorillionite)
Geometry: Cylinder
Substrate: Crystalline Silicate
Category: Porosity
Method: Nitrogen at 77 K
Model isotherms were calculated using a combination of statistical thermodynamic Non-

Local Density Functional Theory (NLDFT) calculations and experimental isotherms for ref-
erence samples of montmorillionite.The construction method for the hybrid models was
analogous to that described in the first reference below (Jaroniec et al,1999). The additional
references add additional theoretical details as well as examples of the application of the
model to pillared clay catalysts.This model reports pore widths from 3.8 to 387 Angstroms.
G-8 Dec 08
References: Mietec Jaroniec, Michal Kruk, James P. Olivier and Stefan Koch, “A New
Method for the Characterization of Mesoporous Silicas,” Proceedings of
COPS-V, 1999, Studies in Surface Science, Vol 128, Characterization of
porous Solids V , Unger, et al, Eds, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2000.
James P. Olivier and Mario L. Occell, “Surface Area and Microporosity of a

Pillared Interlayered Clay (PILC) from a Hybrid Density Functional Theory
(DFT) Method,” The Journal of Physical Chemistry B; 2001, 105(3),
623-629.
M. L. Occelli, J. P. Olivier, J. A. Perdigon-Melon, and A. Auroux, “Surface

Area, Pore Volume Distribution, and Acidity in Mesoporous Expanded Clay
Catalysts from Hybrid Density Functional Theory (DFT) and Adsorption
Microcalorimetry Methods,” Langmuir 2002, 18, 9816-9823.9b
James P. Olivier, “The Importance of Surface Heterogeneity in Developing

Characterization Methods.” 6th International Symposium on the Character-
ization of Porous Solids, Studies in Surface Science and Catalysis 144,
Elsevier, 2002.
James P. Olivier and Mario L. Occelli, “Surface Area and Microporosity of

Pillared Rectorite Catalysts from a Hybrid Density Functional Theory
Method,” Microporous and Mesoporous Materials 2003, 57, 291-296.
C02 - DFT Model
Geometry: Slit
Substrate: Carbon
Category: Porosity
Method: Carbon dioxide at 273 K
Model isotherms were calculated, using the non-local prescription of Tarazona, employing
molecular parameters derived from the known bulk properties of carbon dioxide.
AR - Modified Density Functional Model
Geometry: Free Surface

Substrate: Any
Category: Surface energy
Method: Argon at 87 K
This model was produced in the same manner as the N2 Modified Density Functional model
listed earlier, except applicable to argon adsorbed at 87.3 K.
Jan 09 G-9
N2 - Tarazona NLDFT, Esf = 30.0K
Geometry: Cylinder
Substrate: Oxide
Category: Porosity
Model isotherms were calculated using the prescriptions of Tarazona for density dependent
weighting functions and a cylindrical pore geometry. The wall potential used is /k = 30 K,
typical for a silica or alumina surface.
This model file is particularly useful for sizing zeolites or zeolite containing materials that
have substantial micropore volume. The reported pore size range is 3.8 to 387 Angstroms.
Reference: P. Tarazona, Phys. Rev. A 31: 2672 (1985).

Idem, Phys. Rev. A 32: 3148 (1985).
P. Tarazona, U. M. B. Marconi, and R. Evans, Mol. Phys. 60: 573 (1987).
G-10 Dec 08
Models Based on Classical Theories

Both surface energy distribution and pore size distribution may be evaluated using classical
approaches to model kernel functions for use with equation (1) of the DFT Theory in the cal-
culations appendix. Be aware that the deconvolution method only provides a fitting
mechanism; it does not overcome any inherent shortcomings in the underlying theory.
Surface Energy
The use of classical theories to extract adsorptive potential distribution is mostly of historical
interest. At a minimum, the equation must contain a parameter dependent on adsorption
energy and another dependent on monolayer capacity, or surface area. This is sufficient to
permit the calculation of the set of model isotherms that is used to create a library model. The
Langmuir equation has been used in the past, as have the Hill-deBoer equation and the
Fowler-Guggenheim equation. All of these suffer from the fact that they only describe mono-
layer adsorption, whereas the data may include contributions from multilayer formation.
Pore Size
It is well established that the pore space of a mesoporous solid fills with condensed adsorbate
at pressures somewhat below the prevailing saturated vapor pressure of the adsorptive. When
combined with a correlating function that relates pore size with a critical condensation pres-
sure, this knowledge can be used to characterize the mesopore size distribution of the
adsorbent. The correlating function most commonly used is the Kelvin equation. Refinements
make allowance for the reduction of the physical pore size by the thickness of the adsorbed
film existing at the critical condensation pressure. Still further refinements adjust the film
thickness for the curvature of the pore wall.
The commonly used practical methods of extracting mesopore distribution from isotherm
data using Kelvin-based theories, such as the BJH method, were for the most part developed
decades ago and were designed for hand computation using relatively few experimental
points. In general, these methods visualize the incremental decomposition of an experimental
isotherm, starting at the highest relative pressure or pore size. At each step, the quantity of
adsorptive involved is divided between pore emptying and film thinning processes and
exactly is accounted for. This computational algorithm frequently leads to inconsistencies
when carried to small mesopore sizes. If the thickness curve used is too steep, it finally will
predict a larger increment of adsorptive for a given pressure increment than is actually
observed; since a negative pore volume is non-physical, the algorithm must stop. Conversely,
if the thickness curve used underestimates film thinning, accumulated error results in the cal-
culation of an overly large volume of (possibly nonexistent) small pores.
The use of equation (1) represents an improvement over the traditional algorithm. Kernel
functions corresponding to various classical Kelvin-based methods have been calculated for
differing geometries and included in the list of models.
Jan 09 G-11
Models Included
Kelvin Equation with Halsey Thickness Curve
N2 - Halsey Thickness Curve
Geometry: Slit
Substrate: Average
Category: Porosity
The kernel function is calculated using the Halsey equation with standard parameters:
∠ 5.00 1/3
t = 3.54 ⎛⎝ ----------------------⎞⎠
ln ( P/Po )
The nitrogen properties used in the Kelvin equation are:
Surface tension = 8.88 dynes cm-1

Molar density = 0.02887 g cm-3
N2 - Halsey Thickness Curve
Geometry: Cylinder
Substrate: Average
Category: Porosity
The calculation is the same as above except that cylindrical geometry is assumed.
Reference: G. Halsey, J. Chem. Phys 16, 931 (1948)
Kelvin Equation with Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve
N2 - Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve
Geometry: Slit
Substrate: Average
Category: Porosity
The kernel function is calculated using the Harkins and Jura equation with standard
parameters:
G-12 Dec 08
13.99 1/2
t = ⎛ -----------------------------------------------⎞
⎝ 0.034 ∠ log ( P/Po )⎠

N2 - Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve
Geometry: Cylinder
Substrate: Average
Category: Porosity
The calculation is the same as above except that cylindrical geometry is assumed.
References: W. D. Harkins and G. Jura, J.A.C.S. 66, 1366 (1944)
J. H. DeBoer et al., J. Colloid and Interface Sci. 21, 405 (1966)
Kelvin Equation with Broekhoff-de Boer Thickness Curve
N2 - Broekhoff-de Boer Model
Geometry: Slit
Substrate: Average
Category: Porosity
The kernel function is calculated using the Broekhoff-de Boer equation with standard
parameters:

N2 - Broekhoff-de Boer Model
Geometry: Cylinder
Substrate: Average
Category: Porosity
Jan 09 G-13
The calculation is similar to the above except that cylindrical geometry is assumed, and the
film thickness depends on pore size (see reference).
Reference: Specifically, equations 20 and 21 in: J.C.P. Broekhoff and J.H. de Boer, “The
Surface Area in Intermediate Pores,” Proceedings of the International Sym-
posium on Surface Area Determination, D.H. Everett, R.H. Ottwill, eds., U.K.
(1969)
G-14 Dec 08
References
The papers listed below provide additional information on DFT models:
1. “Determination of Pore Size Distribution from Density Functional Theoretic Models of

Adsorption and Condensation within Porous Solids,” J.P. Olivier and W.B. Conklin,
Micromeritics Instrument Corp; presented at the International Symposium on the Effects
of Surface Heterogeneity in Adsorption and Catalysts on Solids, Kazimierz Dolny, Poland
(July 1992).
2. “Classification of Adsorption Behavior: Siimple Fluids in Pores of Slit-shaped

Geometry,” Perla B. Balbuena and Keith E. Gubbins, Fluid Phase Equilibria, 76, 21-35,
Elsevier Science Publishers, B.V., Amsterdam (1992).
3. “Modeling Physical Adsorption on Porous and Nonporous solids Using Density

Functional Theory,” J.P. Olivier, Journal of Porous Materials, 3, 9-17 (1995).
4. “The Determination of Surface Energetic Heterogeneity Using Model Isotherms

Calculated by Density Functional Theory,” J.P. Olivier; presented at the Fifth
International Conference on the Fundamentals of Adsorption, Pacific Grove, CA (1995).
Jan 09 G-15
ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual Index
INDEX
$ symbol, 8-5, 8-8 description, 1-10

front panel, 3-1
lifting, 2-1
A moving to a different computer, 2-18
Absolute pressure tolerance, 5-26 removing, 2-21
Add log entry, 8-10 AR Cylindrical Pores - Oxide Surface model, G-8
Adding an analyzer, 2-16 AR DFT model, G-7
Adsorption isotherm, G-1 AR Modified Density Functional Model, G-9
Adsorptive Properties dialog, 5-29 ASAP 2000 files, converting for 2020 program, 5-98
Adsorptive properties file, 5-29 ASAP 2010 sample files, opening, 5-98
defining, 4-12 ASCII text
listing file statistics, 4-31, 5-95 saving reports, 7-21
printing contents, 4-30 Automatic Degas dialog, 6-8
Advanced format, 8-2 Autoscale x- and y-axis, 5-43
creating sample file, 4-5 Avogadro's number, C-20
establishing sample defaults, 4-3 Axis
Sample information file, 5-6 coordinates, viewing, 7-27
Alpha-S curve, saving, 5-91 properties, editing, 7-26
Alpha-S Method dialog, 5-52 Axis Properties dialog, 7-26
Alpha-S report, 5-52
example of, 7-33
Alumina, replacing in oil vapor traps, 9-11 B
Analysis Backfill
bath, 4-27 gas, 5-29
details, 6-13 options, 5-28
Dewar, checking, 9-4 Backfill gas, 4-18
Dewar, installing, 4-27 Basic format, 8-2, 8-3
dialog, 6-3 creating sample file, 4-7
performing, 4-28, 6-3 Sample information file, 5-9
program, installing, 2-12 specifying sample defaults, 4-1, 8-4
skipping steps, 6-6 Bath temperature, 6-5
status, 6-13 BET Surface Area report, 5-39
suspending, 6-6 calculations, C-6, C-7
viewing options, 6-3 example of, 7-30
Analysis Conditions dialog, 5-16 BJH Adsorption/Desorption plot options dialog, 5-63
Analysis conditions file, 5-16 BJH Adsorption/Desorption report, 5-57
defining, 4-10 calculations, C-11
identification, 5-16 example of, 7-35
listing file statistics, 4-31, 5-95 plot, 5-63
printing contents, 4-30 tabular, 5-60
Analysis program BJH Adsorption/Desorption Report Options dialog, 5-57
exiting, 5-100 BJH Adsorptive Options dialog, 5-58
installing upgrade, 2-16 BJH correction, 5-59
subsequent installation, 2-16 Boltzmann’s constant, G-8
uninstalling, 2-24 Bookmarks tab, 1-4
Analyzer Broekhoff-de Boer equation, 5-49
adding another, 2-16
changing setup, 2-22
cleaning, 9-18
Jan 09 Index-1
Index ASAP 2020 Operator’s Manual
C Control Chart command, 7-11

Control Chart Graph Options dialog, 7-12
Cables, connecting, 2-10
Control Chart Options dialog, 7-11
Calculated free space, 5-23
Control Chart report, 7-11
Calibrate Manifold Temperature dialog box, 9-16
defining the Y-axis, 7-12
Calibrate Pressure Scale dialog box, 6-20
recalculating archived results, 7-12
Calibrate Servo Valve dialog box, 6-29
Control Chart Sample Selection dialog, 7-13
Calibration
Controls, indicators, and connectors, 3-1
details, 6-16
front panel, 3-1
file, loading, 6-23
rear panel, 3-6
files, reinstalling, 2-23
side panel, 3-4
Load from File, 6-23
Conventions
pressure offset, 6-19, 9-19
operator’s manual, 1-3
pressure scale, 6-20, 9-20
Convert command, 5-98
settings, saving, 6-23
Cross-hair, axis, 7-27
temperature, 6-20, 9-16
Cross-references, 1-7
Vacuum gauge, 6-19
Cryogen, 4-25
Volume, 6-21
Curve Properties dialog, 7-25
Calibration command, 6-19
Calibration Manifold Temperature dialog box, 6-20
Calibration Vacuum Gauge dialog box, 6-28 D
Cancel push button, 3-10
Carbon Black STSA equation, 5-49 Data
Cascade windows, 3-15 isotherm, exporting, 5-96
Cautions, 1-3 selecting display options, 8-11
Check box, 3-9 type, 5-7
Chemical potential, G-3 Date Range push button, 3-11
Cheng/Yang Dates dialog box, 3-11
calculations, C-23 Dates push button, 5-4
correction, 5-66 Default Basic Sample Information dialog, 8-4
Pore Geometry, C-22 Default files
Circuit breaker, valve, 9-2 adsorptive properties, F-2
location, 3-5 analysis conditions, F-1
Cleaning report options, F-2
analyzer, 9-18 Degas
filler rods, 4-16 Calibrate pressure offset, 6-27
sample tubes, 4-16 Calibrate servo, 6-29
Close All command, 5-92 Calibrate vacuum gauge, 6-28
Close command, 5-92 dialog, 6-8
Close push button, 3-10 Enable manual control, 6-24
Close Reports command, 7-5 monitoring, 6-26
CO2 DFT Model, G-9 sample, 6-24
Cold free space Show instrument Schematic, 6-25
for micropore analyses, E-2 Show status, 6-26
Cold trap, 1-10 Degas command, 6-24
Dewar, installing, 4-25 Degas conditions file, 5-14
location, 3-3 creating, 4-9
tubes, cleaning, 9-14 listing file statistics, 4-31
tubes, installing, 2-5 printing contents, 4-30
Collected Data dialog, 5-87 Degas port
Columns, editing on onscreen reports, 7-23 location, 3-3
Computer replacing filter, 9-7
power input, 2-7 Degassing
requirements, 1-15 sample, 5-7
Density Functional theory, G-3
Index-2 Jan 09
Destination, 5-93 Export Sample File dialog box, 5-96

Dewar Export Settings dialog, 6-6
analysis, installing, 4-27
checking, 9-4
cold trap, installing, 4-25 F
precautions, 4-25 File
raising and lowering, 6-10 listing statistics, 3-8
DFT models, G-1 name, including with file identification, 8-5, 8-8
See Models opening, 3-8
DFT Pore Size Report Options dialog, 5-72 printing to, 7-4
DFT report See also Sample information file
Pore size, 5-72 status, 3-12, 5-4
surface energy, 5-75 File menu, 5-1
DFT Surface Energy Report Options dialog, 5-75 Close All command, 5-92
Dialog box, 3-9 Close command, 5-92
closing, 3-10 Convert command, 5-98
Directory, 5-4 Exit command, 5-100
limitations, 5-5 Export command, 5-96
Dollimore-Heal Adsorption/Desorption report, 5-65 List command, 5-95
Dosing Options dialog, 5-24 Open command, 5-3
Dubinin report, 5-76 Print command, 5-93
example of, 7-39 Save All command, 5-92
pore volume, 5-79 Save As command, 5-90
tabular, 5-78 Save command, 5-90
transformed isotherm, 5-78 File name default extensions, 3-13
Dubinin Report Options dialog, 5-76 Filler rod, 4-15
Dubinin Transformed Isotherm Plot Options dialog, 5-78 cleaning, 4-16
Dubinin-Astakhov inserting into sample tube, 4-18
calculations, C-30, C-32, C-33 Find command, 1-8
Dubinin-Radushkevich Fixed pore size table
calculations, C-28 conversion, 5-99
Folder
directory, 5-5
E Format of exported data, 5-97
Electrical requirements, 1-15 Forms, A-1
Elevator, 3-2, 6-10 f-Ratio Method dialog, 5-55
lubricating, 9-4 f-Ratio report, 5-55
raising and lowering, 6-9 example of, 7-34
Enable Manual Control command Free space, 6-5
analyzer, 6-9 calculated, 5-7, 5-23
degasser, 6-24 calculations, C-2
Equilibration for micropore analyses, E-1
calculations, C-4 Free Space dialog, 5-21
Equilibration dialog, 5-27 Freundlich report, 5-42
Equipment calculations, C-35
analyzer, 1-10 example of, 7-32
damage and loss, 2-1 Freundlich Report Options dialog, 5-42
description, 1-10 Front panel description, 3-1
returns, 2-2 Function keys
Exit command, 5-100 See Shortcut keys
Exiting the analysis program, 3-8, 5-100
Export
format, 5-97
Export command, 5-96
Jan 09 Index-3
G Indicators, 3-1
Gas Information bar, 3-9
connecting to analyzer, 2-8 Installing
connection ports, 3-4 cold trap tubes, 2-5
inlet ports, 3-4 Po tube, 2-6
regulator pressure, 4-28 software, 2-12
regulators, 1-11 vacuum pump, 2-3
requirements, 1-11 Instrument schematic
specifying ports in software, 2-26 analyzer, 6-12
Graph degasser, 6-24
copying as metafile, 7-26 Interaction parameter, C-23
copying report data as text, 7-26 Isosteric heat of adsorption, 7-14
editing onscreen, 7-24 Isotherm, G-1
grid lines, 8-11 Isotherm data
legend, editing, 7-26 exporting, 4-32, 5-96
Graph Grid Lines command, 8-11 Isotherm report, 5-37
Graph Grid Lines dialog, 8-11 example of, 7-29
Graph Overlay Samples, 5-33 Isotherm Report Options dialog, 5-37
Graph overlays, 4-33 Isothermal jacket, 4-23
Graphic, showing in report title, 5-33
Grid lines, 8-11 K
Kernel function, G-11, G-12
H Kruk-Jaroniec-Sayari Thickness Equation, 5-48
Halsey Thickness Equation, 5-48
Harkins and Jura Thickness Eequation, 5-48 L
Heat of Adsorption dialog box, 7-14
Heat of Adsorption report, 7-14 Langmuir Surface Area report, 5-39
example of, 7-37 calculations, C-7
Heating mantle example of, 7-31
connector, 3-3 Leak test
installing, 4-22 blank tube analysis (nitrogen), D-1
thermocouple, 3-3 Data sheet for recording values, D-12
Help menu, 3-15 removing differential pressure, D-9
High vacuum pump, 3-2 Valve 9, D-5
indicators, 3-4 Valve D7, D-8
specifications, 1-13 Valves 10 and 11, D-5
Horvath-Kawazoe calculations Valves D1 and D2, D-8
Cylinder pore geometry (Saito/Foley), C-21 Valves D5 and D6, D-8
Slit pore geometry (original HK), C-20 Valves P1 through P6, D-4
Sphere pore geometry (Cheng/Yang), C-22 Valves PS, 5, and 7, D-4
Horvath-Kawazoe Physical Properties dialog, 5-67 Legend Properties dialog, 7-26
Horvath-Kawazoe Plot Options dialog, 5-70 Lennard-Jones, G-2, G-8
Horvath-Kawazoe report, 5-66 Links, 1-6
calculations, C-20 List command, 5-95
example of, 7-38 Listing file statistics, 5-95
plot, 5-70 Load from File command, 6-23
tabular, 5-69
Horvath-Kawazoe Report Options dialog, 5-66
M
Main Menu bar, 3-14
I Maintenance, 9-1
Index, online, 1-7
Index-4 Jan 09
Manifold O
temperature transducer, 1-14
Oil vapor traps
Manifold temperature
replacing alumina, 9-11
calibrating, 6-20, 9-16
Online manual
Manual control, 6-9
cross references, 1-7
enabling for analyzer, 6-9
index, 1-7
MCM-41 materials, G-8
printing options, 1-9
Menu structure, 3-14
using, 1-4
Metafile, copying graph as, 7-26
See also Operator’s manual
Micropore analyses, 5-26
Open Adsorptive Properties File dialog box, 4-12
free-space values, E-1
Open Analysis Conditions File dialog box, 4-10
Models, G-1
Open command, 5-3
AR Cylindrical Pores - Oxide Surface, G-8
Open Report Options File dialog box, 4-13
AR DFT model, G-7
Open Sample Information File dialog, 4-5
AR Modified Density Functional, G-9
Open Sample Information File dialog box, 4-5, 4-7
based on classical theories, G-11
Operator’s manual
based on statistical thermocynamics, G-1
conventions, 1-3
CO2 DFT Model, G-9
online, 1-4
N2 Broekhoff-de Boer Model, G-13
organization, 1-1
N2 Cylindrical Pores - Oxide Surface, G-8
Option Presentation command, 8-2
N2 Cylindrical Pores - Pillared Clay Surface, G-8
Options menu, 8-1
N2 DFT model, G-7
Graph Grid Lines command, 8-11
N2 Halsey Thickness Curve, G-12
Option Presentation command, 8-2
N2 Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve, G-12, G-13
Parameter Files Directory, 8-12
N2 Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve model, G-12
Sample Defaults command, 8-4
N2 Modified Density Functional, G-7
Options report, 5-85
N2 Tarazona NLDFT, Esf = 30.0K, G-10
example of, 7-36
Molecular dynamics, G-2
Ordering information, 10-1
Molecular simulation methods, G-2
Overlays
Monolayer capacity, 5-42
for multiple samples, 4-33
Monte Carlo, G-2
generating, 4-33
Montmorillionite, G-8
MP-Method Plot Options dialog, 5-83
MP-Method report, 5-81 P
calculations, C-33
Parameter files, 4-8
plot, 5-83
Adsorptive properties, 5-29
tabular, 5-83
Adsorptive properties, creating, 4-12
MP-Method Report Options dialog, 5-81
Analysis conditions, 5-16
MP-Method Tabular Report Column Options dialog,
Degas conditions, 5-14
5-83
Degas conditions, creating, 4-9
listing file statistics, 4-31, 5-95
N printing contents, 4-30
printing contents of, 5-93
N2 Broekhoff-de Boer model, G-13 Report options, 5-32
N2 Broekhoff-de Boer Model model, G-13 Report options, creating, 4-13
N2 Cylindrical Pores - Oxide Surface model, G-8 Sample tube, 5-12
N2 Cylindrical Pores - Pillared Clay Surface model, G-8 Parameter files directory, 8-12
N2 DFT model, G-7 Parameters, user, 8-9
N2 Halsey Thickness Curve model, G-12 Parts, ordering, 10-1
N2 Harkins and Jura Thickness Curve model, G-13 Pass/Fail Options dialog, 5-36
N2 Modified Density Functional model, G-7 Password, 8-3
N2 Tarazona NLDFT, Esf = 30.0K model, G-10 Restricted format, 8-3
Notes, 1-3 Po and Temperature Options dialog, 5-23
Jan 09 Index-5
Po port, 3-4 graphs, editing onscreen, 7-24

Po tube, installing, 2-6 header, 7-18
Pore filling pressure, G-4 Heat of Adsorption, 7-14
Pore Geometry legend, editing, 7-26
cylinder (Saito-Foley), C-21 onscreen, shortcut menus for, 7-23
slit (original Horvath-Kawazoe), C-20 Regression, 7-7
sphere (Cheng/Yang), C-22 saving in other formats, 7-21
Pore size, G-11 selecting, 7-5
Port filter, degas, 9-7 starting, 3-8
Ports Statistical Process Control (SPC), 7-6
gas connection, 3-4 title, 5-32
Preparing samples, 4-15 Validation, 5-86
Pressure zoom feature, 7-27
measurement, 1-13 Report button, 7-10
relative, calculations, C-1, C-2 Report options dialog, 5-32
table, 5-17 Report options file, 5-32
Pressure offset creating, 4-13
calibrating, 6-19, 9-19 listing file statistics, 4-31, 5-95
calibrating (Degasser), 6-27 printing contents, 4-30
Pressure scale Report Pressure Table dialog, 5-40
calibrating, 6-20, 9-20 Reports menu, 7-1
calibrating (Degasser), 6-28 Close Reports command, 7-5
Preventive maintenance schedule, 9-3 Control Chart command, 7-11
Print command, 5-93 Rate of Adsorption command, 7-17
Printing file contents, 4-30 Regression Report command, 7-7
Psat vs. Temperature Table dialog, 5-31 SPC Report Options command, 7-6
Push buttons, 3-10 Start Report command, 7-3
Reports to Generate dialog, 7-4
Restricted format, 8-2, 8-3
R creating sample file, 4-7
Radio button, 3-9 password, 8-3
Rate of Adsorption, 7-17 Sample information file, 5-11
Pressure table entries, 5-17 specifying sample defaults, 8-4
Regression report, 7-7 Returned Materials Authorization (RMA), 2-2
recalculaing SPC values, 7-8 ROA data, collecting, 5-17
selecting X- and Y-Axes variables, 7-8 RS232 port, 3-5
Regression Report command, 7-7
Regression Report Options dialog, 7-7
Regression Report Sample Selection dialog, 7-8 S
Regularization, 5-73 Saito-Foley
Regulators calculations, C-21
Gas, 1-11 Pore Geometry, C-21
Relative pressure tolerance, 5-26 Sample
Removing an analyzer, 2-21 degassing, 4-21, 6-24
Replace push button, 3-10, 5-16 determining amount to use, 4-19
Report determining weight, 4-19
closing, 3-8, 7-5 information, defining, 4-5
Control Chart, 7-11 preparing, 4-15
displaying company logo in title, 5-33 Sample Analysis command, 6-3
Dollimore-Heal, 5-65 Sample Backfill Options, 5-28
examples, 7-28 Sample defaults, 8-4
generated automatically, 6-5 establishing for Advanced format, 8-7
generating, 7-3 establishing for Basic format, 8-4
generating automatically after analysis, 4-28
Index-6 Jan 09
Sample information file Show Instrument Schematic command

converting 2000 files to 2020 files, 5-98 analyzer, 6-12
creating, 4-5 degasser, 6-25
default values, 4-1 Show Status command
exporting isotherm data, 4-32 analyzer, 6-13
listing file statistics, 4-31, 5-95 degasser, 6-26
printing contents, 4-30, 5-93 Software
specifying defaults, 4-1 installing, 2-12
Sample Log report, 5-85 installing upgrade, 2-16
Sample port, 3-4 SPC report
Sample tube user parameters, 5-8, 8-9
choosing, 4-15 SPC Report Options command, 7-6
cleaning, 4-16 SPC Report Options dialog, 7-6
displayed on schematic, 6-11 Specifications
installed, 4-23 ASAP 2020, 1-13
installing on sample port, 4-23 SmartVac degas system, 1-14
labeling, 4-16 Spreadsheet format
replacing O-ring, 9-5 saving reports in, 7-21
set, 4-15 Start Degas command, 6-8
Sample Tube dialog, 5-12 Start Report command, 7-3
Sample tube file, 5-12 Start Report dialog box, 7-3
listing file statistics, 4-31 Status drop-down list, 3-12
printing contents, 4-30 Status list, 7-3
Saturation pressure STSA Thickness equation, 5-49
calculations, C-1 Summary report, 5-35
tube, installing, 2-6 calculations, C-40
Save All command, 5-92 Summary Report Options dialog, 5-35
Save As command, 5-90 Surface Energy, G-11
Save as Default button, 7-13 Surface Energy report, 5-75
Save command, 5-90 System
Save push button, 3-10 valves, 6-10
Save to File command, 6-23 System volume
Schematic calibrating, 6-21
analyzer, 6-12
degasser, 6-24
Select Dates dialog, 5-4 T
Service Test command, 6-29 Table of Contents, online, 1-6
Servo valve, calibrating (Degasser), 6-29 Tarazona, G-7
Setup program t-Curve
adding an analyzer, 2-16 entered, 5-47
changing an analyzer setup, 2-22 saving, 5-91
moving an analyzer to a different computer, 2-18 Temkim Report Options dialog, 5-44
reinstalling analysis program, 2-16 Temkin report, 5-44
reinstalling calibration files, 2-23 calculations, C-36
removing an analyzer from the computer, 2-21 Temperature
uninstalling the software, 2-24 calibrating, 6-20, 9-16
using for other functions, 2-15 calibration details, 6-16
Shortcut keys, 3-7 displayed on schematic, 6-11
list of, 3-8 Text, copy graph data as, 7-26
Shortcut menu, 3-7 Thermal transpiration correction, 4-15
for graphs, 7-24 calculations, C-5
for tabular reports, 7-23 choosing, 5-34
Show Instrument Log command, 6-14 Thermodynamic law, G-2
Thumbnails tab, 1-9
Jan 09 Index-7
Tile windows, 3-15 opening and closing, 6-9

Title Properties dialog, 7-26 system, 6-10
t-Plot report, 5-46 testing for leaks, D-1
calculations, C-9 Van der Waal force, G-1
t-Plot Report Options dialog, 5-46 Vapor gas port, 3-4
Transducer Viewing options, 6-3
adjusting scale, 6-20 Voltage
calibration details, 6-16 selecting, 2-5, 3-5
displayed on schematic, 6-11 Volume
zeroing, 9-19 calibrating, 6-21
Transformed Isotherm report, 5-78 calibration details, 6-16
Troubleshooting, 9-1 Volume adsorbed
calculations, C-3
U
Unit Configuration command, 6-16 W
Unit menu, 6-1 Wall potential, G-10
Calibration command, 6-19 Warm free space
Degas command, 6-24 for micropore analyses, E-1
Enable Manual Control command, 6-9 Warnings, 1-3
Sample Analysis command, 6-3 Windows
Save to File command, 6-23 Cascade, 3-15
Service Test command, 6-29 tile, 3-15
Show Instrument Log command, 6-14 Windows menu, 3-15
Show Instrument Schematic command, 6-12
Show Status command, 6-13
Start Degas command, 6-8 Z
Unit configuration command, 6-16 Zoom feature, 7-27
Units Selections dialog, 8-11
Units, selecting, 8-11
Unpacking the equipment, 2-1
User parameters, 5-8
specifying, 8-9
V
Vacuum gauge
calibrating, 6-19
calibrating (Degasser), 6-28
calibration details, 6-16
pressure, 6-11
Vacuum pump
exhaust filter, replacing, 9-7
fluid, changing, 9-9
fluid, inspecting, 9-9
installing, 2-3
panel, 3-2
placement, 3-6
Vacuum system, 1-13
Validation report, 5-86
Valves
degassing, 6-25
description, D-2
failure, 9-2
Index-8 Jan 09

ASAP 2020: Accelerated Surface Area and Porosimetry System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASAP 2020: Accelerated Surface Area and Porosimetry System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASAP 2020: Accelerated Surface Area and Porosimetry System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASAP 2020

Accelerated Surface Area and Porosimetry System

© Micromeritics Instrument Corporation 2004-2009. All rights reserved.

Moving an Analyzer from one PC to another PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Analysis Dewar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

9. TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE

Inspecting and Changing Vacuum Pump Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

10. ORDERING INFORMATION

Sphere Pore Geometry (Cheng/Yang) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22

D. TESTING FOR LEAKS

E. CALCULATING FREE-SPACE VALUES FOR MICROPORE ANALYSES

F. DEFAULT FILES AND SYSTEM FILES

One Micromeritics Drive Norcross, GA 30093-1877 Fax (770) 662-3696

Form No. 008-42104-00

• Standard Physisorption System

Organization of the Manual

The manual is divided into the following chapters:

Chapter 1 General Information

Chapter 3 USER INTERFACE

Chapter 4 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

Chapter 5 FILE MENU

Chapter 6 UNIT MENU

Chapter 7 REPORTS MENU

Chapter 8 OPTIONS MENU

Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE

Chapter 10 ORDERING INFORMATION

Appendix A ASAP Series Sample Data Worksheet

Appendix B ERROR MESSAGES

Appendix D TESTING FOR LEAKS

Appendix E CALCULATING FREE-SPACE VALUES FOR MICROPORE

Appendix F DEFAULT FILES AND SYSTEM FILES

Appendix G DFT MODELS

Notes contain a tip or important information pertinent to the subject matter.

Navigation Pane Topic Pane

Using the Table of Contents, Index, and other Links

• the table of contents

Click topic name in

Click a letter to display

Provides a description of the commands available on the File menu.

Using the Find Command

• Select the printer icon ( ) on the Adobe Acrobat toolbar.

• Select File > Print.

• Click the Thumbnails tab.

Thumbnails of manual pages are displayed.

b. Right-click to display a shortcut menu, then select Print Pages.

c. A standard Print dialog is displayed; click OK.

About Micromeritics A brief history of Micromeritics, office locations, awards/cer-

Products Product information and printable brochures

Applications Application Notes, Product Bulletins, Tech Tips, Technical

Online Catalog Catalog of instruments and accessories, allowing you to place

Customer Support Customer support contacts, product registration, instrument

Contact Us Contact information, office locations, maps and driving direc-

—————— PRESSURE MEASUREMENT ——————

Range: 0 to 950 mmHg

1000-mmHg Transducer 0.001 mmHg (Analysis system)

10-mmHg Transducer* 0.00001 mmHg

1-mmHg Transducer** 0.000001 mmHg

Accuracy (Analysis system only):